Home

Model 55i - User Manual

1. Item Description Drawing No Part No Oty 1 Screw 6 32 x 3 8 pan ph sems ss 102188 00 2 2 Retainer Thermocouple 78P518 14861 3 O ring 2 006 red silicone 11032 4 Glow plug ignitor 105567 00 10981 2 5 Detector cover 103689 00 103689 00 6 Wavy washer 104165 00 104165 00 7 Flat washer 104166 00 104166 00 8 O ring 2 018 viton 16013 9 Upper detector insulator 104155 00 104155 00 10 Collector FID 104156 00 104156 00 11 Spacer 103770 00 103770 00 12 Jet plate assembly 103773 00 103773 00 13 O ring 2 003 viton 14816 14 Base insulator 104158 00 104158 00 15 O ring 2 014 viton 6646 16 Upper detector base 104159 00 104159 00 17 Screw 6 32 x 1 4 ph flat head 101398 00 4 SCIeW SS Internal Sample Use the following procedure to replace the internal filter element and Filter Replacement aluminum seal ring Equipment Required Wrench 1 inch Long Philips head screwdriver Replacement filter element Replacement aluminum gasket Teflon pipe thread tape amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap T Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small must be worn while handling any internal component A 7 38 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Valve Actuator Thermo Fisher Scientific Repair Servicing Valve Actuator Repair 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and re
2. sssssssssssseennnetennnes E 7 Table E 8 Measurement Values sse E 8 Table E 9 Oven Temperature Values oo cece ccccccecsceseseseetesesseseeeseseseseseeseees E 8 Table E 10 Oven Temperature Values ooo cccccceccccccscesescesesteseeteseeteseseseeseees E 9 Table E 11 Remote Values cette E 10 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 1 Introduction The Model 55 Direct Methane Non Methane Hydrocarbon Analyzer is a back flush gas chromatography GC system designed for automated measurement of methane and non methane hydrocarbons Unlike instruments that measure only methane and total hydrocarbons the back flush GC method provides a direct measurement of non methane concentrations This allows accurate and precise measurement of low levels of non methane hydrocarbons NMHC even in the presence of methane at much higher concentrations The Model 55 has the following features e 320 x 240 graphics display e Menu driven firmware e Temperature controlled detector oven and sampling system e Multiple user defined analog outputs e Analog input options e Reporting of alarm conditions e Flame out detection and automatic re ignition e User programmable report generation e User selectable digital input output capabilities e Standard communications features include RS 232 485 and Ethernet e C Link MODBUS Geysitech Bayern Hessen AK streaming data and NTP
3. eese 3 66 puel Pressulte m s ieu eaten dou edeteed a ueste e 3 67 Min and Max Fuel Pressure Limits eene 3 67 Jt PEessuf eua vede dvds une dte o todo ie E rores 3 67 Min and Max Air Pressure D3miitsziu uec Dioni dien ers rae 3 68 Bias Voltage n 3 68 Min and Max Bias Voltage Limits oio eei ose tee ae 3 69 Methane Spa n CHecku oe dn utueutncue dique aie en 3 69 Min and Max Methane Span Check nasce teenies die 3 69 Non Methane Span Check s s eoe eO eisededlest tache teas 3 70 Min and Max Methane Span Check eoe 3 70 Methane C Once labial oct e idc ce tb ves ede vate ene lioet 3 70 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Min and Max Methane Concentration Limits 3 71 hU TIN Uc aan a a a a aia 3 71 Non Methane Concentration s sessesssesssseseresrsrsrrerrseresesesesesesessese 3 72 Min and Max Non Methane Concentration Limits 3 72 Min LUgest ennienni na oi ied tondeuse E 3 73 External Alarms Sc doceas e dp pe ae e ce 3 73 Service Men acetic cope bis s oe be eU Opa eed mie eie ex eee eee 3 73 Set Oven T emperdtures vases aci yeu D sd caste de OEC EN aia 3 74 Detector Oven Temperature uu uscire Ee pe Da LI RU p HERO UER 3 74 Column Oven Temperature os siia desece detecte eeema treat ranas 3 75 Manual Fuel Valve Bypass nette Depto ta soa 3 75 Bypass Flame Detection ioi pecado urea 3 76 Idle NIOde cce dc RC abt o ed a
4. ssssssssssses 9 7 Figure B 1 Faas Held aee oae tee ode B 20 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Tables Table 1 1 Inject and Backflush Connections ssssssss 1 3 Table 1 2 Model 55r SpecitiGations cece eco ttee 1 7 Table 2 1 0 Terminal Board Pin Descriptions sss 2 14 Table 2 2 Default Analog Outputs 2 15 Table 2 3 D O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions sssss 2 16 Table 2 4 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin Descriptions ssss 2 17 Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons sss 3 3 Table 3 2 Loop Size Range Values sssssssssssssss 3 9 Table 3 3 Default Analog Outputs ss 3 11 Table 3 4 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale ssssss 3 45 Table 3 5 Signal Type Group CholbBSs a ee etc tetas 3 46 Table 6 1 Model 55i Firmware Diagnostic Information 6 2 Table 6 2 Troubleshooting General Guide sssssss 6 2 Table 6 3 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages ssssssss 6 6 Table 6 4 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions ss 6 10 Table 6 5 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 15 Table 6 6 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 17 Table 6 7 0 Expansion Board Optional Connector Pi
5. Command Description Page AEMB Returns current range setting E 7 AFDA Returns total time for a measurement cycle E 3 AKAK Returns current span gas setting E 6 AKEN Returns instrument ID string E 9 AKON Returns last measurement E 4 ASOL Returns requested temperature setpoint E 8 ASTF Returns error status E 5 ASTZ Returns analyzer status E 4 ATEM Returns requested temperature E 5 AUKA Returns instantaneous FID signal E 5 EFDA Sets sampling time E 7 EKAK Sets span gas concentration E 6 EKEN Sets instrument ID string E 10 ESOL Sets oven temperatures E 9 ESYZ Sets instrument time and date E 9 SATK Run calibration E 7 SEMB Sets instrument range E 8 SINT Run measurement cycle E 8 SMAN Sets manual mode E 10 SREM Sets remote mode E 10 STBY Go to standby E 8 SAMC Allows analyzer to accept reject SREM and SMAN sets E 10 Measurements 4FDA K0 This command returns the total time for a measurement cycle in seconds The time returned is the total of the sampling time measurement time processing time Send AFDA KO Receive AFDA O 58 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual E 3 AK Protocol Commands Measurements E 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual AKON Km m Measurement This command returns last measurement of methane non methane or both according to Table E 2 If both measurements are requested the methane is the first value reported Note If no measurements have been run the instrument returns 0 A Send
6. Figure 1 1 Rotary Valve Configuration In the Model 557 the two valve positions are referred to as inject and backflush and they provide the following connection according to Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Inject and Backflush Connections Inject Backflush Carrier Inlet 5 Sample Loop 4 Carrier Inlet 5 gt Column back 6 Column front 8 Column front 8 gt FID 7 gt FID 7 Pump Vacuum 2 Sample Loop 1 Column back 6 Sample Loop 1 m 5 5 5 Pump Vacuum 2 Sample Inlet 3 Sample Loop 4 gt Sample Inlet 3 Between analyses or while running in the stand by mode the rotary valve is left in the backflush position In this position sample gas is continuously pulled through the sampling loop which is simply a coil of empty tubing This flow configuration is illustrated in Figure 1 2 To start the analysis the rotary valve is switched to the inject position as shown in Figure 1 2 This action connects the carrier inlet to the sample loop and introduces the gas sample that was in the loop into a flowing stream of inert carrier gas Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 1 3 Introduction Principle of Operation 1 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual SAMPLE CARRIER CARRIER COLUMN COLUMN Y SAMPLE PUMP SAMPLE SAMPLE LOOP PUMP LOOP A BACKFLUSH B INJECT 78P803 Figure 1 2 8 Port Rotary Valve Backflush and
7. Figure 7 5 Replacing the Fan Input Board Use the following procedure to replace the input board Figure 7 6 Re p lacement Equipment Required Input board Philips screwdriver amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 2 Disconnect the coaxial cable with BNC connector and the ribbon cable 3 Loosen the two screws holding the input box to the oven assembly and lift the input box off the screws Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 13 Servicing Input Board Calibration Input Box Screws 2 Input Board Calibration 7 14 Model 55i Instruction Manual N Input Board Input Board Screws 4 Input Box Figure 7 6 Replacing the Input Board 4 Remove the four screws holding the input board to the input box 5 Install the input board by following the previous steps in reverse 6 Re install the measurement case assembly Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter 7 Perform an input board calibration See the Input Board Calibration procedure that follows After replacing the input board use the f
8. B KEY PANEL JOBSET P am EXPANSION RS48 J15 1SPn MOTHERBOARD Msg SPAEDATA ANALOGOUTPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS 37 pn DATA Jt gt 3Pn 3Pin 5 2Hn m POWER GOCD B 2Hn PY RB RP 3Fin 3Rin 3Pin T 24VDC FEARPANH AC POWER 2C oan ACINPUT SUPPLY AC FRONT PANEL B PONERSW MEI UEEIRU EE j zm I TRANSFORVER 1 l Pd eee rr el 1 k pee VACar 240VAC Options p mates 1 Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics 6 8 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific TO COMMON ELECTRONICS 51i 55i MEASUREMENT INTERFACE BOARD DATA gt J7 3 Pin 24V J6 2 Pin AC 3 Pin J23 J27 J26 J25 J24 J22 J21 J20 J19 J18 J17 J16 J15 J14 J13 J12 J32 J11 J10 J9 J8 J5 J4 J3 10 Pin 3 Pin 7 Pin 6 Pin 5 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin Coax 2 Cond 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams INPUT BOARD Coax 2 Cond DETECTOR IGNITOR AND BIAS VOLTAGES TO DETECTOR BACK PRESSURE CONTROLLER FUEL PRESSURE CONTROLLER AIR PRESSURE CONTROLLER FUEL SOLENOID ZERO SOLENOID L SPAN1 SOLENOID SPAN2 SOLENOID w PUMP SOLENOID VENT SOLENOID NOT USED ON THE 51i AMBIENT TEMP THERM FLAME TC PUMP TC DET BASE TC
9. EXHAUST SPAN IN PORT Te me d FILTER sj teas SPAN E SOLENOID ET ii SPAN MIX 8 PORT FLOW VALVE OVEN RESTRICTOR 78P806 Figure 2 4 Suggested Sample and Span Connections with External Pump 2 10 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Sample ByPass and Thermo Fisher Scientific FID Exhaust Installation Connecting Support Gases SAMPLE INLET CHECK VALVE SPAN GAS 4 y 1 PSI OUT 2 Ne 15 PSI INPUT SAMPLE IN BY PASS SPAN OUT PORT PRESSURE PORT EXHAUST ui i yr PORT ia INTERNAL FILTER SOLENOID ee eee SPAN MIX 8 PORT I FLOW VALVE OVE ED RESTRICTOR B NM I INTERNAL PUMP 78P806 Figure 2 5 Suggested Sample and Span Connections with Internal Pump The FID exhaust and bypass exhaust are located in the lower right corner of the rear panel next to the sample inlet On some models there may be a second bypass exhaust located in the lower left corner of the rear panel In this case only one of the two bypass exhausts will be in use The FID exhaust gas is composed primarily of air and water vapor with some products of combustion If the instrument is located in a room with reasonable ventilation the FID exhaust can usually be left open to the atmosphere without creating a hazard However if the instrument is located in a smal
10. FILTER TC MEAS OUTPUT NOT USED ZERO AIR HEATER ON THE 51i ZERO AIR PUMP FAN FAN AC 7 FILTER HEATER AC 7 DETECTOR HEATER ACT PUMP HEATER AC PUMP Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 6 9 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Pin The connector pin descriptions in Table 6 4 through Table 6 9 can be D es cri pti ons used along with the board level connection diagrams to troubleshoot board level faults Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 10 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 15 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 17 I O Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 19 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 20 Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 22 Table 6 4 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator INTF DATA J1 1 Ground 2 RS485 to Interface Board 3 RS485 to Interface Board 10 BASE T J2 1 Ethernet Output 2 Ethernet Output 3 Ethernet Input 4 4 NC 5 NC 6 Ethernet Input 7 NC 8 NC EXPANSION BD J3 1 15V 2 24V 3 24V 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Ground 7 RS485 to Expansion Board 8 RS485 to Expansion Board 6 10 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fish
11. Note This function will not work if the instrument is in service mode A Request Function Code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Error Response Function Code 1 Byte Function code 0x80 Exception Code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 lllegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Model 55i Instruction Manual C 7 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported MODBUS Parameters Supported C 8 Model 55i Instruction Manual Here is an example of a request to write Coil 5 ON Request Field Name Function Output Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo Response Field Name Function Output Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Table C 1 through Table C 3 lists the MODBUS addresses supported for the Model 55i IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the coil number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A Note Coil status 1 indicates active state A Table C 1 Read Coils for 55i Coil Number Status 0 INVALID 1 LOCAL REMOTE 2 SERVICE 3 CAL MODE 4 CAL
12. eese D 2 Instrument Addressuo cose Detur etai Qua Sorgen e a es bs eer eaten D 2 Abbreviations Used seco dte Iq ta tet tedidvce dott b devote a D 2 Basic Command Ste COE ea us e o et ect iati naribus D 2 Block Checksum Characters BUG S use dte ve eost den dtt et oen D 3 Geysitech OmU d Sacs steer ei nettes det ea usu esi e e edes D 3 Instrument Control Command ST aiite D 3 Data Sampling Data Query Command DA D 4 Measurements reported in response to DA command D 6 Operating and Error Status itecto tede csec tite D 6 AK Protocol Commands eere tereereree terna tanta tnntatann E 1 TCP Communication Parameters eene E 1 CONVENTIONS 335 circ ee re e OO EDGE T E 2 Abbreviations Seda sudes t Vu deed aeger dltec E va vase de ies Aue iriesuds E 2 Basic Command Structure c nasa usted e kc lica eaa Et ae LIS E 2 Commands Liste oni tac ese cec nad debian Mast tie e Soo Lea MISES E 3 Measure rnents sace tere cete tere eret E 3 AS o tse EAM odds ES M ANS E f laa MI E 5 CCalibratiod bod ntc EN qr atu b rove toit t Raabe o hat e cs Sd E 6 Measurement Configuration ere Pei ec deret Peut eco E 7 Hardware ConBouratioi c ios tede et aee qe a enu eate E 8 Communications Configuration s ee acetone o esie qeeiisediste E 9 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Figures Figure 1 1 Rotary Valve Configuration sssssssssssee
13. Front panel board Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the three ribbon cables and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Pop the board off of the two top mounting studs and remove the board by lifting it up and off the slotted bottom support 4 Replace the front panel board by following the previous steps in reverse Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 59 Servicing LCD Module Replacement Mounting Studs 2 Ribbon Cables 3 lt _ LCD Module Replacement A A 7 60 Model 55i Instruction Manual LCD Module LCD Module Screws 2 Retaining Screw Front Panel Board Two Wire Connector zm Bottom Support Figure 7 28 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module Use the following procedure to replace the LCD module Figure 7 28 Equipment Required LCD module Philips screwdriver CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while hand
14. four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr gw 10 209 42 1 Receive set addr gw 10 209 42 1 ok addr ip This command reports the IP address of the analyzer Send addr ip Receive addr ip 10 209 40 97 set addr ip address This command sets the analyzer s IP address where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr ip 10 209 40 97 Receive set addr ip 10 209 40 97 ok addr nm This command reports the IP netmask Send addr nm Receive addr nm 255 255 252 0 Model 55i Instruction Manual B 41 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 42 Model 55i Instruction Manual set addr nm mask This command sets the netmask mask where mask consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr nm 255 255 252 0 Receive set addr nm 255 255 252 0 ok addr ntp This command reports the IP address for the network time protocol server See Network Time Protocol Server in the Communications Settings section of the Oper
15. 1 2 Figure 7 13 Location of the ID Letter on the Rotor 1 28 Figure 7 14 Removing the Detector sssssssssssee 1 33 Figure 7 15 Rebuilding the Detector sssssssssssss 7 37 Figure 7 16 Removal of a Valve on a Standoff sssssss 7 40 Figure 7 17 End Cap Removal 7 41 Figure 7 18 Removal of Subassembly from Male End Cap 7 41 Figure 7 19 Sliding the O Ring Plate Off of Shaft ssss 1 42 Figure 7 20 O Ring Locations at teet ette tete ce 1 42 Figure 7 21 Subassembly Ready to Go On nss 1 43 Figure 7 22 O Ring Plate Orientation 7 44 Figure 7 23 Two Position Actuator Exploded View 7 45 Figure 7 24 Visual Check of Alignment Rotor Pin Shown in Both Positions 7 46 Figure 7 25 Replacing the I O Expansion Board Optional 7 55 Figure 7 26 Rear Panel Board Connectors sss 7 55 Figure 7 27 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board 7 58 Figure 7 28 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module 7 60 Figure 8 1 Hardware Components 0 c cccccccscsscssescsseseesesessesteseeteseeteseseeseaees 0 2 Figure 9 1 Bench Mounting soi ber de tet end tette te bout 9 4 Figure 9 2 EIA Rack Mounting 9 5 Figure 9 3 Retrofit Rack Mounting 9 6 Figure 9 4 Rack Mount Option Assembly
16. C1 Methane Channel NM Non Methane Channel The following is a list of abbreviations used in this document lt STX gt is abbreviation for Start of Text ASCII code 0x02 lt ETX gt is abbreviation for End of Text ASCII code 0x03 lt SP gt is abbreviation for space ASCII code 0x20 The following is the basic structure of an AK command All commands issued follow the message format lt STX gt lt SP gt AAAA lt SP gt argument lt SP gt argument lt ETX gt Where AAAA the 4 character command code Response Format lt STX gt lt SP gt AAAA lt SP gt digit lt SP gt argument lt ETX gt Where digit a single digit sum of the number of alarm conditions present in the analyzer Each command is framed by control characters lt STX gt at the start and terminated with lt ETX gt Values within brackets are ASCII characters see Abbreviations Used above Error messages are generated if a command cannot be executed at the current time or if the command parameters are out of range BS returned with a command indicates that the instrument is in the wrong state to execute the command SE indicates that at least one of the command s parameters is out of range Thermo Fisher Scientific AK Protocol Commands Commands List Commands List Table F lists che 55i AK protocol commands The interface will respond to the command strings outlined below Table E 1 Command List
17. Note If the display contrast is not optimal but the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible use the set contrast 10 C Link command to set the screen contrast to mid range then optimize the contrast See contrast levels in Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands for more information on this command A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Screen Contrast The Service Mode screen is used to turn the service mode on or off Turning service mode ON locks out any remote actions and allows access to parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing the Model 557 The service wrench icon on the status bar is shown when service mode is on For more information about the service mode see Service Menu later in this chapter Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 51 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Note The service mode should be turned off when finished as it prevents remote operation A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Service Mode Date Time The Date Time screen allows the user to view and change the system date and time 24 hour format The internal clock is powered by its own battery when instrument power is off e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Date Time Timezone The Timezone screen is used to set the timezone for the Ne
18. THC Zero 0 CH4 range NMHC Range Detector Temp Filter Temp Column Temp Internal Temp Air Pressure Carrier Pressure Fuel Pressure User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flame Temp 210 C 300 C Raw Signal 0 30 000 000 Hz Flame Status Recommend user not to change th e settings for this output CH4 Peak Height 0 30 000 000 Hz CH4 Peak Retention Time 0 100 sec CH4 Baseline CH4 LOD 0 30 000 000 NMHC Peak Height NMHC Peak Area 0 3 000 000 000 NMHC Baseline Start NMHC Baseline End 0 30 000 000 NMHC LOD NMHC Start Index 0 100 sec NMHC End Index NMHC Max Slope 0 100 NMHC Min Slope 0 100 NMHC Data Points 0 100 Everything Else 0 units 10 units Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 45 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 3 46 Choose Signal to Output Model 55i Instruction Manual The Choose Signal to Output screen displays a list of the analog output signal choices Choices are grouped into three categories Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed This allows the user to select the output signal that will be assigned to each analog channel The Concentrations screen is shown below See Table 3 5 below for a list of items for each signal group choice e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Ou
19. Thermo Fisher Scientific Soft Keys Operation Pushbuttons Table 3 1 lists the front panel pushbuttons and their functions Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons Key Name Function C 1 Soft Keys The C 1 soft keys are used to provide shortcuts that allow the user to jump to user selectable menu screens For more information on processing soft keys see Soft Keys below gt Run The gt is used to display the Run screen The Run screen normally displays the measurement of methane and non methane organics Menu The is used to display the Main Menu when in the Run screen or back up one level in the menu system For more information about the Main Menu see Main Menu later in this chapter 2 Help The 2 is context sensitive that is it provides additional information about the screen that is being displayed Press 2 for a brief explanation about the current screen or menu Help messages are displayed using lower case letters to easilv distinguish them from the operating screens Press to return to the Run screen or any other key to exit a help screen Up Down The four arrow pushbuttons t C e Jand J 9 Left Right gt _ move the cursor up down left and right or change values and states in specific screens Enter The is used to select a menu item accept set save a change and or toggle on off functions The soft keys are multi
20. Verify instrument configuration and power label and compare to local power Verify 120 VAC power cable is attached to J1 AC IN on measurement interface board and the motherboard Verify 24 V power cable is attached to J6 24V IN on measurement interface board and the power supply Flame will not light Gas flows need adjustment Ignitor circuit failure Ignitor failure Oven not fully heated Sensor failure Check support gas pressures at the cylinder and instrument front panel against factory test sheet and adjust as necessary Check gas flow rates at FID exhaust and compare to suggested values Adjust fuel pressure up by 2 psi and or air pressure down by 2 psi Check ignitor voltage at power supply test point during ignition cycle Move ignitor supply lead to alternate ignitor Replace bad ignitor if necessary Check the flame temperature while the flame is out If flame temperature is below detector temperature by more than 5 degrees wait for full stabilization Check oven and flame temperatures reported under Diagnostics menu Check temperatures and FID signal reported on flame status screen Diagnostic menu Model 55 Instruction Manual 6 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides 6 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual Low or no signal from FID Flame out or low Signal cable is loose Signal post short to ground Check status screen for current flame temperature and signal Ch
21. sBuijes wwog sBum s Buibbojejeq sbunmes dung ejqeug uaAQ 430 9jqeua uaAQ 09 seainssaig seo 401284 asuoday euin Burjdues apow 1edo 19S sonsouBeiq Sjo11u02 juauinujsu uoHeiqed syineyaq 129 4asfp jesey wes6oyewo1y9 0197 esf So 9 2 UOLIA UIN uoneoyueA ony dn s je ony 32u09 seo SJ0joUIEJed uoneqire nuajy ure jy uaeiog uny uae10S S21 Hes uee10S dn i9 od 3 5 Model 55i Instruction Manual uey 2HIWN abuey suey uey Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Firmware Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview Power Up Screen The Power Up screen is displayed when power is applied to the Model 557 This screen is displayed while the internal components are warming up and diagnostic checks are being performed Thermo SCIENTIFIC iSeries Run Screen The Run screen displays the current methane and non methane concentrations The status bar displays the time the password lock icon service wrench icon alarm bell icon and optional zero span sample solenoid valve status if installed Status Bar Icons The password lock icon indicates that iea ie no parameter changes can be made from 3 B A ihe alarm ell icon indicates that an alarm is active the front panel t The service wrench icon indicates that the instrument is in the service mode The title bar on the top
22. 10 volts The instrument includes one power fail relay on the motherboard and ten digital output relays on the digital output board These are reed relays rated for at least 500 mA 200 VDC The power fail relay is Form C both normally opened and normally closed contacts All other relays are Form A normally opened contacts and are used to provide alarm status and mode information from the analyzer as well as remote control to other devices such as for controlling valves during calibration The user may select what information is sent out from each relay and whether the active state is opened or closed Sixteen digital inputs are available which may be programmed to signal instrument modes and special conditions including e Start Run Model 55i Instruction Manual 8 9 System Description 1 0 Components Serial Ports RS 232 Connection 8 10 Model 55i Instruction Manual e Start Cal e Start Cal Chk e Stop e Inject e Backflush e Analog outputs to zero e Analog outputs to full scale e Set Idle Mode e Ext Alarms 1 2 3 The actual use of these inputs will vary based on analyzer configuration All inputs are assignable The digital inputs are TTL level compatible and are pulled up within the analyzer The active state can be user defined in the firmware Two serial ports allow daisy chaining so that multiple analyzers may be linked using one PC serial port The standard bi directional serial interface can
23. Rebuilding the Pump New Technology 5 7 Figure 5 4 Rebuilding the Pump 5 9 Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics 6 8 Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System 6 9 Figure 6 3 Normal Chromatograms ssssssssssssene 6 24 Figure 6 4 Gas Leak in Column Oven Chromatograms 6 25 Figure 6 5 Contaminated Carrier Gas Chromatograms 6 26 Figure 6 6 Contaminated Column Chromatograms ssss 6 27 Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap 7 4 Figure 7 2 Model 55i Component Layout 1 8 Figure 7 3 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the xc ipd Te dips 7 9 Figure 7 4 Replacing the Pump 7 11 Figure 7 5 Replacing the Fan 1 13 Figure 7 6 Replacing the Input Board 7 14 Figure 7 7 Replacing the DC Power Supply ssssssssssss 1 16 Model 55i Instruction Manual xvii Figures xviii Model 55i Instruction Manual Figure 7 8 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins 1 18 Figure 7 9 Replacing the Thermistor sss 1 22 Figure 7 10 8 Valve Rotor Disassembly ssssssssssssssss 1 25 Figure 7 11 Valve with Pre Load Removed ssssssssssss 1 26 Figure 7 12 Holding the Rotor Viewed from Pre Load End
24. The c1 alarm level and nm alarm level commands report only the max alarm The following example reports that the methane concentration minimum is 200 ppb Send alarm conc c1 min Receive alarm conc c1 min 200 000 ppb set alarm conc cl min value set alarm conc cl max value Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms set cl alarm level value set alarm conc nm min value set alarm conc nm max value set nm alarm level value These commands set the methane non methane and total hydrocarbon concentration alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point representation of the concentration alarm limits Values must be in the units that are currently set for use The set cl alarm level and set nm alarm level commands set only the max alarm The following example sets the C1 concentration alarm maximum value to 2000 Send set alarm conc c1 max 2000 Receive set alarm conc c1 max 2000 ok alarm detector temp min alarm detector temp max These commands report the current detector temperature alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the detector temperature alarm minimum value is 170 0 C Send alarm detector temp min Receive alarm detector temp min 170 0 deg C set alarm detector temp min value set alarm detector temp max value These commands set the detector temperature alarm minimum and maximum va
25. The analyzer s default baud rate is set to 9600 to provide backwards compatibility with the older C series analyzers e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Serial Settings Baud Rate PILSPIPPO Data Bits The Data Bits screen is used to set the number of serial data bits to either 7 or 8 default e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Serial Settings Data Bits 3 30 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Parity The Parity screen is used to select the parity bit for the serial port to None default Even or Odd e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Serial Settings Parity EH DENM USE CIVGL Fiir POE hei cee PUERSPUPEP F Stop Bits The Stop Bits screen is used to set the number of stop bits for the serial port to 1 default or 2 e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Stop Bits E PUHE CIVGL RS 232 RS 485 Selection The RS 232 RS 485 Selection screen allows the user to choose between the RS 232 or RS 485 specification for serial communication 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to any equipment currently connected to the analyzer A T Equipment Damage Disconnect the serial cable before changing the RS e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Contro
26. Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging The following example copies the current list of lrecs into the scratch pad Send set copy lrec to sp Receive set copy lrec to sp ok sp field number This command reports the variable number and name stored at the index in the scratch pad list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list The following example shows that field 5 in the scratch pad is set to index number 12 which is for the fuel pressure Send sp field 5 Receive sp field 5 12 fuel psi set sp field number value number 1 32 for lrec and srec lists 1 8 for streaming data lists This command sets the scratch pad field number item number in scratch pad list to value where value is the index number of a variable in the analog output variable list Available variables and their corresponding index numbers may be obtained using the command list var aout The set sp field command is used to create a list of variables which can then be transferred into the lrec srec or streaming data lists using the set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec or set copy sp to stream commands Send set sp field 1 5 Receive set sp field 1 5 ok stream per This comma
27. Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description SPI Clock DIGITAL OUTPUTS J2 cO OO nN oon 4 CO DN gt N ce N gt N N R N co co N o O1 E 99 N wo wow WoO N N N N N N N N N N N O cO O N DO ON FP CO N O Relay 1 Contact a Relay 2 Contact a Relay 3 Contact a Relay 4 Contact a Relay 5 Contact a Relay 6 Contact a Relay 7 Contact a Relay 8 Contact a Relay 9 Contact a Relay 10 Contact a NC Solenoid Drive Output 1 Solenoid Drive Output 2 Solenoid Drive Output 3 Solenoid Drive Output 4 Solenoid Drive Output 5 Solenoid Drive Output 6 Solenoid Drive Output 7 Solenoid Drive Output 8 Relay 1 Contact b Relay 2 Contact b Relay 3 Contact b Relay 4 Contact b Relay 5 Contact b Relay 6 Contact b Relay 7 Contact b Relay 8 Contact b Relay 9 Contact b Relay 10 Contact b 24V 24V 24V Model 55i Instruction Manual 6 21 Troubleshooting Performance Problems Performance Problems 6 22 Model 55i Instruction Manual Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 33 24V 34 24V 35 24V 36 24V 37 24V Table 6 9 Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Label Designator PMT IN J1 1 PMT Input Signal Description N Ground 15V INTF BD J2 Ground 15V 5V Ground Measurement
28. Valid fields are t parse a time specifier 2 bytes D parse a date specifier 3 bytes i ignore one 8 bit character 1 byte e parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes n x E parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes N x f parse a 32 bit floating point number 4 bytes c parse an 8 bit signed number 1 byte C parse an 8 bit unsigned number 1 byte n parse a 16 bit signed number 2 bytes N parse a 16 bit unsigned number 2 bytes m parse a 24 bit signed number 3 bytes M parse a 24 bit unsigned number 3 bytes parse a 32 bit signed number 4 bytes L parse a 32 bit unsigned number 4 bytes There is an optional single digit d which may follow any of the numeric fields which indicates that after the field has been parsed out the resulting value is to be divided by 104d Thus the 16 bit field OxFFC6 would be interpreted with the format specifier n3 as the number 0 058 The subsequent lines in the erec layout response describe the appearance of the full panel The full instrument panel as it appears on the screen has two columns of lines Each line is composed of three major components 1 a text field 2 a value field and 3 a button None of these three components is required The text field contains statically displayed text The value field displays values which are parsed out of the response to a erec command It also displays though background changes alarm status T
29. an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Internal Temp EH DHOBM The Minimum Internal Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum internal temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum internal temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Internal Temp Min or Max Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 63 Operation Alarms Menu Detector Temperature The Detector Temperature screen displays the current detector temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 95 to 205 C These values should be set relatively tightly around the set point as defined in the Service gt Set Oven Temperatures gt Detector Oven screen If the detector temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Detector Temp Min and Max Detector The Minimum Detector Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change Temperature Limits the minimum detector temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum detector temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Detector Temp Min or Max Filter Temperature The Filter Temperature screen displa
30. command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration Send analog vin 1 Receive analog vin 1 75 325 2 796 analog vout range channel This command reports the analog voltage output channel range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive according to Table B 14 The following example reports that analog voltage output channel 2 is set to 3 0 10 V Send analog vout range 2 Receive analog vout range 2 3 set analog vout range channel range This command sets analog voltage output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 14 The following example sets channel 2 to the 0 10 V range Send set analog vout range 2 3 Receive set analog vout range 2 3 ok Table B 14 Analog Voltage Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 1 V 2 0 100 mV 3 0 10 V 4 0 5 V 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined dig in This command reports the status of the digital inputs as a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the most significant bit MSB being input 16 Send dig in Receive dig in Oxff7f din channel This command reports the action assigned to the digital input channel and the index number of the corresponding active state The following example reports input 5 to be assigned an index number 9 corresponding to ac
31. e THC Operating and Error See Table D 1 for operating status and Table D 2 for error status for the D 6 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 55i Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 220 1 Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Operating status Service Mode On 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Maintenance Local 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Running a Zero Chromatogram 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Running a Span Chromatogram 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Running a Sample Chromatogram 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Valve in Inject Position 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Valve in Backflush Position 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Column Conditioning State 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 55i D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 220 Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Error status Internal Temperature Alarm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Flame Out Alarm 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Detector or Filter or Column Temp 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Alarm Bias Voltage Alarm 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Pressure Alarm All 3 pressures 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Heater Fail Alarm 0 0 1 10 0 0 0 0 Temp Sensor Fail Alarm 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Conc Alarm CH or NMHC 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
32. of the pressures is selected for adjustment the Target Flow Set Pressure screen is displayed At this point a 0 500 cc min flow meter should be connected to the exhaust bulkhead on the rear panel Caution the fittings are hot The analyzer cannot measure the flow rate but this screen displays a target flow that should be achieved by adjusting the set pressure Note that the analyzer temporarily shuts off the pump unless the sample run or ignite pressure is being adjusted so that the flow rates can be measured correctly Once target flow have been achieved for the carrier air and fuel refer to Optimizing the Gas Flows in the Servicing chapter Note Pressures are set at the factory and should not be arbitrarily changed A Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A Note The Model 55 must be stabilized at the set temperature in order for the gas flows to be set properly A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Set Pressure and Flow The following example sets the AIR RUN target flow and set pressure adjustment 3 86 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu EDERHSE TEE ELEM LH pi eo bet DUSEPUPLGL i NG Input Board Calibration The Input Board Calibration menu is used to initiate a calibration of the input board A D stages Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu
33. response Note The instrument will always respond to the command mode with the status of the password lock as mode local or mode remote regardless of the above setting A The following example sets the instrument to accept the set mode local and set mode remote commands Send set allow mode cmd 1 Receive set allow mode cmd 1 ok Table B 10 Allow Mode Command Values Value Allow Mode Command 0 Ignore default 1 Accept power up mode This command reports the current power up mode setting to either 0 local unlocked or 1 remote locked according to Table B 11 The default value is 0 power up in local unlocked mode The following example shows that the instrument is configured to power up in the remote locked mode Send power up mode Receive power up mode 1 set power up mode value This command is used to configure the instrument to power up in the local unlocked mode value 0 or the remote locked mode value 1 according to Table B 11 If the instrument is set to power up in the local remote mode the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel If the instrument is set to power up in the remote locked mode changes can not be made from the front panel The following example sets the instrument to power up in P g P P P remote locked mode Send set power up mode 1 Receive set power up mode 1 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configura
34. span conc nm med span conc nm high These commands report the methane and non methane span gas concentration in 1 span gas mode OR the selected low middle or high concentration in 3 span mode The following example reports that the methane calibration gas concentration in 1 span gas mode is 40 0 ppb Send span conc c1 Receive span conc c1 4 000E401 ppb set cl span value set cl span low value Model 55i Instruction Manual B 29 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 30 Model 55i Instruction Manual set cl span med value set cl span high value set span conc cl value set span conc cl low value set span conc cl med value set span conc cl high value set nm span value set nm span low value set nm span med value set nm span high value set span conc nm value set span conc nm low value set span conc nm med value set span conc nm high value These commands set the methane and non methane span gas concentration in 1 span gas mode OR the selected low middle or high concentration in 3 span mode to value where value is a floating point representation of the gas concentration in the currently selected units The gas units must be the same as those chosen by the user in the Range menu The following example sets the high range calibration gas for non methane to 1800 in the units chosen in the Range menu Send set nm span high 1800 Receive set nm span high 1800 ok zero chromatogram This command reports whether the us
35. 1 3 Figure 1 2 8 Port Rotary Valve Backflush and Inject Positions 1 4 Figure 1 3 Typical Model 55 Span Gas Chromatogram 1 6 Figure 1 4 Model 55i Flow Schematic sssssssssses 1 7 Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material ssssssssssss 2 3 Figure 2 2 Model 55i Rear Panel sss 2 5 Figure 2 3 Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing sssssss 2 9 Figure 2 4 Suggested Sample and Span Connections with External Pump 2 10 Figure 2 5 Suggested Sample and Span Connections with Internal Pump 2 11 Figure 2 6 0 Terminal Board Views sssssssssee 2 14 Figure 2 7 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector ssssssss 2 15 Figure 2 8 D O Terminal Board Views sssssssssses 2 16 Figure 2 9 25 Pin Terminal Board Views sssssssssssss 2 17 Figure 2 10 Test Chromatograms sic ccc coo entretien teet 2 21 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display ssssssssssnes 3 2 Figure 3 2 Front Panel Pushbuttons ssssssssssssseee 3 2 Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Firmware sss 3 5 Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector sssssssss 3 11 Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters cece 5 3 Figure 5 2 Cleaning the Internal Filter Element sess 5 5 Figure 5 3
36. 1 pushbutton B 31 2 Stimulates pressing soft key 2 pushbutton B 31 3 Stimulates pressing soft key 3 pushbutton B 31 4 Stimulates pressing soft key 4 pushbutton B 31 addr dns Reports sets domain name server address for Ethernet port B 40 addr gw Reports sets default gateway address for Ethernet port B 41 addr ip Reports sets IP address for Ethernet port B 41 addr nm Reports sets netmask address for Ethernet port B 41 addr ntp Reports sets IP address for network time protocol server B 42 air control pressure Reports sets current air control pressure B 35 air pressure Reports current air pressure B 10 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual B 3 C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page alarm bias voltage Reports sets bias voltage alarm maximum value B 13 max alarm bias voltage Reports sets bias voltage alarm minimum value B 13 min alarm ch4 chk max Reports sets current methane cal check alarm maximum B 13 value alarm ch4 chk min Reports sets current methane cal check alarm minimum B 13 value alarm column temp Reports sets column temperature alarm maximum value B 14 max alarm column temp Reports sets column temperature alarm minimum value B 14 min alarm conc c1 max Reports sets current methane concentration alarm maximum B 14 value alarm conc c1 min Reports sets current methane concentration alarm minimum B 14 value alarm conc nm max Reports sets current non me
37. 12 Digital to Analog converters according to l able B 15 The following example shows that the D A 1 is 97 7 full scale Note If the instrument is in a mode which does not provide a particular output and that output is selected the value will be 0 0 A Note All channel ranges are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A Send dtoa 1 Receive dtoa 1 97 7 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Table B 15 Default Analog Output Channel Assignments D to A Function Parameter 1 Voltage Output Raw Signal 2 Voltage Output Methane 3 Voltage Output NMHC 4 Voltage Output THC 5 Voltage Output Not Assigned 6 Voltage Output Not Assigned 7 Current Output Raw Signal 8 Current Output Methane g Current Output NMHC 10 Current Output THC 11 Current Output Not Assigned 12 Current Output Not Assigned list din list dout C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration These commands report the current selection for the digital inputs or the digital outputs in the format Output no Index number variable name active state The active state for digital outputs is open or closed The active state for digital inputs is high or low Channels that have not been assigned a variable index are not displayed Send Receive list var aout list var dout list var din list dout list dout output index variable st
38. 2 Detector Base TC PMP COL TC J14 Pump Column TC 2 Pump Column TC FLAME TC J15 Flame TC 2 Flame TC AMB TEMP J16 Ambient Temperature Thermistor 2 Ground VENT J17 24V 2 Vent Solenoid Control PUMP J18 24V 2 Pump Solenoid Control SPAN2 CAL J19 24V 2 Span2 Cal Solenoid Control SPAN1 INJ J20 24V 2 Span1 Inject Solenoid Control ZERO BF J21 24V 2 Zero Back Flush Solenoid Control FUEL J22 24V 2 Fuel Solenoid Control INPUT BD J23 15V 2 Ground 3 15V 4 5V 5 Ground 6 Measurement Frequency Output 7 Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage 8 SPI Output 9 SPI Clock 10 SPI Board Select AIR CNTRL J24 1 24V 2 Ground 3 No Connection 4 Air Pressure In 6 16 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Reference Label Designator Pin Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Air Pressure Control FUEL CNTRL J25 o oO A CO N 24V Ground No Connection Fuel Pressure In Fuel Pressure Control No Connection BP CARR CNTRL J26 c OC FP CO N 24V Ground No Connection Back Press Carrier Press In Back Press Carrier Press Control No Connection No Connection IGN BIAS J27 CO N Ignite Voltage Ground Bias Voltage MEAS OUT J32 Measurement Output Ground Table 6 6 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Label Designator MOTHERBOARD J1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Pin cO CO
39. 4 2004 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the iSeries to support MODBUS RTU protocol Number of Data bits 7 or 8 Number of Stop bits lor2 Parity None Odd or Even Data rate 1200 to 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 55i Instruction Manual C 1 MODBUS Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Application Data Unit Definition Slave Address MBAP Header C 2 Model 55i Instruction Manual iSeries instruments support the MODBUS TCP protocol The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for MODBUS 502 Here are the MODBUS ADU Application Data Unit formats over serial and TCP IP Serial Slave Address Function Code Data Error Check TCP IP MBAP Header Function Code Data The MODBUS slave address is a single byte in length This is the same as the instrument ID used for C Link commands and can be between 1 and 127 decimal i e 0x01 hex to Ox7F hex This address is only used for MODBUS RTU over serial connections The default value is 55 Note Device ID 0 used for broadcast MODBUS commands is not supported Device IDs 128 through 247 i e 0x80 hex to OxF7 hex are not supported because of limitations imposed by C Link A In MODBUS over TCP IP MODBUS Application Protoco
40. 7 17 End Cap Removal 5 Place the actuator on a hard work surface with the O ring screw holes up Push down on the cylinder and the female end cap will pop up 6 While holding the cylinder and the rest of the assembly together pull the female cap all the way off If the bearing and washers fall out just set them aside 7 Repeat the procedure with the actuator inverted so that the cylinder slides loose from the male end cap Remove the cylinder 8 Pull the subassembly off the male end cap as indicated in Figure 7 17 Note Recently purchased actuators may have a subassembly made primarily from molded plastic differing in appearance from the one shown in Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 and Figure 7 19 The procedures are the same for either type DRIVESHAFT O RING PLATE Figure 7 18 Removal of Subassembly from Male End Cap Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 41 Servicing Valve Actuator Repair SUBASSEMBLY MALE END CAP Figure 7 19 Sliding the O Ring Plate Off of Shaft 9 Loosen but do not remove the three slotted head screws that hold the subassembly together 10 Take care to hold the rest of the subassembly together and slide the O ring plate off the drive shaft see Figure 7 19 If the subassembly comes apart despite your caution reassembly instructions are provided at the end of this procedure O Ring Replacement The O rings to be replaced are in the two end caps the three O ring 7
41. AKON KO Receive AKON O 1 325 4 793 Table E 2 Measurement Values Measurement Description 0 Both 1 Methane 2 Non methane ASTZ KO This command returns status of the instrument according to the format ASTZ x MMMM FFFF SSSS V1V1 V2V2 where MMMM Mode SREM Remote SMAN Manual FFFF Active Function STBY Standby SATK Calibration in progress SINT Measurement in progress SSSS Analyzer Specific Measurement Mode SCAL Calculation time SINJ Inject SRUC Backflush SDLY Dead Time VxVx Vendor Specific Codes OHOT Ovens Hot Pre Operation State OCLD Ovens Cold Pre Operation Warm Up State CCMD Condition Column State Maintenance Only Condition AUCL Auto calibration Mode FAIL Failure Mode flame not lit Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarms AK Protocol Commands Alarms The following example shows that the instrument is in remote mode measurement is in progress the valve is in the inject position and that the oven is hot Send ASTZ KO Receive ASTZ O SREM SINT SINJ OHOT ATEM Km m Temperature This command returns the requested temperature in Kelvin according to Table E 3 The following example reports that the detector base temperature is 448 K 175 C If all are requested they are reported in the order shown in the table below Send ATEM K1 Receive ATEM 2 448 Table E 3 Temperature Values Temperature Description 0 All 1 Detector Base 2 Co
42. Analog Input and Output Pins Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Voltage Pin Current Pin Channel Channel 1 14 1 15 2 33 2 17 3 15 3 19 4 34 4 21 5 17 5 23 6 36 6 25 Ground 16 18 19 35 37 Current Output Return 13 16 18 20 22 24 Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Output Calibration Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Input Channel Pin 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 9 8 10 Ground 4 8 11 14 Ana log Outp Ut Use the following procedure to calibrate the analog outputs if a meter Calibration reading in the Analog Output Testing procedure differed by more than one percent or after replacing the motherboard or the optional I O expansion board Equipment Required Multimeter 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be adjusted and set to voltage or current as appropriate Figure 7 8 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Service Analog Out Cal The Analog Output Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Analog Output Cal menu press to scroll to the desired voltage channel or current channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pin where the meter is connected then press 4
43. Backflush must occur after the methane peak has completely returned to baseline but should not be delayed any longer than necessary If the window value has changed since the previous zero run the instrument will respond with ZERO CHROM DATA IS INVALID Note Changing this value could severely affect the operation of the instrument If adjustment becomes necessary please contact the service center for further information A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Set Window Timing gt Backflush EEEBRASE TET DTE DH DIEM USE CIL 4 RO 4o gPRg 23 EE fee EE EE The NMHC Start and NMHC End screens are used to set the time at which the NMHC window starts and ends Data is collected only while the window is open If the window value has changed since the previous zero run the instrument will respond with ZERO CHROM DATA IS INVALID The NMHC start and end screens function the same way Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 79 Operation Service Menu Crucial Settings Slope Threshold 3 80 Model 55i Instruction Manual Note Changing these values could severely affect the operation of the instrument If adjustment becomes necessary please contact the service center for further information A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Set Window Timing gt NMHC Start or NMHC End UO Mihei i The Crucial Settings menu is used to adjust software parameters that control the integration method and calibration of some hardware
44. Both 1 Methane 2 Non Methane Table E 6 Range Values Range Description 0 Low 1 Medium 2 High EKAK Km Mr xxxx yyyy This command sets the span gas concentrations for the selected range Table E 6 for methane and non methane to xxxx and yyyy where xxxx and yyyy are floating point representations of the gas concentrations in the Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific AK Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration currently selected units The gas units are the same as those chosen by the user in the Range menu The following example sets the calibration gas concentration for methane to 2 500 and non methane to 5 000 for the medium range Send EKAK KO M1 2 500 5 000 Receive EKAK 2 SATK KO This command starts a calibration run The following example indicates that the calibration command was executed Send SATK KO Receive SATK 1 AEMB Km This command reports the current methane or non methane range Table E 5 The following example reports that the methane range is set to custom range 1 according to Table E 7 If both range settings are requested methane is returned first Send AEMB K1 Receive AEMB O 4 Table E 7 Range Values Range Description 1 Low Medium High Custom Range 1 Custom Range 2 mojoj SS wo n Custom Range 3 EFDA KO zz This command sets the sample time to value where value is an integer representation of
45. CHECK MODE 5 RUN MODE Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Coil Number Status 6 IDLE MODE 7 INJECT 8 ZERO MODE 9 SPAN MODE 10 GEN ALARM 11 CH4 CONC MAX ALARM 12 CH4 CONC MIN ALARM 13 NM CONC MAX ALARM 14 NM CONC MIN ALARM 15 INTERNAL TEMP ALARM 16 DETECTOR TEMP ALARM 17 FILTER TEMP ALARM 18 COLUMN TEMP ALARM 19 AIR PRESSURE ALARM 20 CARRIER PRESSURE ALARM 21 FUEL PRESSURE ALARM 22 FLAME OUT ALARM 23 CH4 OVERRANGE ALARM 24 NM OVERRANGE ALARM 25 CAL FAILURE ALARM 26 HEATER FAILURE ALARM 27 SENSOR FAILURE ALARM 28 BIAS VOLTAGE ALARM 29 DATA INTEGRITY ALARM 30 CH4 SPAN CHK ALARM 31 NM SPAN CHK ALARM 32 WINDOWS SANITY ALARM 33 MOTHERBOARD STATUS ALARM 34 INTERFACE BD STATUS ALARM 35 1 0 EXP BD STATUS ALARM 36 EXTERNAL ALARM 1 37 EXTERNAL ALARM 2 38 EXTERNAL ALARM 3 Model 55i Instruction Manual C 9 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported C 10 Model 55i Instruction Manual IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the register number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the register number on the instrument Note For additional information on how to read registers and interpret the data refer to the 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers section in thi
46. Frequency Output Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage SPI Input SPI Clock SPI Board Select cO OO N on A CO N PEN ce Performance problems such as poor accuracy or repeatability can usually be traced to issues involving either the detector or the chromatographic system Poor chromatography typically causes problems such as inability to obtain a valid calibration high readings when analyzing zero air or lower than expected readings on the actual sample Chromatography problems appear most often at the time of initial installation or after a prolonged shut down Some detector malfunctions such as difficulty keeping the flame lit are easily identified and are addressed under the discussion of hardware malfunctions However more subtle detector problems can also occur Detector malfunctions most often show up in test chromatograms as a noisy baseline signal as negative peaks or dips in the baseline or as extreme sensitivity to vibration In most cases detector problems must be corrected Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Performance Problems by replacement of the detector O rings and cleaning of the jet collector and insulators Procedures for removing and cleaning the detector are described in the chapter on service In order to analyze instrument performance problems it is essential to have a chart recorder or other data acquisition system that can be used to record the instrument chromatogra
47. Methane Concentration screen displays the current instrument Concentration reading NMHC concentration and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to the highest range value for the installed sample loop The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value If the concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Non Methane Conc Min and Max Non Methane The Minimum Non Methane Concentration alarm limit screen is used to Concentration Limits change the minimum NMHC concentration alarm limit The minimum and maximum non methane concentration alarm limit screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Non Methane Conc Min or Max 3 72 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Min Trigger External Alarms Service Menu Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu The Minimum Trigger screen allows the user to view and set the minimum NMHC concentration alarm trigger type to either floor or ceiling The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum val
48. Model 55i Instruction Manual D 7 TCP Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix E AK Protocol Commands This appendix provides a description of the AK protocol commands that can be used to remotely control a Model 55 analyzer using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger AK protocol may be used over RS 232 RS 485 or Ethernet AK functions can be accessed over Ethernet using TCP port 9883 Up to three simultaneous connections per protocol may be made over Ethernet For details of the Model 55 AK protocol specification see the following topics e TCP Communication Parameters on page E 1 e Conventions on page E 2 e Abbreviations Used on page E 2 e Basic Command Structure on page E 2 e Commands List on page E 3 e Measurements on page E 3 e Alarms on page E 5 e Calibration on page E 6 e Measurement Configuration on page E 7 e Hardware Configuration on page E 8 e Communications Configuration on page E 9 iSeries instruments support the AK protocol over TCP IP The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for AK 9883 Model 55i Instruction Manual E 1 AK Protocol Commands Conventions Conventions Abbreviations Used Basic Command Structure E 2 Model 55i Instruction Manual The following conventions are used by the AK protocol
49. N CD Ol A CO N gt ce Signal Description Ground Ground LCLK LCD Signal Ground Ground LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal LDO LCD Signal LD5 LCD Signal Model 55i Instruction Manual 6 17 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 11 LD1 LCD Signal 12 LD6 LCD Signal 13 LD2 LCD Signal 14 LD7 LCD Signal 15 LD3 LCD Signal 16 LCD Bias Voltage 17 15V 18 Ground 19 Ground 20 LCD ONOFF LCD Signal 21 Keypad Row 2 Input 22 Keypad Row 1 Input 23 Keypad Row 4 Input 24 Keypad Row 3 Input 25 Keypad Col 2 Select 26 Keypad Col 1 Select 27 Keypad Col 4 Select 28 Keypad Col 3 Select 29 Ground 30 Ground 31 Ground 32 Ground 33 24V 34 24V LCD DATA J2 1 LDO 5V LCD Signal 2 LD1 5V LCD Signal 3 LD2 5V LCD Signal 4 LD3 5V LCD Signal 5 LCD_ONOFF_5V LCD Signal 6 LFLM_5V LCD Signal 7 NC 8 LLP 5V LCD Signal 9 LCLK_5V LCD Signal 10 5V 6 18 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin a a a E Co N Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Ground 25V LCD Bias Voltage Ground KEYBOARD J3 mo N C wo A CO N Keypad Row 1 Input Keypad Row 2 Input Keypad Row 3 Input Keypad Row 4 Input Keypad Col 1 Select Keypad Col 2 Se
50. O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Voltages I O Board Temperatures The Temperatures screen read only displays the detector oven temperature filter temperature column oven temperature flame temperature and internal temperature The internal temperature is the air temperature measured by a sensor located on the measurement interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Temperatures Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 55 Operation Diagnostics Menu o PIRDBS2 UHPSPO Pressure The Pressure screen read only displays the carrier pressure fuel pressure and air pressure readings The readings will show LOW if the measured value falls below the range of the pressure controller If this happens check the appropriate supply plumbing e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Pressure o PILROPUHPMPO FID Status The FID Status screen displays information about the current state of the detector and allows the user to initiate ignition STATUS specifies the current FID status Possible messages are ERROR FLAME OUT PRESSURE WAIT IGNITING CHECKING OR LIT COUNTS specifies the current unadjusted detector signal in Hertz and can range from 0 to 500 000 FLAME specifies the current flame temperature A flame temperature higher than the FID base temperature indicates that the flame is currently l
51. The instrument will pause for 20 seconds plus the sampling time to flush the sample line and then inject a sample of span gas onto the analytical column Following injection the instrument will run a complete analysis of the span gas and record the detector response for the methane and non methane components Calibration factors relating detector response to the sample concentrations will be determined and stored in memory If Auto Verification is set to ON the instrument will check the repeatability of the calibration If the verification test shows that the methane and NMHC readings were stable to within 296 the calibration solenoid will close and the new calibration will be complete Thermo Fisher Scientific Zero Chromatogram Performing a Zero Chromatogram Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Zero Chromatogram If the verification indicates instability of greater than 296 the amount of drift expressed as a percent of the span concentration will be displayed and another sample of span gas will be injected The instrument will repeat the calibration up to five times or until the verification test is passed Once the calibration cycle is complete the new calibration factors are compared to calibration factors stored to memory If the factors fall within the expected or acceptable range the calibration is considered valid and the new calibration factors will go into affect If the calibration factors fall outside the expected ra
52. Values sse B 18 Table B 5 Record Output Formats B 25 Table B 6 Stream Time Values B 28 Table B 7 Fuel and Status Values B 36 T hle B 8 Contrast Levels s eret ede B 37 Table B 9 Reply Termination Formats sssssssssse B 44 Table B 10 Allow Mode Command Values ssssssss B 46 Table B 11 Power up Mode Values ssssssssssssee B 47 Table B 12 Layout Ack Values ssssssssssssssssse B 47 Table B 13 Analog Current Output Range Values B 48 Table B 14 Analog Voltage Output Range Values B 49 Table B 15 Default Analog Output Channel Assignments B 51 Table 1 Read Coils for BBE ict tire itte tetin ten i etit tutup C 8 Table C 2 Read Registers for 55i see C 10 Table C 3 Write Coils for 55i ssssssssssssssseetes C 11 Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 55i D 7 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 55i sssssssssssss D 7 Tabla E 1 Command DIS reo hber Der e De ne iouis E 3 Table E 2 Measurement Values sse E 4 Table E 3 Temperature Values sse E 5 Table E 4 Alarm Status Descriptions sssssssssssee E 6 Table E 5 Measurement Values sss E 6 Table E 6 Rance Vales c oso ii he et eie eb ete tto beds E 6 Table E 7 Range Values
53. Voltage Channels All Current Channels Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 DH DENM USE CIL Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 43 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Select Range The Select Range screen is used to select the hardware range for the selected analog output channel Possible ranges for the voltage outputs are 0 100 mV 0 1 0 5 and 0 10 V Possible ranges for the current outputs are 0 20 mA and 4 20 mA e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config select Channel Select Range O pH sud Piet PILLE Set Minimum and The Set Minimum and Maximum Value screens are used to edit the zero Maximum Value 0 and full scale 100 values respectively in percentages for the selected analog output channel See Table 3 4 for a list of choices The minimum and maximum output value screens function the same way The following example shows the set minimum value screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt IO Configuration gt Analog Output Config select Channel Set Minimum or Maximum Value DH Dh Pii ERE i EO Miket 3 44 Model 55 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 3 4 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Output CH4 NMHC Zero 0 Value Zero 0 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Full Scale 100 Value Range Setting
54. With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press 9 The Analog Output Cal line displays Zero Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 19 Servicing Analog Input Calibration 7 20 Analog Input Calibration Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts Model 55i Instruction Manual Note When calibrating the analog output always calibrate zero first and then calibrate full scale A 5 Use Junii the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line 0 0 V or 0 0 or 4 0 mA then press to save the value 6 Press a to return to the previous screen 7 Press J to select Calibrate Full Scale 8 Use t until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line then press to save the value Use the following procedures to calibrate the analog inputs after replacing the optional I O expansion board These procedures include selecting analog input channels calibrating them to zero volts and then calibrating them to full scale using a known voltage source Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to zero volts 1 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal The Analog Input Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 At the Analog Input Cal screen press amp to scroll to a channel and press 3 With the cursor at C
55. a small coil of wire that produces a red hot ignition source when electric current flows through it Over time the ignitor can fail due to normal wear or due to exposure to corrosive atmospheres A second ignitor is included in the detector assembly as a backup If the first ignitor fails the second ignitor may be used by disconnecting the bad ignitor and connecting the cable to the insulated STA KON connector on the ignitor cable assembly Equipment Required Replacement ignitor assembly Multimeter Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Testing and Replacing the Ignitor Philips screwdriver Wrench 5 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Use the following procedure to test the ignitor 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Unplug connector 27 labeled IGN BIAS from the measurement interface board 3 Measure the resistance between instrument ground and pin 1 first tan wire An ignitor that is functioning properly should have a resistance of about 2 to 10 ohms Note The ignitor should be replaced if the resistance is outside this window A Use the following procedure to replace the ignitor Figure 7 14 4 Remove the oven cover to access the detector and locate the ignitor screwed into the si
56. addition the cl window start time can not be greater than the cl window end time 0 1 seconds and the nm window start time must be between the backflush time 0 5 seconds and the nm window end time The following example sets the non methane window start time delay to 20 0 seconds Send set nm window start 20 Receive set nm window start 20 ok cl window end nm window end These commands report the delay time from injection to closing of the methane and non methane window The following example reports that the non methane window end time delay is 60 seconds Send nm window end Receive nm window end 60 set cl window end value set nm window end value These commands set the delay time from injection to closing of the methane and non methane window to value where value is a floating point number representing 0 999 in seconds In addition the cl window end time must be between the cl window start time 0 1 seconds and the Model 55i Instruction Manual B 33 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration B 34 Model 55i Instruction Manual backflush time and the nm window end time must be greater than the nm window start time 0 1 seconds The following example sets the methane window end time delay to 45 0 seconds Send set c1 window end 45 Receive set c1 window end 45 ok cl range nm range These commands report the current methane and non methane measurement range The following example reports that the measureme
57. appendix Send lrec layout Receive lrec layout s s 41x f SF f f f EDLE EF flags CH4 NMHC Det Temp Col Temp Flame lrec mem size srec mem size These commands report the number of lrecs and srecs that can be stored with the current settings and the number of blocks reserved for lrecs and srecs The following example shows that 1075 blocks were reserved for lrecs and the maximum number of lrecs that can be stored in memory is 241979 Memory allocation can be changed using the malloc command Send lrec mem size Receive lrec mem size 241979 recs 1075 blocks no of lrec no of srec These commands report the number of lrecs and srecs stored memory The following example shows that 50 lrecs have been stored in the memory Send no of lrec Receive no of lrec 50 recs malloc Irec malloc srec These commands report the currently set memory allocation for lrecs and srecs in percent of total memory Model 55i Instruction Manual B 25 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 26 Model 55i Instruction Manual Send malloc lrec Receive malloc lrec 10 set malloc lrec value set malloc srec value value 0 to 100 These commands set the percent of memory space allocated for lrecs and srecs to value where value is a floating point number representing percent The following example sets the memory allocation for lrecs to 10 Note Issuing these commands will clear all the logged data in memory All the existing
58. be accessed over Ethernet using TCP port 9880 Streaming data is sent out the serial port or the Ethernet port on a user defined periodic basis Streaming data over Ethernet is only generated when a connection is made on TCP port 9881 Up to three simultaneous connections per protocol may be made over Ethernet For details see the following topics e Instrument Identification Number on page B 2 e Commands on page B 2 e Measurements on page B 10 e Instrument Control on page B 12 e Alarms on page B 13 e Diagnostics on page B 18 e Datalogging on page B 22 e Calibration on page B 28 e Keys Display on page B 31 e Measurement Configuration on page B 32 e Hardware Configuration on page B 35 e Communications Configuration on page B 40 e I O Configuration on page B 48 e Record Layout Definition on page B 53 Model 55i Instruction Manual B 1 C Link Protocol Commands Instrument Identification Number Instrument Identification Number Commands B 2 Model 55i Instruction Manual Each command sent to the analyzer over the serial port must begin with the American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII symbol or byte value equivalent to the instrument s identification number plus 128 For example if the instrument ID is set to 55 then each command must begin with the ACSII character code 183 decimal The analyzer ignores any command that does not begin with its inst
59. beide qan dedere tque etet s 3 55 Temperatutes CI 3 55 PRESSE totus E E o ci tata ta doni eaten dees dese 3 56 PSS caso crest UIN rea Rs Paleo HIST ENSE CREAN DE ERE 3 56 Flame Out Power Up Information eere 3 57 Calibration History ora stt torn Od ea Eth tadetePten ian eis 3 57 R n HIStory d 3 58 Anal g Input Readingssu is ase temet ra de tet e 3 59 Pi aloe Input Voltages eienenn ee de e iei 3 59 Digital Diputs as cupio onto sitet a a bin terae lopen a A 3 60 IDCM m 3 60 Test Analog Otitputs t isisisi esii earita A dread 3 60 Set Analog OWUtputs d tie accendit tne radio ubt eine mar tests 3 61 Instrument Configuration eoi bfc doch dei ae sepes 3 61 Contact Information garantie Sancta dai desea t E tese ati 3 62 Alarms Ment seo arti eletti Hee fs ud isa usto fitu eats 3 62 Internal Temperature iioi iiec ro c eS 3 63 Min and Max Internal Temperature Limits s 3 63 Detector L empetat te 4 nsi buses derent ea peek deiude 3 64 Min and Max Detector Temperature Limits s 3 64 Filter Temperature aeo ec uhi qui iude edades 3 64 Min and Max Filter Temperature Limits es 3 65 Column Wein pre rater tess s isnt aed oot ted eint 3 65 Min and Max Column Temperature Limits s 3 66 Carrier Bressured auta date tese e da ete cected ed oatiavevedhevetss 3 66 Min and Max Carrier Pressure Limits
60. carefully selected to provide the cleanest possible support gases to the instrument Use of inappropriate gas supplies or hardware will have an adverse affect on performance and can contaminate the instrument with oils or other organic compounds Appropriate hardware and gases can be obtained from chromatography suppliers and from specialty gas vendors The most important consideration in selecting support gases and hardware is the purity of the carrier gas Low quality carrier gas produces an erratic baseline can elevate non methane readings and contaminate the chromatographic column Fuel or air contaminated with hydrocarbons can also affect performance by increasing the FID background signal which can interfere with detection of low level hydrocarbons Model 55i Instruction Manual 2 3 Installation Selecting Hardware and Support Gases Gas Pressure All gas cylinders should be fit with high quality one or two stage regulators Regulators with stainless steel diaphragms These regulators are available from scientific and specialty gas suppliers and are usually sold as high purity regulators Carrier gas fuel combustion air and actuator air must be delivered to the Model 55 at controlled pressures which range between 40 and 80 psi as stated below e Combustion Air 40 80 psi e Fuel e hydrogen 40 60 psi e hydrogen helium 70 80 psi e Carrier 40 60 psi e Actuator Air 40 45 psi Note Do not use general purpose indus
61. choose Diagnostics Program Versions Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 53 Operation Diagnostics Menu o PIRQSPUHPMP O Manual Operation The Manual Operation screen allows the user to manually view and change the valve position to either inject or backflush e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Manual Operation DH HOM ot E SO a EA Voltages The Voltages menu displays the current diagnostic voltage readings These screens enable the power supply to be quickly read for low or fluctuating voltages without having to use a voltage meter The I O board item is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages TRETT Propre p piiopi Liimi Li ib i Motherboard Voltages The Motherboard Voltages screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the motherboard e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Motherboard 3 54 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Interface Board Voltages The Interface Board Voltages screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the measurement interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Voltages Interface Board 1 0 Board Voltages The I O Board Voltages screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the I O expansion board This menu is only displayed if the I
62. command below The command structure for a data query command is as follows lt STX gt DA lt address gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt If the lt address gt is left out then no space is allowed in the query string A command with no address is also a valid command The following are the different acceptable formats of the DA command with Instrument Address 5 lt STX gt DA lt CR gt lt STX gt DA055 lt CR gt lt STX gt DA lt SP gt 55 lt ETX gt lt BCC gt lt STX gt DA lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The data query string is valid and will be answered with data transmission only if the command starts with lt STX gt which is followed by the characters DA and the lt address gt if present matches the Instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands Address and the command is terminated with either CR with no checksum or lt ETXs followed by the correct checksum lt BCC gt Sample Data Reply String in response to Data Query Command DA In response to a valid data query command the instrument responds in the following format lt STX gt MD02 lt SP gt lt address gt lt SP gt lt measured valuel gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt SP gt lt ad
63. from e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State Cop mete Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 39 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 3 40 Alarms Non Alarm Model 55i Instruction Manual The Alarms screen allows the user to select an alarm status for the selected relay output The currently selected item is shown by lt after it The I O board status alarm is only present if the I O expansion board is installed See the Alarms Menu section later in this chapter for more information on alarm items e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State gt Alarms The Non Alarm screen allows the user to select a non alarm status for the selected relay output The currently selected item is shown by lt after it The zero span and sample modes are only present if the zero span valve option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State gt Non Alarm Thermo Fisher Scientific Digital Input Settings Thermo Fisher Scientific Logic State Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Digital Input Settings menu displays a list of the 16 digital inputs available and allows the user to select the logic
64. functional keys that use part of the display to identify their function The function of the soft keys is to provide a shortcut to the most often used menus and screens They are located directly underneath the display and user defined labels in the lower part of the display indicate the function of each key at that time To change a soft key place the menu cursor gt on the item of the selected menu or screen you wish to set Press gt followed by the desired soft key within 1 second of pressing the right arrow key The edit soft key prompt will be displayed for configuration of the new label Note Not all menu items may be assigned to soft keys Ifa particular menu or screen item cannot be assigned the key assignment screen will not come up upon entering right arrow soft key combinations All items under the Service menu including the menu itself cannot be assigned soft keys A Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 3 Operation Firmware Overview Alphanumeric Entry Screen Entry Line Keyboard Firmware Overview 3 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual DH guid Piet The alphanumeric entry screen is used to enter strings consisting of letters numbers and other characters The cursor may be positioned within the entry line using the Jand gt keys If a character is entered over an existing character that character will be overwritten Use the Jand keys to switch between the ent
65. gas and sampling systems are shown in Chapter 2 Installation These figures illustrate two important factors which must be considered when presenting span gas to the Model 557 e lfusing the internal pump calibration gases must not be forced into the instrument at elevated pressure e When using a direct connection to a span cylinder there must be an excess flow so that the span gas will not be diluted by ambient air or sample The instrument s Main Menu contains two sub menus that are directly related to calibration These are the Calibration Parameters menu and the Calibration screen The first step in setting up the software is to specify a calibration method by entering the correct values for items listed under the Calibration Parameters menu Once the calibration method has been established the actual calibration procedure can be triggered automatically or manually using the commands listed under the Calibration screen The Calibration Parameters menu includes several items that control the calibration routine This list includes entries that specify the span gas concentrations enable or disable automatic calibration features and Thermo Fisher Scientific Gas Concentrations Auto Calibration Setup Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Menus control whether calibrations should be based on one or more analysis cycles An explanation of each calibration parameter includes This entry is used to edit t
66. in FLASH memory It is important that each time instrument parameters are changed that this command be sent If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure The following example saves the parameters to FLASH memory Send set save params Receive set save params ok time This command reports the current time 24 hour format hh mm ss The following example reports that the internal time is 2 15 30 pm Send time Receive time 14 15 30 set time hh mm ss hh hours mm minutes ss seconds This command sets the internal clock 24 hour format The following example sets the internal time to 2 15 pm Note If seconds are omitted the seconds default to 00 A Send set time 14 15 Receive set time 14 15 ok addr dns This command reports the TCP IP address for the domain name server Send addr dns Receive addr dns 192 168 1 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration set addr dns address This command sets the domain name server address where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr dns 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr dns 192 168 1 1 ok addr gw This command reports the default TCP IP gateway address Send addr gw Receive addr gw 10 209 42 1 set addr gw address This command sets the default gateway address where address consists of
67. is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 A 2 At the Service menu press to scroll down to Condition Column then press 3 Press gt to begin column conditioning The instrument will now raise the oven temperatures and start a timer After eight hours the instrument will return to normal operating temperatures Following installation and burn in it is advisable to obtain a series of test chromatograms to ensure that the instrument is operating correctly In order to obtain chromatograms it is necessary to connect a chart recorder or data acquisition system the BNC connector on the rear panel of the instrument FID signal For initial tests the chart recorder s input range should be set to about half of the instrument s output range That is if the Model 55 outputs are set to the default range of 0 10 volts the chart recorder should be set for a fullscale deflection at 5 volts The chart speed should be high enough so that the shape of each chromatographic peak is clearly defined In most Model 55i Instruction Manual 2 19 Installation Running Test Chromatograms 2 20 Blank Zero Air Model 55i Instruction Manual cases a speed of 5 to 10 inches per minute will provide good results If a computer based data acquisition system will be used rather than a chart recorder the sampling rate should be set to at least 10 Hz Test chromatograms should include a blank a zero a
68. is shown in Table B 1 The following example sends the incorrect command set unit ppm instead of the correct command set gas unit ppm Thermo Fisher Scientific Send set Receive set C Link Protocol Commands unit ppm unit ppm bad cmd Table B 1 Error Response Messages Command Response bad cmd Description Command is not recognized Commands too high too low Supplied value is higher than the upper limit Supplied value is lower than the lower limit invalid string Supplied string invalid typically because a letter was detected when the value should be numeric data not valid Supplied value is not acceptable for entered command can t wrong settings Command not allowed for current measurement mode can t mode is service Command not allowed while instrument is in service mode feature not enabled 1 0 expansion board is not detected The save and set save params commands duplicated for backward compatibility store parameters in FLASH memory It is important that this command be sent each time instrument parameters are changed If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure Commands List Table B lists the 55i C Link protocol commands The interface will respond to the command strings outlined below Table B 2 C Link Protocol Commands Command Description Page 1 Stimulates pressing soft key
69. is used to create the output command Mode 6 12 13x local remote service service 0 1 Tset mode s n This is a line which has a title of Mode and value taken from the sixth field of the data response There is a bitfield extraction of bits 12 through 13 from the source the value type is not important here because the value is being translated to an output string Once the bits have been extracted they are shifted down to the bit zero position Thus the possible values of this example will be 0 through 3 The translation list shows the words which correspond to each input value the zero index value appearing first 0 gt local 1 gt remote etc The selection list shows that only the first two values in this case are to be shown to the user when the button is Model 55i Instruction Manual B 57 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition B 58 Model 55i Instruction Manual pressed The T button indicates full translation input code to string and user selection number to output string xC This is a line that starts a new column the XC or L Comp 6 11x off on Tset temp comp s n This shows that the bitfield end the second part of a bitfield specification is optional The bitfield will be one bit long starting in this case at the eleventh bit Background 7f 8Bd ddd set o3 bkg s n This shows the use of indirect precision specifiers for floating point displays The background value is taken from
70. measurement interface board 4 Remove the flow meter from the FID exhaust port 5 Proceed to the following section Optimizing the Gas Flows Once all input pressures are at their respective set points use the following procedure to optimize the gas flows Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Adjusting Critical Gas Flows From the Main Menu choose Diagnostics FID Status Press gt to initiate the ignition sequence The ignition sequence will make many attempts to light the FID before displaying FLAME OUT If at any time during the ignition sequence the display status bar reads FLAME LIT the ignition was successful go to step 2 If ignition fails verify that all gas flows are still at the levels set in the previous steps If so refer to Chapter 6 Troublshooting Once the instrument has been successfully lit and the detector has thermally stabilized introduce a known concentration of span gas into the sample port at atmospheric pressure A suggested concentration would be 100 ppm methane in air From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Gas Pressures gt and the appropriate Hz or MIXED Fuel Run At the Set Pressure screen increase the pressure by 1 0 psi increments beginning from the initial stored value Observe the THC concentration reading at the top of the front panel display Notice an increase in the reported concentration level which directly corresponds to an increase in s
71. pressing t The Main Menu contains a list of submenus Each submenu contains related Thermo Fisher Scientific in Operation Firmware Overview This chapter describes each submenu and screen detail Refer to the appropriate sections for more information instrument settings jueuinajsu 4oojuf p4O0MSSed 9AO0UlOH piomssed Huey 1ueuingjsu 4907 PJOMssed 19S piomssed sjnejag Jasp e101soH 1s91 Joxid ejdsiq Je2 1ndu Goyeuy 1e9 1no Bojeuy 1s91 4297 Je2 dwa 2 p1eog 1nduj MO 4 pue eJnssaJg 19S sBuimes JLN Dui MopulM 18S uwnjog uonipuo auljeseg 1e 4 asp eDueu2 ebuey olny Jena 129JeS 9poIN 9IpI uonoejeq eure 4 ssed g ssed g ane JonJ uel Sduie uaAQ 19S snyeys dxa O I snjejg eoepelu sniels aN suue y jeu1491X3 QUOD eueuie uoN 2uo2 eueuieiw I4 162 INN Wed 12D tHO Ayues MopulMm 392eu2 ueds OHINN 399u2 ueds rH2 399u2 10 U Ie 10sueg dw e4 49780 abeyo seig AyaGajuy ezea 6ues42AC 2HIAN eDueleAO PHO eunssaJd Aly aunssaid jan4 ensseJq 191482 NC eure 4 duie uuinjo3 duie 40414 dwiay 10 99 9q due jeusayuy pa ajeq suuelv eos suue v 0ju j2e u02 6yuog jueunasu sindino Bojeuy iso Sojels Aejoy syndy jeu6iq sebeyoA 1nduj bojeuy s6ulpeay 1nduj 6ojeuy ojsiH uny 10 S1H 12D oju dnsamod 1no ewe snyeis did eunssaJd sduie SsoDeyoA uonejedo uen SUOISJ9A Uie1bo4d euozeuil eui eieg SPO 291419S ySe1 U0D U9319S 6yuo9 O I
72. records should be retrieved using appropriate commands if required A Send set malloc lrec 10 Receive set malloc lrec 10 ok set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec set copy sp to stream These commands copy the current selections in scratch pad sp into the lrec srec or streaming data list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list For more information on how to edit the scratch pad see the sp field command The following example copies the current list in scratch pad into the lrecs list Send set copy sp to lrec Receive set copy sp to lrec ok set copy lrec to sp set copy srec to sp set copy stream to sp These commands copy the current contents of the lrec srec or streaming data list into the scratch pad sp These commands are useful in easy modification of current lrec srec or streaming data lists The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list For more information on how to edit the scratch pad see the sp field command Thermo Fisher Scientific
73. run Command K initiates a span chromatogram run Command M initiates a sample chromatogram run Command C initiates a span check chromatogram run Command T puts rotary valve in inject position Command B puts rotary valve in backflush position Command X cancels any run in progress The following are the different acceptable formats of the ST command STX 5S T address control command ETX BCC OR Model 55i Instruction Manual D 3 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands Data Sampling Data Query Command D 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual DA STXS ST address control command CR OR STXSST address SP control command CR OR STXS ST address SP control command ETX BCC The address is optional which means it can be left out completely The address if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt If the received command does not satisfy the above formats or if the address does not match the Instrument Address the command is ignored This is a sample command to switch the instrument to initiate a zero chromatogram run instrument address 55 STX STO55 SP N CR This command initiates a data transfer from the instrument The instrument responds with measurement data which depends on the range mode and is listed in Measurements reported in response to DA
74. saved on power cycle it is always reverted to ON on power up A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Detector Oven Enable DuuRHZEL crear ATCT pp amd PLEI DILIG ili bed PERRO Pike fiini i The Pump Settings screen is used to change the operating state of the pump Settings include Always On Always Off and Off Until Warm where the pump remains off until the oven reaches the set temperature Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 21 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Datalogging Settings 3 22 Model 55i Instruction Manual Note The pump setting should usually be Off Until Warm This prevents condensation from occurring in the pump head at start up A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Pump Settings E sh irit iii The Series instruments include a built in datalogging capability as a standard feature The operator is allowed to create two different types of records which for historical reasons are named lrecs and srecs Each record can contain up to 32 different fields or data items and records can be created at user defined intervals ranging from 1 to 60 minutes Record generation is tied to the instrument s real time clock For example if the logging period for srecs is set to 30 minutes a new srec will be generated on every hour and every half hour 10 00 10 30 11 00 Lrecs and srecs function independent of each other So for example an s
75. screen choose H2 Fuel Ignite Set the pressure to create a fuel flow of 46 ml min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Record the stored pressure value Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Carrier Run Set the pressure to create a sample air flow of 55 ml min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Carrier Ignite Set the pressure to create a sample air flow of 55 ml min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Record the stored pressure value Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Air Run Set the pressure to create an air flow of 315 ml min and save Repeat this Thermo Fisher Scientific Adjusting For Mixed Fuel H2 He Set the Fuel Pressure Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Adjusting Critical Gas Flows adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Air Ignite Set the pressure to create an air flow of 225 ml min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter atta
76. selected analog input Connect the selected analog input channel to ground to calibrate the input to zero e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal gt select Channel Calibrate Zero 3 92 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Analog Input Calibrate The Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate Full Scale the full scale state of the selected analog input Connect the selected analog input channel to a 10 Volt voltage source e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Analog Input Cal select Channel Calibrate Full Scale Display Pixel Test The Display Pixel Test screen is used to test the LCD display by toggling between all pixels on and all pixels off to ensure that they are functioning properly e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Display Pixel Test USE CIL Restore User Defaults The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and configuration values to factory defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Restore User Defaults Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 93 Operation Password Menu Password Menu Set Password 3 94 Model 55i Instruction Manual The Password menu allows the user to configure password protection If the instrument is locked none of the settings may be changed via the front panel user interface but they can still b
77. sp field command for information on how to edit the scratch pad The following example shows the list for streaming data output Send list stream Receive list stream field index variable X x time 1 1 CH4 2 2 NMHC 3 4 Det_Temp 4 6 Col Temp 5 9 Air PSI 6 10 Carrier PSI 7 11 Fuel PSI Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging erec erxy x 0 1 Reply termination format see set format format command y 0 1 2 Output format see set erec format format command These commands return a snapshot of the main operating conditions measurements and status at the time the command is issued The following example shows a typical response The format is defined within the command in the case of erxy or by the current settings of the format and erec format commands in the case of erec For details on erec formatting see the Record Layout Definition section at the end of this appendix For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see the flags command Send erec Receive erec 10 56 11 27 07 flags 08100040 CH4 CONC 1 972 NMHC_CONC 0 000 THC CONC 1 972 CH4 RANGE 20 000 1 NMHC RANGE 20 000 1 CH4_ ALARM 2000 000 NMHC ALARM 2000 000 CH4 SPAN GAS 89 800 NMHC SPAN GAS 30 200 SAMPLE TIME 15 OP MODE 1 FLAME STATUS 1 AIR PRESS 16 889 FUEL PRESS 0 000 CARRIER PRESS 29 702 DET OVEN SET 175 COL OVEN SET 75 DET BASE TEMP 174 713 FILTER B
78. status on history run This command reports the run history records in an ASCII table form Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics Note Fach row has five values which are associated with the record timestamp in the top time row The columns may not line up as evident in the following example A Send history run Receive history run time 19Feb08 10 26 14Feb08 10 56 14Feb08 10 49 14Feb08 09 15 12Feb08 10 06 ch4 pk ht 382 16 196 262 79 ch4 rt 14 4 14 4 14 4 14 4 14 4 ch4 base 1735 1673 1663 1713 1639 ch4 lod 23 11 9 10 14 ch4 sd 7 3 3 3 4 ch4 conc 0 19 0 01 0 1 0 13 0 04 nm ht 188 144 222 200 186 nm area 00000 nm conc 00000 nm base st 2888 2729 2726 2798 2724 nm base end 2821 2652 2656 2833 2849 nm lod 2176 2070 2081 1170 759 nm st idx 22222 nm end idx 101 90 106 108 105 nm max slp 10 10 12 10 10 nm min slp 5 2147483648 7 4 3 nm pt cnt 00000 history cal This command reports the calibration history records in and ASCII table form Note Each row has five values which are associated with the record timestamp in the top time row The columns may not line up as evident in the following example A Note If less than five calibrations have been performed the type and status will be reported as ERROR for the columns in which a calibration has not been performed A Send history cal Receive history cal time 18Jan08 15 52 18Jan0
79. stops the current measurement cycle This command will not be processed if service mode is active Send stop Receive stop ok cl alarm status onoff nm alarm status onoff on above setpoint off below setpoint These commands report the alarm status for methane and non methane to either on above setpoint or off below setpoint The following example reports that the methane alarm status is on above setpoint Send c1 alarm status Receive c1 alarm status on alarm bias voltage min alarm bias voltage max These commands report the current bias voltage alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the bias voltage alarm minimum value is 310 Send alarm bias voltage min Receive alarm bias voltage min 310 0 V set alarm bias voltage min value set alarm bias voltage max value These commands set the bias voltage alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the bias voltage alarm limits The following example sets the bias voltage alarm maximum value to 290 Send set alarm bias voltage max 290 Receive set alarm bias voltage max 290 ok alarm ch4 chk min alarm ch4 chk max These commands report the current methane calibration check alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the methane calibration check alarm minimum value is 97 Send alarm ch4 chk min Receive alarm ch4 chk min 97 0 M
80. swab with a solvent that is compatible with the chromatographic system isopropyl alcohol is recommended 2 Gently swab the polished interior of the valve to remove any loose residue 3 Blow with clean compressed gas to remove any lint left by the swab 4 Visually inspect the interior of the valve body The conical surface should appear highly polished If any scratches are visible between the ports or anywhere that might suggest a potential leakage path or wear source the valve should be returned to the factory 7 26 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing 8 Port Valve Rotor Replacement Cleaning the Rotor Use the following procedure to clean the rotor 1 Carefully grasp the rotor on either end and briefly immerse it in solvent If it is difficult to grip the rotor securely hemostats or needlenose pliers may be helpful see Figure 7 12 Grip the tab end being careful not to mar the metal or touch the polymer 2 Gently wipe the polymer with a clean tissue 3 Blow with clean compressed gas to remove any lint left by the tissue 4 Visually inspect the rotor If it shows any scratches and or narrowing of the flow passages replacement is necessary Figure 7 12 Holding the Rotor Viewed from Pre Load End Assembly Use the following procedure to assemble the valve rotor new or used rotor 1 Place the clean rotor on the pencil magnet and orient it so that the tab will properly engage the slot
81. the instrument reports being in Local mode the front panel interface is unlocked and settings can be changed from the front panel Refer to C Link Protocol Commands appendix for detailed information about mode allow mode and power up mode commands Change Password The Change Password screen is used to change the password used to unlock the instrument s front panel The change password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Change Password RERISE ME I B i iue i i E mpini Prid ri Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 95 Operation Password Menu Remove Password The Remove Password screen is used to erase the current password and disable password protection The remove password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password Remove Password Unlock Instrument The Unlock Instrument screen is used to enter the password to unlock the front panel The unlock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is locked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password Unlock Instrument 3 96 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 4 Calibration The Model 55 is a quantitative instrument that can make accurate measurements of methane and other organic gases and vapors at concentrations up to 5000 ppm However as with all electron
82. the upper detector plate to the bottom of the detector Carefully remove the internal parts of the detector and place them on the clean towels The upper detector insulator and O ring see diagram might be lightly adhered into the top of the detector use the pick or screwdriver to gently dislodge and remove them Remove the two screws holding the thermocouple retainer to the detector cover and place the retainer and screws aside The thermocouple O ring might also be adhered to the retainer so again use the pick or screwdriver to remove it Using the pick carefully remove the two O rings from the lower detector base mounted to the oven heater plate Note Be careful not to get any rubber crumbs caught in the two small holes in the base one is in the center of the central depression one is on the concentric ring If rubber crumbs do get into these holes gas flows to the FID will be blocked A 6 If necessary blow clean compressed air through each of the two gas feed lines to remove O ring debris from the base plate holes Once the O rings have been removed the parts should be cleaned before reassembly Use these steps to clean the parts a First deposits on the tip of the jet plate and inner bore of the collector can be removed with a fine emery cloth b Place the detector cover upper detector base all three Teflon pieces the flat and wavy washers the collector assembly and the jet plate into the beaker and immer
83. the value field B 56 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Examples C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Some examples n is the C syntax for an end of line character Concentrations n This is a single text only line An This is a single blank line NO 3s n This is a line which appears slightly indented The text field is NO the value is taken from the third element of the data response and interpreted as a string NO 18sBd ddd set no coef s n This is a line which also appears slightly indented The next field is also NO but the value is taken from the eighteenth element of the data response again interpreted as a string A button appears on this line which when pressed pops up an input dialog which will state Please enter a new value for NO using a d ddd format The string entered by the user is used to construct the output command If the user enters for example 1 234 the constructed command will be set no coef 1 234 NO 21f Code 0 Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8 Code 9 Code 10 Code 11 Lset range no d n This is a line which appears slightly indented the title is again NO and the value is the twenty first element of the data response interpreted as a floating point number There is a no translation button which creates a selection list of twelve Code nn options The number of the user selection
84. to localize fault Check voltage diagnostic screen and test point on measurement interface board Check flow and pressure readings on the diagnostics screens Check the source pressure Check zero span solenoids or other hardware to be sure that span gas is being delivered correctly Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Ruptured pump diaphragm Faulty FID or input board Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Check flow rate at the sample bulkhead If low flow rebuild pump head Use input board test mode and verify signal on each range to isolate fault to either FID or input board Replace faulty component If problem still exists check signal cables and replace measurement interface board Incorrect or no response to sample gas Flame not lit Analyzer not calibrated No gas reaching the analyzer Ruptured pump diaphragm Faulty FID or input board Analyzer calibrated improperly Check flame out alarm status check fuel Re calibrate Check the response to a known span gas Check flow rate at the sample bulkhead If low flow rebuild pump head Use input board test mode and verify signal on each range to isolate fault to either FID or input board Replace faulty component If problem still exists check signal cables and replace measurement interface board Check that the calibration factors are within their proper limits Zero or Span will not How rate of t
85. to rest against the stop If it does not repeat the procedure If after several attempts the pin still does not contact the stop in both positions the actuator does not stroke properly and must be serviced Contact the service department for further instructions General Electrical This section provides the equipment requirements and instructions for Thermo Fisher Scientific Testin g testing the instrument heating system and temperature sensors Equipment Required Electrical temperature gauge type K thermocouple Multimeter Philips screwdriver Hex wrench set Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Use the following procedure to test the heating system 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect J3 J4 and J5 located on the measurement interface board noting their location in order to facilitate re connection Measure the heater resistance using the multimeter Acceptable resistance readings are listed in the following schedule in Table 7 7 Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 47 Servicing General Electrical Testing 7 48 Model 55i Instruction Manual Table 7 7 Acceptable Heater Resistance Readings Description Resistance Reading Tolerance J3 Column Heater P C 140 ohm 10 ohm J4 Detector Heater DET 140 ohm 10
86. uniform internal representations 32 bit floats or 32 bit integers These values are converted into text for display on the screen using the format specifier for the front panel display Normally the specifier used to parse a particular datum from the input stream will be strongly related to the specifier used to display it such as all of the floating point inputs will be displayed with an f output specifier and all of the integer inputs will be displayed with a d specifier The first line of the layout response is the scanf like parameter list for parsing the fields from an ASCII erec response Parameters are separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n the normal line separator character Valid fields are Model 55i Instruction Manual B 53 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Format Specifier for Binary Responses Format Specifier for Erec Layout B 54 Model 55i Instruction Manual 96s parse a string d parse a decimal number ld parse a long 32 bit decimal number f parse a floating point number x parse a hexadecimal number lx parse a long 32 bit hex number ignore the field Note Signed versus unsigned for the integer values does not matter it is handled automatically A The second line of the layout response is the binary parameter list for parsing the fields from a binary response Parameters MUST be separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n
87. 00533 00 Motherboard 100539 00 Digital Output Board 100542 00 1 0 Expansion Board optional 102340 00 Front Panel Connector Board 102496 00 Front Panel LCD Display 103812 00 Transformer Step Down 220 240 VAC optional 101863 00 Transformer Step Up 100 VAC optional 103002 01 Measurement Interface Board 108099 00 Input Board Assembly 105213 00 Solenoid Valve 3 Way 103762 00 Solenoid Valve 2 Way 104340 00 Pump Assembly 108002 00 Pump Repair Kit new technology pump 8606 Pump Repair Kit 101681 00 Power Supply Assembly 24 VDC with Base Plate and Screws 103803 00 Fan Assembly 24 VDC 4070 Fan Filter 105198 00 Fuse 250 VAC 6 25 Amp SlowBlow for 100 and 110 VAC models 103894 00 Fuse 250 VAC 3 15 Amp SlowBlow for 220 240 VAC models 101688 00 Ambient Temperature Connector with Thermistor 12190 Filter Inlet Element 0 5 micron 12188 Aluminum Gasket 108100 00 Column Assembly 105567 00 Ignitor Cable Assembly 10981 Ignitor without wire and connector attached requires soldering 103581 00 Flame Sensor Thermocouple Assembly 103949 00 Thermocouple Cable Assembly Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 5 Servicing Cable List Cable List 7 6 Model 55i Instruction Manual Part Number Description 105151 00 Detector O ring Kit three each of 14814 14816 11032 16013 qty 6 of 6646 105152 00 Detector Rebuild Kit one each of 104158 00 104155 00 103770 00 14816 16013 14
88. 103954 00 Detector Ignitor BNC Cable Assembly 105209 00 Analog Output BNC Cable Assembly 103682 00 Detector Signal Cable External Device Table 7 3 lists the standard and optional cables and components used for Connection instrument connecting external devices such as PCs and dataloggers to an iSeries Components Table 7 3 External Device Connection Components Part Number 102562 00 Description Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB25 optional 102556 00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB37 optional 102645 00 Cable DB37M to Open End Cable Six Feet optional 102646 00 Cable DB37F to Open End Six Feet optional 102659 00 Cable DB25M to Open End Six Feet optional 6279 Cable RS 232 Six Feet optional 102888 00 102891 00 103084 00 Thermo Fisher Scientific Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37F standard with all instruments Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37M standard with all instruments Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB25M optional Included with optional I O Expansion Board in all instruments Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 7 Servicing External Device Connection Components Column w Heater Post Rotary Valve Sample FID Filter Sample Loop Pump Actuator Electronic Pressure Fuel Controls Air Bulkhead Thermistor Carrier Rotary Valve Actuator 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Front Panel Digital Output Board D 1 H a Fron
89. 16 dump run current dump run previous dump zero data array These commands report the raw chromatogram data for the most recent run the second to last run and the most recent zero chromatogram run The user will get a dump of 1000 values separated by line feeds representing the raw data Each value is the FID reading for the tenth second ten values 1 second of data These values can be imported into a spreadsheet for graphing or calculation The following example reports the raw data for the stored zero chromatogram Send dump zero data array Receive dump zero data array 3623 3595 3580 Model 55i Instruction Manual B 19 C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics B 20 Model 55i Instruction Manual flags This reports 8 hexadecimal digits or flags that represent the status of the service mode password lock idle mode flame fuel type run or ignite and alarms To decode the flags each hexadecimal digit is converted to binary as shown in Figure B 1 It is the binary digits that define the status of each parameter In the following example the instrument is reporting that the service and idle mode are both off fuel type is H2 flame status is lit and the low fuel pressure alarm is activated Send flags Receive flags 04520042 Figure B 1 Flags Field flame status This command reports the status of the FID flame status as on or off The following reports that flame status is on Send flame status Receive flame
90. 42 Model 55i Instruction Manual screws and the O ring plate Some O ring screws use washers instead of O rings and both types of replacement seals are included in the kit The internal end cap O rings are easier to get to if the washers and bearings are removed see Figure 7 20 1 Use a small screwdriver or pick to remove the old O rings being careful not to scratch the metal 2 Usea lint free tissue to clean the O ring grooves as completely as possible 3 As each new O ring is installed coat it with a thin layer of silicone lubricant Dow Corning DC 111 is recommended THIN THICK THICK THIN WASHER WASHER WASHER WASHER S BEARING BEARING Figure 7 20 O Ring Locations Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Reassembly Servicing Valve Actuator Repair Where it is possible to do so apply a slight rotating action to the parts as they go over or through the new O rings to help prevent any nicking or tearing of the new parts 1 While being careful that the subassembly does not come apart gently push the O ring plate onto the drive shaft Make sure that the threaded holes in the plate are facing the subassembly 2 Screw the slotted head screws into the O ring plate and push the drive shaft into the O ring plate as far as it will go see Figure 7 21 Figure 7 21 Subassembly Ready to Go On 3 Place the washers and bearing in the male end cap The thin washer goes in first as in Fi
91. 5V 5 5V 6 Ground 7 Ground 8 Ground 6 12 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin a a a a ol E 99 N Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description NC NC 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24 MONITOR J17 24V Power Monitor Ground FRONT PANEL BD J18 cO a N oon A CO N x ce N N gt N co co N Oo on m 99 N BRO M MB NN MN M oao A Wo N gt OQ Ground Ground LCLK LCD Signal Ground Ground LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal LDO LCD Signal LD5 LCD Signal LD1 LCD Signal LD6 LCD Signal LD2 LCD Signal LD7 LCD Signal LD3 LCD Signal LCD Bias Voltage 5V Ground Ground LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal Keypad Row 2 Input Keypad Row 1 Input Keypad Row 4 Input Keypad Row 3 Input Keypad Col 2 Select Model 55i Instruction Manual 6 13 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Designator Pin CO CO CO CO CO N N N N FP C0 N cC cO CO N OD Signal Description Keypad Col 1 Select Keypad Col 4 Select Keypad Col 3 Select Ground Ground Ground Ground 24V 24V RS232 RS485 A PT A cO OO N O Cl A CO N NC Serial Port 1 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 1 TX RS485 OUT NC Ground NC Serial Port 1 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 1 CTS RS485 IN N
92. 6 23 Ground 12 Isolated ground 24 Ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 2 17 Installation Startup Startup 2 18 Model 55i Instruction Manual A Instrument start up should be performed in the order specified below It is especially important not to turn on the power and heat the ovens until after the carrier gas has been connected and turned on Equipment Damage Heating the column oven while the carrier gas is not flowing may damage the column A 1 Turn on all gas cylinders and adjust cylinder regulators to the following pressures e Fuel e Hydrogen 60 psi e Helium Hydrogen Mix 80 psi e Combustion Air 80 psi e Actuator Air 45 psi e Carrier Gas 60 psi e Span Gas 15 psi 2 Slightly loosen each fitting at the rear of the instrument for about 30 seconds to bleed off air trapped in the lines and scrubbers and then re tighten the fittings 3 Turn on the main power switch and note whether any error messages are reported After a brief diagnostic test the instrument will enter the Warm Up mode The instrument will require about 90 minutes to warm up to full operating temperature Note The fuel pressure will read zero during warm up because the fuel solenoid is automatically closed The solenoid may be opened using a screen in the Service menu A 4 When the instrument has stabilized at the correct operating temperature the fuel solenoid will automatically open and the instrument w
93. 7 46 Alienmienti eats ape c teda a tur Medo cui tedio etes edhe 7 47 General Electrical Testing a ete detener tete bea nae 7 47 Adjusting Critical Gas Flows 2a unes Gea fto etos dote 7 49 Preliminary Sete Bo bases atu oM bc and 7 49 Adjusting For Hydrogen Buel caue etenim eiuta 7 49 Adjusting For Mixed Fuel H He iei teet lette 7 51 Optimizing the Gas Plows iiiaie oic ro rt eben tetas 7 52 Fuse Replacement usus dusea neroni easet ainei riie 7 54 I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement 7 54 Digital Output Boatd Replacement o en etna oan 7 56 Motherboard Replacetiefit soda de onere cedro teal 7 56 Measurement Interface Board Replacement sss 7 57 Front Pane Board Replacement de ete 7 59 LCD Module Replacement iiie eir ertlace dtes 7 60 Service LocatIons iseoeeeen see eh nex eb eue e Sexe e ves iei ean 7 61 System Description meme CP 8 1 Hardware M C 8 1 Flame Ionization Detector FID eee 8 3 Sample Bier usc oso dto ead acacia tia ated 8 3 Internal Punib tenes icc d S eai cde ede 8 3 Rotary Valve E 8 3 Electronic Pressure Control ers s uiscera t ette trecietat 8 3 Separation Column itecto tec et Paa ru totas cos Etapas 8 4 Fuel Shutotf So lengld a sae cuore Santa uc Cetus 8 4 CAI PAL IOI Solenold a ohn eters ian bes sisisi aim earn 8 4 Firmware seis deeds ica tub abanico reta ded dp nd io uateeted 8 4 Instrument ControL o io
94. 8 15 48 17Jan08 14 12 17Jan08 10 41 17Jan08 09 50 type SPAN SPAN SPAN SPAN SPAN status GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD chk adj adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust ch4 span 1801 00 1801 00 4 50 4 50 4 50 ch4 ratio 4 897e 04 1 641e 03 4 551e 04 3 881e 06 3 962e 06 Model 55i Instruction Manual B 21 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging Datalogging B 22 Model 55i Instruction Manual ch4 rt 15 0 15 2 15 0 15 0 15 8 ch4 pk idx 35 36 35 35 39 ch4 pk ht 3677455 1097292 9888 9850 6043 nm span 598 00 598 00 1 50 1 50 1 50 nm rat 1 08515e 05 4 33798e 05 4 32913e 06 4 20798e 06 3 881e 06 nm area 55107840 13785232 346490 356466 386498 clr records This command will clear all lrecs and srecs that have been saved Send clr records Receive clr records ok set clr lrecs set clr srecs These commands will clear only the lrecs or only the srecs that have been saved The following example clears srecs Send set clr srecs Receive set clr srecs ok list lrec list srec list stream list sp These commands report the list of current selections for lrec logging data srec logging data streaming data output or the scratch pad sp list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list Refer to the
95. 814 11032 qty 2 of 6646 103936 00 50W Heater Assembly 104168 00 Column Heater Assembly 104350 00 Pressure Controller 50PS 103687 00 Detector Pogo Assembly 104151 00 Exhaust Frit Bulkhead Fitting 14977 Valve Rotor Replacement 14978 Valve Actuator O ring Replacement Kit 11032 O ring FID Flame Sensor 006 red silicone 14695 Column Ferrules Expendable item not covered by warranty Table 7 2 lists the Model 55 cables See the Troubleshooting chapter for associated connection diagrams and board connector pin descriptions Table 7 2 Model 55i Cables Part Number Description 101349 00 AC Power Cable 115 VAC US 8926 AC Power Cable 220 VAC EU 01036 00 DC Power Supply 24 V Output 115 VAC Supply to Measurement Interface Board RS 485 Data AC Power Switch to Motherboard DC Power Supply Status Monitor Motherboard to Front Panel Board s Be seed eh ces lft s e See I s ecCioi o co jio o o o co P um eum mS I Seal oem ce c R 035 00 DC Power Supply AC Input 055 00 Main AC Receptacle Assembly 377 00 AC to Power Switch 104631 00 Signal Ribbon 103905 00 Heater Power 103952 01 Cable Pressure Controller Air 103952 02 Cable Pressure Controller Fuel Thermo Fisher Scientific Part Number Servicing External Device Connection Components Description 103952 03 Cable Pressure Controller Back Pressure
96. AIT IGNITING CHECING or LIT The word SAMPLE on the left of the status bar indicates the analyzer is performing a SAMPLE run Other run types appear in the same area of the display as ZERO or SPAN The status bar also displays the current time 24 hour format the valve position BF or INJ password service and alarm icons Title Bar gt AITO RUB MODE Gas Concentraton Gas Units Messages Status Bar 1 eo amp lt Status Bar Icons Programmable Soft Key Labels Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 7 Operation Range Menu Main Menu The Main Menu contains a number of submenus Instrument parameters and settings can be read and modified within the submenus according to their function The concentration readings appear above the Main Menu and submenus in every screen The Service menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode ec see Service Mode later in this chapter e Use f Jand to move the cursor up and down e Press to make a selection e Press to return to the Main Menu or to return to the Run screen d mimpi Range Menu The Range menu allows the operator to select the gas units and ranges for both methane and non methane Depending on the loop size chosen the instrument has a distinct set of three preset range values available See T
97. ARMEN PC C ANTE HEUE 3 31 Midi rM cede 3 31 RS 232 RS 485 SelectIOInz nei eet Eee ie p eed ciet cs 3 31 Instrument D oni t eve tee eroi tive edet lee e oix as 3 32 Communication Protocol indo neto ERI Cre odis mise 3 32 Streaming Data Gonfienratiofiagessadevesdiregi maar cedyest an desees 3 33 Streaming Data Intetval cuo es nebat nitatis ide 3 33 Choose Stream Data a deu iisiaaiencti teeta sian tae ae 3 33 Concentratlonscc eec uet ERN 3 34 Other Measutements m od bise ett e busta dl bd esq 3 34 Analog In utscqooe ta adeat bebe tees tete ceste 3 35 TCP IP Settings accidere nasi tec nhan Le Fio VO HER rebos 3 35 Use DEIQDBS neces ete teer ed Hes rece ed Ne ete e A esee d 3 36 ID Addtese s c uucteasesiidutireiteli te isot eti bias eot sec ie rodea desc Bede etas 3 36 INetiasie dedi EEEE Madea viai cei e olas CN Nor Nen amas sedate 3 37 Woe Fatale Gateway PETERS 3 37 Host Name oed e etti ti a as e RTT HII aaa 3 37 Network Time Protocol Server cccccsccccsssscssssseesssceessssvesseseeses 3 38 VO Contis tstoti oce e Sh eat aoe at adici 3 38 Output Relay Sete nes isco See tat a Oar 3 38 bogie SEALE 3 39 Instrument S tate 3 nire ee Oe RENE E ENDE ee 3 39 Pal AT INNS A E E E E A uaa Eat N oA AE Dui dc aea 3 40 Nos apices usd advo eM Ud I ep MEM DM 3 40 Digital Input Settings oueudatio s ea uoce cito evecta qu 3 41 TOPICS IMG e echec iru eral tas Aus an ihr ee eset 3 41 Instrument ONCE o Lan Se Ds Oa Tte noeEd er
98. ASE TEMP 174 921 COL BASE TEMP 75 897 INTERNAL TEMP 26 043 FLAME TEMP 161 901 lrec srec lrec rec num srec rec num lexy rec num srxy rec num lrec aa bb oo pp qq yy srec aa bb oo pp qq yy rec The starting record index number 1 most recent num The number of records to return 1 to 10 x 0 1 Reply termination format see set format format command y 0 1 2 Output format see set lrec srec format format command aa hours 01 to 23 bb minutes 01 to 59 oo month 01 to 12 pp day 01 to 31 qq year Model 55i Instruction Manual B 23 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging These commands output lrec or srec logged data The output format is determined by the set lrec format and set srec format commands The logging time is determined by the set lrec per and set srec per commands In the following example assume there are 740 lrecs currently stored in memory When the command lrec 100 5 is sent the instrument counts back 100 records from the last record collected record 740 and then returns 5 records 640 641 642 643 and 644 For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see Figure B 1 Send lrec 100 5 Receive lrec 100 5 14 12 11 15 07 flags 08528225 CH4 0 323 NMHC 0 000 Det Temp 174 774 Col Temp 75 971 Flame 1 000 14 13 11 15 07 flags 08528225 CH4 0 000 NMHC 0 000 Det Temp 175 153 Col Temp 75 861 Flame 1 000 14 15 11 15 07 fl
99. BY TIME which allows the user to specify a time of day when the instrument will start performing automatic calibrations and the time period between these automatic calibrations in hours These options are mutually exclusive that is setting auto calibration by number of runs turns off auto calibration by time The options for Cal Reset are NO which performs only calibration checks at the specified period or YES which updates the calibration parameters to re calibrate the analyzer at the specified period The Auto Calibration Check feature Cal Reset NO is intended to be used under regulations which require frequent span checks or drift tests but which do not allow automatic re calibration When an automatic calibration check is running the calibration solenoid is opened to flood the sample inlet with span gas and a full analysis is performed However the instrument calibration is not adjusted The automatic calibration check option allows the user to Model 55i Instruction Manual 4 5 Calibration Calibration Menus Auto Verification Minimum Verification Cycles Use Zero Chromatogram Reset User Cal Defaults 4 6 Model 55i Instruction Manual determine whether the instrument will perform automatic tests of the current calibration and how they will be scheduled To change the current setting press t Jor J until the desired option appears and then press 9 J For more information on automatic calibration setup se
100. C RS232 RS485 B P1 B cO OO N on A CO N NC Serial Port 2 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 2 TX RS485 OUT NC Ground NC Serial Port 2 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 2 CTS RS485 IN NC AC IN PJ1 w N AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC 24VPWR PJ2 CO M AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC INTF BD PJ3 6 14 Model 55i Instruction Manual AC HOT Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description AC NEUT AC Ground Table 6 5 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator AC IN J1 1 AC HOT 2 AC NEUT 3 AC Ground AC PUMP J2 1 AC HOT AC NEUT Switched 3 AC Ground P C HTR J3 Pump Column Heater AC Control 2 AC HOT DET HTR J4 Detector Heater AC Control 2 AC HOT FLT HTR J5 Filter Heater AC Control 2 AC HOT 24V IN J6 24V 2 Ground DATA J7 Ground 2 RS485 from Motherboard 3 RS485 from Motherboard FAN J8 24V Fused 2 Ground FAN J9 24V Fused 2 Ground Z APMP J10 24V 2 Ground ZAHIR J11 24V 2 Ground FILTER TC J12 Filter TC 2 Filter TC Model 55i Instruction Manual 6 15 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator DET BASE TC J13 Detector Base TC
101. Dite c aT 3 42 Analog Output Configuration Select Channel 3 42 Allow Over Under Range ettet dott tete 3 43 Analog Output Configuration Select Action 3 43 Select ari eases anii oo east fitness Lc Det tian 3 44 Set Minimum and Maximum Value eee 3 44 Choose Signal to Outputs roadster 3 46 Analog Input Configuration etate ideato taca 3 47 Descriptor resis acai wens ads E e tes E A Maa c prediis 3 48 I nr cep POR MC NEED URINE 3 48 Decimal Posse cene attacca quo eS emi e taut cr DUE 3 49 Number of Table Potiis zaiu dtesteacnc eiie dinec ed essen dra tases 3 49 Table Pontem eue ciocaoot tue are RR OPN Core a er 3 50 M COLES A vede itai bua deut so A essa ec asc boss M beo ET AT cua 3 50 JB RNC CT acd 3 50 Screen CCOnttastu ioci eee eme etti eode teret A 3 51 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual ix Contents x Model 55i Instruction Manual Service M OU Gase ad etate ieteblsbeo te Nai s etait ee eden 3 51 Date Limes om etu toda E 3 52 itl ezOfnes deret eee E EE ones tee iere soie EEE 3 52 Diagnostics MD sso iee irati sepe terea Pe uu Dread bckesu o e Ur c ERE 3 53 Program Versi ns sessios ee resiebcor iuditio e tesetobriy eed de 3 53 Manidl erar e echec e ape done be ae oe 3 54 yolcr d DP TCR 3 54 Motherboard Volti98s 2e ote tene e th eee deeds 3 54 Interface Board Voltages i ataca te cette e Res 3 55 I O Board VoltdPes nee ra aree
102. HINGS li E oe BALLS ru ms e COUNTERSUNK 2 a co NEW STYLE o BEARING PLATE 77 eat jn BEARING PLATE SUBASSEMBLY ili l SCREWS New Subassembly Design CYLINDER THICK WASHER BEARING THIN WASHER EXTERNAL O RING FEMALE END CAP INTERNAL O RING FEMALE END CAP FEMALE END CAP O RING SCREWS O RING SCREW i ye O RINGS Figure 7 23 Two Position Actuator Exploded View 6 The two bearing plates are identical except that one of them has three countersunk holes to accept the heads of the assembly screws Locate the one that is not countersunk and line it up on top of the O ring plate In the rare cases where both bearing plates are countersunk they are interchangeable Press down to force the pins through the O rings and bearing plate continuing until the two parts are riding about halfway down the pins Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 45 Servicing Valve Actuator Repair Valve Alignment Visually Checking Alignment 7 46 Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 Slide the three bushings over the pins 8 Install the driveshaft ball assembly with the 1 4 inch hole end down The female race will rest between the bushings 9 Place the remaining bearing plate in position with the countersunk holes up and screw the entire assembly together Tighten the screws in rotation to insure optimum alignment 10 Now pull the subassembly off the male end cap so t
103. Inject Positions The carrier gas sweeps the sample from the loop and into the front or inject end of the separation column It should be noted that the column is physically located in a separate oven that is run at 65 C As the sample is carried down the column the various components move at different speeds as determined by their physical and chemical properties Due to its low molecular weight and high volatility methane moves faster than other organic compounds and is the first to emerge from the opposite end of the column Upon leaving the column the methane flows back through the rotary valve and then to the flame ionization detector or FID The methane is measured by the FID and its signal is converted into a concentration by comparison with the signal produced by a calibration gas The FID used in the instrument is similar to those seen in many laboratory instruments and uses a hydrogen flame to ionize organic molecules in the carrier gas This is an established method that is sensitive and reliable for measurement of most organic compounds Once the methane peak has been detected the rotary valve is automatically returned to the original backflush position as shown in Figure 1 1 Note that at this point the direction of carrier gas flow through the column has reversed and that the sample loop has been switched out of the carrier stream and back into the sampling system With the reversal of carrier flow in the column the non metha
104. Input Calibration acce tarta ie eb cb itis 7 20 Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts 7 20 Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale 7 21 Thermistor Replacent nt sdegtetei e i eec dca onus 7 22 Ambient Temperature Calibration 526 edet eitdaltitetetelediatie 7 22 Fuel Calibraion Solenoid Valve Replacement 7 24 8 Port Valve Rotor Replacements 7 24 Disassembly cns oe sae edt ee ted ta btc sedie 7 25 Cleaning the Valve Beyaz gests utut ok se aged 7 26 Cleaning the ROtOL ue icut esp Staates Mia deg 7 27 Basembly iioii done HO te sedans I Moe cand s e fiue Ned 7 27 Testing and Replacing the Ignitot onion natis 7 28 Checking the Detector Bias Voltage tette es 7 30 Removino the Detector actin oii iau oct orca Ute 7 31 Detector Rebunidinp aaen D dae dete 7 33 Internal Sample Filter Rep acementc eto e poteet od 7 38 Valve Actuator Repdig uo eee i e a kEi seats 7 39 Disassembly uoo dace ro bae e DU SIQUIERA THU E DE He IU ENE 7 40 O Ring Replicementezs ied eee dero ege teetilide tbe seu dece iE 7 42 Regssemblye ue s notus senta Nace cues aen E ie Mes eere 7 43 Rebuilding the Subassembly Graciela quiae doe on ed ds 7 44 Model 55i Instruction Manual xiii Contents xiv Chapter 8 Model 55i Instruction Manual Valve Alignment e oci iita iet cette tuia eis taa ri usque t es 7 46 Visually Checking Alignment diiit tnr rte tide
105. Model 55 Instruction Manual Direct Methane Non Methane Hydrocarbon Analyzer Part Number 103962 00 2Aug2012 C Thermo 2008 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc All rights reserved Specifications terms and pricing are subject to change Not all products are available in all countries Please consult your local sales representative for details Thermo Fisher Scientific Air Quality Instruments 27 Forge Parkway Franklin MA 02038 1 508 520 0430 www thermo com aqi Thermo Fisher Scientific WEEE Compliance This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher Scientific s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermo com WEEEROHS WEEE Compliance Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual This manual provides information about installing operating maintaining and servicing the Model 55 analyzer It also contains important alerts to ensure safe operation and prevent equipment damage The manual is organized
106. Network Time Protocol protocols Simultaneous connections from different locations over Ethernet For details of the analyzer s principle of operation and product specifications see the following topics e Principle of Operation on page 1 2 e Specifications on page 1 7 Model 55i Instruction Manual 1 1 Introduction Principle of Operation Principle of Operation 1 2 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific is pleased to supply this direct methane non methane hydrocarbon analyzer We are committed to the manufacture of instruments exhibiting high standards of quality performance and workmanship Service personnel are available for assistance with any questions or problems that may arise in the use of this analyzer For more information on servicing see Chapter 7 Servicing The Model 557s measurement of methane and non methane hydrocarbons is based on the well developed science of gas chromatography and utilizes a proprietary column system developed specifically for this application Gas chromatography is a proven analytical tool that was initially developed in the 1950 s and is now the most widely applied separation technique in analytical laboratories A detailed discussion of chromatographic theory goes beyond the scope of this manual and is not necessary for operation of the analyzer However a basic understanding of chromatographic principals may be helpful for instrument setup and troubleshoot
107. Places The Decimal Places screen allows the user to select how many digits are displayed to the right of the decimal point from 0 to 6 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Analog Input Config select Channel Decimal Places Number of Table Points The Number of Table Points screen allows the user to select how many points are used in the analog input conversion table for the selected channel The instrument uses linear interpolation between the points in this table to determine what the reading value is based on the analog input voltage Each point in the table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 5 V and a corresponding reading value Only two points are necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs The points range from 2 to 10 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Analog Input Config select Channel Table Points Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 49 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Table Points Volts User Value 3 50 Model 55i Instruction Manual The Table Points submenu allows the user to set up an individual table point e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Point 1 10 lt pH oh PLP The Volts screen allows t
108. Pressure Min or Max The Bias Voltage screen displays the current bias voltage reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 325 to 275 V Typically these alarm limits are set to 310 and 290 V If the bias voltage reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Bias Voltage Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Min and Max Bias The Minimum Bias Voltage alarm limit screen is used to change the Voltage Limits minimum bias voltage alarm limit The minimum and maximum bias voltage screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Bias Voltage Min or Max EH hid LP Methane Span Check The Methane Span Check screen allows the user to view the status of the most recent methane span check and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 75 to 125 0 percent Typically these alarm limits are set to 97 0 and 103 0 percent If the methane span check reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt CH4 Span Check i gies LP Min and Max Methane The Minimum Methane Span Check alarm l
109. Receive relay stat open Note If individual relays have been assigned different logic then the response would be a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the least significant byte LSB being relay no 1 A Thermo Fisher Scientific Record Layout Definition Format Specifier for ASCII Responses Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition For example Receive relay stat Ox0001 indicates relay no 1 is set to normally open logic all others are normally closed Receive relay stat 0x0005 indicates relay no 1 and 3 are set to be normally open logic all others are normally closed set relay open set relay open value set relay closed set relay closed value These commands set the relay logic to normally open or closed for relay number value where value is the relay between 1 and 16 The following example sets the relay number 1 logic to normally open Note If the command is sent without an appended relay number then all the relays are assigned the set logic of normally open closed A Send set relay open 1 Receive set relay open 1 ok The erec lrec and srec layouts contain the following e A format specifier for parsing ASCII responses e A format specifier for parsing binary responses In addition to these the erec layout contains e A format specifier for producing the front panel display screens Values are read using either the ASCII or binary format specifiers and converted to
110. Receive set response factor 5 ok sampling time This command reports the sampling delay time before making a measurement The following example reports that the sampling time delay is 60 seconds Send sampling time Receive sampling time 60 set sampling time value This command sets the sampling delay time before making a measurement to value where value is a floating point number representing 4 999 in seconds The following example sets the sampling time delay to 15 seconds Send set sampling time 15 Receive set sampling time 15 ok H a rd ware air control pressure This command reports the current air control pressure according to Table Co nfiguration B 7 The following example shows that for hydrogen fuel during ignition the air control pressure is set to 17 psi Send air control pressure O 1 Receive air control pressure O 1 17 000 set air control pressure fuel status value This command sets the air control pressure according to Table B 7 The following example sets the air control pressure for mixed fuel during the run mode to value where value is a floating point number representing the air control pressure in PSI The following example sets the air control pressure to 15 psi Send set air control pressure 1 O 15 000 Receive set air control pressure 1 O 15 000 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual B 35 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration B 36 Model 55i Instruction Manua
111. Service gt Condition Column ISDHRIS TOT OPE PRE ROLL bP LLDIPPLPI RQMISE PEST DH Dp BEE EP Sead E eh F Eun F hat ake POE ae e PUPRSSPCHP d The Set Windows Timing menu is used to set the timing parameters that control injection backflush and data acquisition These parameters are initially set at the factory and should not require adjustment e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Set Window Timing DH DM 2o oat E SO a EA The Methane Start and Methane End screens are used to set the time at which the methane window starts and ends In order for the methane concentration to be measured correctly the methane and oxygen peaks must both fall within this window If the window value has changed since the previous zero run the instrument will respond with ZERO CHROM DATA IS INVALID The methane start and end screens function the same way Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Backflush NMHC Start End Operation Service Menu Note Changing these values could severely affect the operation of the instrument If adjustment becomes necessary please contact the service center for further information A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Set Window Timing Methane Start or Methane End IRSE TERET DTE DH mete DUSEPUHLCELGEL E Rs 4o gPed23 o PHLPiPPG The Backflush screen is used to change the time at which the rotary valve switches between inject and backflush modes
112. Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Board Leyel Connection Diagrams eui tte datis ideis 6 8 Connector Pin Descriptions ice e adnata d berto spa cunda 6 10 Performance Problems brenda e rd in Deceapve conve tol idend Rd vastes 6 22 Normal Chromatograms itc tnn Der doces ara arderet da 6 24 Gas Teale in Column OWVEDI pae Ginen tov pred eara desto 6 25 Contaminated Carrier Gas u a dried redi het iie sae e ERN 6 26 Contaminated olim cu ste eter teo e eu riot eden ede 6 27 Service T OCALIOHS anireo ihe eli ene ee aa aaia 6 29 SAAT PR E p EP RE 7 1 Safety PRC CATON se nn echte estie tton Rehd ausu ieu 7 3 Firmware Updates ero d rU se aeter ar eu e EN usud 7 4 Accessing the Service Mode ette osi ee ae dedeedt antt 7 4 Replacement Parts List seed dese a ae ep dee EU ae Edel 7 5 Cable Tist eot aoo oo etatis Ss bat d tetur 7 6 External Device Connection Components ettet centers 7 7 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panele Tat e ton tet ee den anc Suenos A E 7 9 Puinp Replacement ei etre Ra peterent Reden 7 10 Fan Filter Replacemeht su oo reb D teet soeiestendeieect odes dues 7 12 Input Board Replacement 2 sca uie ti dati it nitide 7 13 Input Board Ca libration ota este etti beoe pa a 7 14 DC Power Supply Replacement id sea i pepe pH 7 15 Analog Output Testing 5 eite bedient eA dae teed 7 16 Analog Output Calbratioqm ood coque tease etie ee ciens 7 19 Analog
113. Thermo Fisher Scientific For further information regarding operation with mixed fuels contact the service department A In addition to air and fuel for the FID the instrument also requires a supply of carrier gas to sweep the sample through the column Of the three gases used by the instrument the purity of the carrier gas is the most important consideration Low grade carrier gases will produce an unstable baseline elevated NMHC readings and can eventually contaminate the column For most applications ultra high purity UHP nitrogen 99 999906 is the best carrier gas For laboratory installations use of boil off from a liquid nitrogen cylinder is also a good choice The Model 55 requires a calibration or span gas mixture containing known concentrations of methane and a non methane hydrocarbon For most applications the non methane hydrocarbon should be propane and the gas mixture should be prepared in hydrocarbon free air Calibration mixtures of methane and propane in air are readily available from scientific gas suppliers and will remain stable for at least several months The concentrations of methane and propane in the calibration gas should be about 8096 of the concentrations expected in the sample However the methane concentration should not be less than 2 ppm and the propane concentration should not be less than 1 ppm If calibration at less than 2 ppm methane is required for very small concentrations an alternate calib
114. These parameters are initially set at the factory and should not require adjustment If adjustment becomes necessary please contact the service center for guidance e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Crucial Settings PRESET BPD ITEm DH DIEM EPOE EPak E eh Pana F Haat ake EE Saeed eae Pi DEE EE The Slope Threshold screen is used during measurement of the NMHC peak primarily to discriminate between small NMHC peaks and signals caused by random noise During data analysis a maximum and minimum slope value is calculated for each candidate peak If the values fall below the slope thresholds set in the software the signal is disregarded Correct slope threshold settings are determined at the factory by running a series of blank chromatograms and recording the maximum and minimum slope values reported in the diagnostic menu The slope thresholds are then adjusted to a value slightly higher than the values observed while running blanks If the slope thresholds are set too high the instruments ability to detect small peaks will be impaired Conversely slope threshold values that Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu are set too low may result in erroneously high readings and or poor repeatability e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Crucial Settings Slope Threshold EN DHOBM ii TE Min and Max Slope The Minimum Slope Threshold screen is used to change the slope Threshold threshold minimum valu
115. UTION FITTINGS ARE HOT pem Q_Y NS A OUTPUTS INLET EXHAUST BY PASS C AC 2 input Figure 2 2 Model 557 Rear Panel Gas scrubbers that remove traces of oxygen hydrocarbons and water vapor from the support air and fuel are available from chromatography suppliers If the highest grade support gases are used scrubbers are generally not needed However if mid or low grade air and fuel is used scrubbers may improve performance of the analyzer Scrubbers are especially helpful if the instrument is being operated with breathing quality air or with house air from a compressor Note If hydrocarbon scrubbers containing charcoal or molecular sieve are installed these devices do not remove methane which is the most common hydrocarbon contaminant In addition scrubbers must be replaced or refilled on a regular basis to maintain performance Failure to provide routine maintenance will result in loss of scrubber performance and in some cases can cause increased levels of contamination in the support gases Because the carrier gas must be ultra high purity grade the addition of scrubbers to the carrier line will not usually improve performance and in some cases can even introduce problems A A continuous supply of air is required to support the FID flame To provide enough air for operation of the FID the air pressure coming into the instrument must be set between 40 and 80 psi and the system must be able to supply at least 400 mi
116. able 3 2 for the range values For more information on loop size see Instrument Configuration on page 3 61 e Inthe Main Menu choose Range 3 8 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Menu mkien TREO Tce D mpr Table 3 2 Loop Size Range Values Loop Size Low Range Medium Range High Range Concentration Concentration Concentration Trace Concentration 5 50 500 Low Concentration 10 100 1000 Medium Concentration 20 200 2000 High Concentration 50 500 5000 Concentration Units The Concentration Units screen defines how the methane and non methane concentration are expressed Gas units of parts per billion ppb parts per million ppm parts per million carbon ppmc micrograms per cubic meter ug m milligrams per cubic meter mg m or percent are available It should be understood that the concentration unit is only a label Therefore the instrument operates independently of the type of unit selected the unit selection does not affect the instrument s measurement procedure When switching the selected units the instrument s analog ranges all default to the highest range For example when switching from mg m to ppm all the ranges default to 200000 ppm Therefore whenever you change units you should also check the range settings Note If the units change the instrument should be re calibrated A display warning will appear A The Model 55 cannot convert between the various
117. accurate calibration this may not be practical In these cases the span gas can be selected on the basis of other factors such as availability or cost For most applications calibration with a mixture of methane and propane in air is most practical Thermo Fisher Scientific Selecting Span Gas Concentrations Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Selecting Calibration Mixture In selecting a calibration gas the operator must also be aware that the detector response varies depending on the specific compound being sampled Therefore if the non methane channel is calibrated with propane and then used to measure other compounds the instrument readings will not be a direct measure of concentration in ppm For example if the instrument is calibrated with propane and then used to measure hexane the ppm readings will be approximately double the true concentration This problem can be addressed by expressing concentrations in ppmc rather than ppm or through the use of a response factor The concentration in ppmc is calculated by multiplying the concentration in ppm by the number of carbon atoms per molecule in the span gas For example 3 ppm of propane which is composed of three carbon atoms is equivalent to 9 ppmc Use of ppmc rather than ppm is preferred for some applications where the total number of carbon atoms is considered to be an important issue or in situations where the operator would prefer to report all results in methane
118. acement on page 7 24 e Testing and Replacing the Ignitor on page 7 28 e Checking the Detector Bias Voltage on page 7 30 e Removing the Detector on page 7 31 e Detector Rebuilding on page 7 33 e Internal Sample Filter Replacement on page 7 38 e Valve Actuator Repair on page 7 39 e General Electrical Testing on page 7 47 e Adjusting Critical Gas Flows on page 7 49 e Fuse Replacement on page 7 54 e I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement on page 7 54 e Digital Output Board Replacement on page 7 56 e Motherboard Replacement on page 7 56 e Measurement Interface Board Replacement on page 7 57 e Front Panel Board Replacement on page 7 59 e LCD Module Replacement on page 7 60 e Service Locations on page 7 61 7 2 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A CAUTION Due to the possibility of residual fuel in the detector keep your face away from the FID The ignitor pulse is clearly visible from a distance when the thermocouple has been
119. ack together See Figure 7 23 for parts identification 1 Puta liberal coating of silicone lubricant on the slots in the driveshaft 2 Place the ball retainer over the shaft so that the hole in the retainer line up with the slots in the shaft 3 Put the balls in the holes of the retainer so that they rest in the slots They should be held in place by the thick lubricant 4 Notice that the slots in the female race extend all the way to one end but not the other Observe also that one end of the driveshaft has a 14 inch hole Put that end of the driveshaft into the end of the female race that has the slot openings sliding the balls into the slots Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Valve Actuator Repair 5 Place the male end cap on a flat work surface Set the O ring plate on the end cap with the pins lined up to go through the three small O rings Do not press it on yet this would dislodge the O rings MALE END CAP INTERNAL O RING EXTERNAL O RING MALE END CAP MALE END CAP THIN WASHER THICK WASHER BEARING PINS EXTERNAL O RING O RING PLATE INTERNAL d ue O RING PLATE O RING PLATE ve 2 PIN O RINGS IAS o O FING PLATE C P QU DRIVESHAFT l c NON COUNTERSUNK on SF E BEARING PLATE SS E eae N WISENIE aX DA 777 BEARING PLATE bas A Vil 77 FEMALE RACE E BALLS a oh 2 MERE UD CUL BAL RETAINER IS 5 pa o BUS
120. agm support cup and shim rings from the pump Note DO NOT use tools Take care not to lose any shim rings positioned between the diaphragm support cup and connecting rod as the exact number of shim rings must be used during re assembly A F Replace the support cup and shim rings onto the threaded stud of the new diaphragm Carefully screw the new diaphragm into the connecting rod Spin the diaphragm on until it is snug Note DO NOT use tools A 10 Turn the fan until the diaphragm is flat across With the diaphragm centered over the compressor housing firmly seat the diaphragm edge into the compressor housing groove Replace the bottom plate onto the compressor housing the new flapper valve on top of the intermediate plate and the top plate on top of the bottom plate Tighten the four top plate screws to a maximum torque of 6 7 inch lbs Turn the fan by hand to confirm that the pump turns freely Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding 11 Replace the compressor housing cover and gasket Install the four cover screws making sure not to over tighten 12 Check that the flow from the pump exhaust is 1 LPM with the pump inlet open to the air Top Plate screws 4x Top Plate Flapper Valve Bottom Plate Diaphragm Support Cup Shim Rings Cover Screws 4x Compressor Housing Cover Figure 5 3 Rebuilding the Pump New Technology Thermo Fis
121. ags 08528225 CH4 0 000 NMHC 0 000 Det Temp 174 811 Col Temp 75 812 Flame 1 000 14 16 11 15 07 flags 08528225 CH4 0 000 NMHC 0 000 Det Temp 175 055 Col Temp 75 763 Flame 1 000 14 17 11 15 07 flags 08528225 CH4 0 004 NMHC 0 000 Det Temp 174 786 Col Temp 75 421 Flame 1 000 lrec format srec format erec format These commands report the output format for lrecs and srecs and erec data in various formats such as ASCII without text ASCII with text or binary The following example shows the output format for lrecs is ASCII with text according to Table B 5 Send lrec format Receive lrec format 1 set lrec format format set srec format format set erec format format These commands set the output format for lrecs and srecs and erec data according to Table B 5 The following example sets the Irec output format to ASCII with text Send set lrec format 1 Receive set lrec format 1 ok B 24 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging Table B 5 Record Output Formats Format Output Format 0 ASCII no text 1 ASCII with text 2 Binary data lrec layout srec layout erec layout These commands report the layout string indicating the data formats for data that is sent out in response to the lrec srec erec and related commands For details on how to interpret the strings see Record Layout Definition later in this
122. aid 3 76 Select Fuel tl b did edet a ape docs 3 76 Auto Range Change sioe ect ta setis 3 77 Use Flat Baseline Recto lareo ud terea edeis 3 77 Condition Col BITE es eect a i ami MD Cue 3 77 Det Window TINING iieis oa Bert Cree err en ert ity des ic Mtn te tuti tr rr 3 78 Methane Start Endo ees coe tpa fofi ieee einen areata 3 78 ACES auicm eto stessa iie eria aeta duced 3 79 NIMC Start End ensesine nier ot Med ei edi ease 3 79 Crucial Sete ives ene acre endet i ta beoe et aud 3 80 Slope Threshold sca oer P de es a 3 80 Min and Max Slope Threshold ood See ciue dd 3 81 Methane Calibration Err tes ug e eee conc i eid ston lessees 3 81 Min and Max Methane Calibration Error 3 82 Non Methane Calibration Error uie ine neva dete teens 3 82 Min and Max Methane Calibration Error 3 82 Gain Factors socie paid dieti a bee oce 3 83 Mid Range Gain Factoren dites si HIR E rd 3 83 High Range Gain Factor eccentric dan 3 84 Calibration F ACU Es ce tiniest seach Cometa ote tis 3 84 Methane Calibration Factor idt tat Paten dietas 3 85 Non Methane Calibration Factor eese 3 85 Set Pressure and BOW snot Manet vad must atio sese axi tea is cat cates at 3 85 Iup t Board Calibration sanas tad eran en detis 3 87 Manual Input Calibration s science duca idees 3 87 Automatic Input Calibration itt ettet 3 88 Input Prequency Display onc Ie aee the tetas 3 88 Te
123. alibrate Zero press The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel 4 Make sure that nothing is connected to the channel input pins and press to calibrate the input voltage on the selected channel to zero volts The screen displays 0 00 V as the voltage setting Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Input Calibration 5 Press a gt to return to the Analog Input Cal screen and repeat Steps 2 through 4 to calibrate other input channels to zero as necessary 6 Continue with the Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale procedure that follows Calibrating the Input Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to full scale by Channels to Full Scale applying a known voltage to the channels Equipment Required DC voltage source greater than 0 volts and less than 10 volts 1 Connect the known DC voltage source to the input channel 1 8 to be calibrated Figure 7 8 shows the analog input pins and Table 7 5 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal The Analog Input Cal screen displays input channels 1 8 3 At the Analog Input Cal screen press amp to scroll to the channel selected in Step 1 and press 4 Press 9 to scroll to Calibrate Full Scale and press The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel 5 Use Y Jand f to enter the source voltage and
124. alibration will be performed If it is set to NO an auto check will be performed e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters Auto Calibration Setup Cal Reset DH HIM FiLSGgUPbPI Auto Verification The Auto Verification screen allows the user to set the automatic vreification mode on or off If it is set to on each calibration will involve at least two analysis cycles Data collected during consecutive cycles will be compared to determine calibration repeatability If auto verification is set to off calibration will be based on a single analysis cycle and will not be checked In most cases the auto verification should be set to on e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters Auto Verification DH Guided PIL Min Verification The Verification Cycles screen allows the user to adjust the minimum Cycles number of verification cycles used when auto verification is on Values are between 2 default and 5 e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters Min Verification Cycles 3 16 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Use Zero Chromatogram Reset User Calibration Defaults Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Parameters Menu The Use Zero Chromatogram screen allows the user to choose whether to use a previously stored zero chromatogram for baseline correction or not Note The screen will show ZERO CHROM DATA IS INVALID if set to YES and the d
125. ampling Time Response Factor Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Set Operation Mode screen allows the user to choose between continuous and single run mode Continuous mode is the usual setting and allows the instrument to run automatically In single run mode the instrument pauses after each analysis and waits until the RUN button is pressed before starting another measurement cycle The single mode is useful for measurement samples collected in bags or other containers e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Set Operation Mode The Sampling Time screen allows the user to adjust the instrument sampling time which is a pause that occurs just before injection In single run mode the sampling time counts down from the time the RUN button is pressed until the time of sample injection In continuous mode the sampling time is added at the start of the measurement cycle The sampling time can range from 4 default to 999 seconds e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Sampling Time The Response Factor screen allows the user to set a multiplier that is then automatically applied to the NMHC measurement before it is displayed or sent to the analog output The response factor can be used to compensate for any difference in detector response between the actual sample and the span gas Limits are 0 0001 to 1000 0 For most applications the response factor should be set to 1 0 defau
126. analytical cycles If a zero chromatogram will be used the zero air mut be ultra zero grade with total hydrocarbons of less than 0 1 ppm Air fuel and carrier gas are connected to the rear panel bulkheads using 1 4 inch OD line and the compression fittings supplied with the instrument see Figure 2 1 Note There are two air inlets on the rear panel The AIR inlet supplies the FID and the ACTUATOR inlet supplies the rotary valve actuator In cases where the high purity air supply is limited the rotary valve actuator may be driven by a lower grade air supply or dedicated compressor A Connect the sample line to the bulkhead fitting labeled SAMPLE INLET using the 1 4 inch compression fitting that is provided If the sample is expected to contain particulate material a filter should be included in the sample line to protect the rotary valve The sample should be presented to the instrument at a stable pressure near normal atmospheric levels The instrument s internal pump can work against a vacuum of about 10 inches of water and will draw sample through at least 100 feet of 1 4 inch OD sample line If sample is being drawn from a source that operates under strong negative pressure an external pump should be considered For further information contact the service department If the inlet is connected to a source that operates above atmospheric pressure or if an external pump will be used the sampling line must be vented to avoid pressuri
127. arms gt Column Temp Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 65 Operation Alarms Menu Min and Max Column Temperature Limits Carrier Pressure Min and Max Carrier Pressure Limits 3 66 Model 55i Instruction Manual The Minimum Column Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum column oven temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum column temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Column Temp gt Min or Max The Carrier Pressure screen displays the current carrier pressure reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 to 50 0 psi Typically these alarm limits are set to 5 0 and 10 0 psi If the carrier pressure reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Carrier Pressure The Minimum Carrier Pressure alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum carrier pressure alarm limit The minimum and maximum carrier pressure screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Carrier Pressure Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Fuel Pressure Min and Max Fuel Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Limits Air Pressure Operation Alarms Menu The Fuel Pressure screen displays the current fuel pressure reading an
128. arranged as 320 by 240 characters The data is sent in RLE encoded form to save time in transmission It is sent as a type 5 binary C Link response with no checksum The RLE encoding consists of a 0 followed by an 8 bit count of consecutive OxFF bytes The following c code will expand the incoming data Model 55i Instruction Manual B 31 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration Measurement Configuration B 32 Model 55i Instruction Manual void unpackDisplay void far tdib unsigned char far rlescreen int 3k unsigned char far sc4bpp sc2bpp screen ptr ptr screen unsigned char far malloc 19200 RLE decode the screen for i20 i 19200 amp amp ptr screen lt 19200 i ptr rlescreen i if rlescreen i 0 unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptr 0 rlecount else if rlescreen i Oxff unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptrt Oxff rlecount To convert this data into a BMP for use with Windows it needs to be saved as a 4 bit per pixel gray scale image Also note that BMP files are upside down relative to this data i e the top display line is the last line in the BMP sc screen These commands are meant for backward compatibility with the C series Screen information is instead reported using the iscreen command abo
129. ata is not OK A e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters gt Use Zero Chromatogram The Reset User Calibration Defaults screen allows the user to reset the calibration factors response factor calibration error limits and auto calibration parameters to factory defaults This function also clears the zero chromatogram data and invalidates the zero chromatogram the user will have to take a new zero chromatogram to continue to use this feature e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Reset User Cal Defaults CHP Eo bel Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 17 Operation Calibration Calibration The Manual Calibration screen is used to manually initiate calibration or calibration check on the instrument If calibration can not be performed the instrument will respond with NOT ABLE TO START CAL NOW Note The screen will show ZERO CHROM DATA IS INVALID if use zero chromatogram is ON and the data is not OK A e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration TREICT TOC DE pobre ce i i Mort Lt Instrument Controls The Instrument Controls menu contains a number of items that may be Menu used to control various instrument operational parameters The firmware controls listed in this menu enable control of the listed instrument functions e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls DH HOM 2o a E SO a EA 3 18 Model 55 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Set Operation Mode S
130. ate 1 9 SPAN ODE open 2 11 CH4 CONC MAX open 3 23 CH4 OVERRANGE open 8 ZERO 7 INJECT open 3 CAL MODE open 4 CAL CHK MODE open 5 RUN MODE open ODE open These commands report the list of possible index numbers and the variables associated with that index number available for selection in the Model 55i Instruction Manual B 51 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 52 Model 55i Instruction Manual current mode for analog outputs digital outputs and digital inputs The index number is used to insert the variable in a field location in a list using set sp field index The following example reports the list of analog outputs index numbers and variables Send list var aout Receive list var aout index variable 0 none CH4 NMHC THC Det_Temp Filt_Temp Col Temp Flame Temp Int Temp Air PSI Carrier PSI Fuel PSI Raw Hz Flame CH4 pk ht CHA rt CH4 base CH4 lod CH4 pk ht nm area nm base st base end lod st idx end idx max slp min slp nm pts exfg OO ON DUN HRWN PR NNNNNNNBPBPBRBBPBHBH EB Ov Ui amp UO N IB O XO 00 4 Ov Un S 0 ND S 3 5 3 5 3 5 5 5 5 5 UJ N oN relay stat This command reports the current relay logic as normally open or normally closed if all the relays are set to same state that is all open or all closed The following example shows that the status of all the relays logic is set to normally open Send relay stat
131. ation chapter for more information Send addr ntp Receive addr ntp 208 184 349 9 set addr ntp address This command sets the network time protocol server address where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr ntp 208 184 349 9 Receive set addr ntp 208 184 349 9 ok baud This command reports the current baud rate for the serial port RS232 RS485 The following example reports that the current baud rate is 9600 baud Send baud Receive baud 9600 set baud rate rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 This command sets the instrument baud rate to rate The following example sets the instrument s baud rate to 9600 Note After the command is sent the baud rate of the sending device must be changed to agree with the instrument A Send set baud 9600 Receive set baud 9600 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration dhcp This command reports the current state of use of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP as on or off DHCP is used to assign an IP address to the instrument automatically The following example shows that DHCP is on Send dhcp Receive dhcp on set dhcp onoff onoff on off This command enables oz and disables off the DHCP service When DHCP is set to on the instrument gets the IP address the netmask address and t
132. aximum B 14 alarm value nm alarm status Reports alarm status for non methane B 13 nm range Reports sets current non methane measurement range B 34 nm span Reports sets non methane 1 span gas concentration B 29 nm span high Reports sets non methane 3 span gas concentration B 29 nm span low Reports sets non methane 3 span gas concentration B 29 nm span med Reports sets non methane 3 span gas concentration B 29 nm value Reports current non methane concentration B 11 nm window end Reports sets delay time from injection to closing of the non B 33 methane window nm window start Reports sets delay time from injection to opening of the non B 33 methane window no of Irec Reports number of Irecs stored in memory B 25 no of srec Reports number of srecs stored in memory B 25 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page power up mode Reports sets the power up mode as local or remote B 46 program no Reports analyzer program number B 47 pump Reports the status of the pump B 39 pump off always Sets the pump always off B 40 pump on always Sets the pump always on B 40 pump on when hot Turns the pump on when hot B 40 push Simulates pressing a key on the front panel B 31 relay Sets relay logic status for the designated relay s B 53 relay stat Reports relay logic status for all relays B 52 response factor Rep
133. bad cmd if no host name has been set Send host name Receive host name iSeries set host name string This command sets the host name string where string is 1 13 alphanumeric characters with no spaces The following example sets the host name to analyzer01 This command returns bad cmd if no host name has been set Send set host name analyzeroi Receive set host name analyzero1 ok instr name This command reports the instrument name The following example reports the instrument name for the Model 557 Send instr name Receive instr name Total Hydrocarbon Analyzer THC Analyzer instrument id This command reports the instrument identification ID The following example reports the current setting of the instrument ID Send instrument id Receive instrument id 55 set instrument id value This command sets the instrument ID to value where value is an integer between 0 and 127 inclusive The following example shows the instrument ID changed to 56 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Note Sending this command via RS 232 or RS 485 will require the host to use the new ID for subsequent commands A Send set instrument id 56 Receive set instrument id 56 ok mode This command reports what operating mode the instrument is in local service or remote The following example shows that the instrument is in the remote mode Send mode Re
134. be configured for either RS 232 or RS 485 The serial baud rate is user selectable in the firmware for standard speeds from 1200 to 115200 baud The user can also set the data bits parity and stop bits The following protocols are supported e C Link e Modbus Slave e Geysitech Bayern Hessen e Streaming Data e AK The Streaming Data protocol transmits user selected measurement data via the serial port in real time for capture by a serial printer datalogger or PC A null modem crossed cable is required when connecting the analyzer to an IBM compatible PC However a straight cable one to one may be required when connecting the analyzer to other remote devices As a general rule when the connector of the host remote device is female a straight cable is required and when the connector is male a null modem cable is required Thermo Fisher Scientific RS 485 Connection Ethernet Connection External Accessory Connector Thermo Fisher Scientific Data Format System Description 1 0 Components 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 BAUD 7 or 8 data bits 1 or 2 stop bits No odd or even parity All responses are terminated with a carriage return hex 0D Refer to Table 8 1 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration DB9 Pin Function 2 RX 3 TX 7 RTS 8 CTS 5 Ground The instrument uses a four wire RS 485 configuration with auto
135. can be used with this analyzer Appendix A Warranty is a copy of the warranty statement Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control an analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger Model 55i Instruction Manual i About This Manual Safety Safety Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Model 55i Instruction Manual e Appendix C MODBUS Protocol provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet e Appendix D Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol provides a description of the Geysitech Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet e Appendix E AK Protocol Commands provides a description of the AK protocol commands that can be used to remotely control an analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger Review the following safety information carefully before using the analyzer This manual provides specific information on how to operate the analyzer however if the analyzer is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired This manual contains important information to alert you to potential safety hazards and risks of equipment damage Refer to the following types of alerts you may see in this
136. carbon concentrations The following example shows that the THC concentration is 40 ppm Model 55i Instruction Manual B 11 C Link Protocol Commands Instrument Control Instrument Control B 12 Model 55i Instruction Manual Send thc Receive thc 4 000E 04 ppb backflush This commands the multiport valve to move to the backflush position This command will not be processed if service mode is active Send backflush Receive backflush ok inject This commands the multiport valve to the injection position This command will not be processed if service mode is active Send inject Receive inject ok condition column This command reports the column condition mode to either on or off according to Table B 3 Send condition column Receive condition column O set condition column value This command sets the column condition mode according to value where value is set to either on or off according to Table B 3 The following example sets the condition column to on Send set condition column 1 Receive set condition column 1 ok Table B 3 Condition Column Values Value Condition Mode 0 Off 1 On start This command starts a measurement cycle It returns an error if a run cycle is already in progress This command will not be processed if service mode is active Send start Receive start ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarms C Link Protocol Commands Alarms stop This command
137. cations For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 61 Chapter 8 System Description This chapter describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections and functions as follows Hardware on page 8 1 Firmware on page 8 4 Electronics on page 8 5 I O Components on page 8 8 Hardware Model 55 key hardware components Figure 8 1 include P g Thermo Fisher Scientific Flame Ionization Detector FID Sample Filter Internal Pump Rotary Valve Electronic Pressure Controllers Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Zero Span Solenoids Separation Column Model 55i Instruction Manual 8 1 System Description Hardware Column w Heater Post Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Rotary Valve Sample Span Solenoid HD Filter Sample Loop Pump Actuator Electronic Pressure Fuel Controls Air Bulkhead Thermistor Carrier Actuator Valve Drive 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Front Panel Digital Output Board D 1 H a Front Panel Board 7 n z 3 p S Power Supply Transformer Motherboard 100 and 220 V optio
138. ceive alarm pressure air min 8 0 psi set alarm pressure air min value set alarm pressure air max value These commands set the air pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the air pressure alarm limits in pounds per square inch The following example sets the air pressure alarm maximum value to 22 psi Send set alarm pressure air max 22 Receive set alarm pressure air max 22 ok alarm pressure fuel min alarm pressure fuel max These commands report the current fuel pressure alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the fuel pressure alarm minimum value is 8 0 psi Send alarm pressure fuel min Receive alarm pressure fuel min 8 0 psi set alarm pressure fuel min value set alarm pressure fuel max value These commands set the fuel pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the fuel pressure alarm limits in pounds per square inch The following example sets the fuel pressure alarm maximum value to 22 psi Send set alarm pressure fuel max 22 Receive set alarm pressure fuel max 22 ok alarm pressure carrier min alarm pressure carrier max These commands report the current carrier pressure alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the carrier pressure alarm minimum value is 5 psi Send alarm pressure carrier min Receive alarm pressure car
139. ceive mode remote set mode local set mode remote These commands set the instrument to local or remote mode The following example sets the instrument to the local mode Send set mode local Receive set mode local ok allow mode cmd This command reports the current allow mode setting 1 allow set mode local and set mode remote commands 0 ignore set mode local or set mode remote commands according to Table B 10 The default value is 0 ignore the commands The following example shows that the instrument is configured to ignore set mode local or set mode remote commands Send allow mode cmd Receive allow mode cmd O set allow mode cmd value This command is used to configure the instrument to value where value is either 1 accept or 0 ignore the set mode local and set mode remote commands according to Table B 10 If the instrument is set to accept the commands value 1 the set mode local command will unlock the instrument and the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel If the instrument is set to ignore the commands value 0 the instrument will respond with ok as if the command has been accepted and acted Model 55i Instruction Manual B 45 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 46 Model 55i Instruction Manual upon but it will not change the instrument lock status this is for compatibility with systems expecting and ok
140. channel or either 0 or 4 mA for a current channel depending on the selected range See the set output to field on the display e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Analog Out Cal select Channel Calibrate Zero DN ETE ILL CH mf Analog Output Calibrate The Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate Full Scale the full scale state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a meter to the output and adjust the output until the meter reads the value shown in the set output to field in either V or mA depending on the selected output channel e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Full Scale EUs EEE CILE Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 91 Operation Service Menu Analog Input Calibration The Analog Input Calibration menu is used to calibrate the 8 analog input channels at both zero and full scale The Analog Input Calibration menu is visible only when the I O expansion board is installed Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal camem MERSE I7 TOHZC CH Dub PUPENE i db d LA irt PME ieee EE EE a TEREDT Py Tame DH DEhi iibi Liisa Lb iL i Analog Input Calibrate The Analog Input Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the Zero zero state of the
141. ched to the FID exhaust port Record the stored pressure value Re connect the IGN BIAS supply cable at J27 located on the measurement interface board Remove the flow meter from the FID exhaust port Proceed to the following section Optimizing the Gas Flows Use the following procedure to adjust the gas flows for mixed fuel H2 He This includes e Setthe Fuel Pressure e Set the Carrier Pressure e Set the Combustion Air Pressure 1 Connect mixed fuel H He and air to the instrument s fuel bulkhead fitting and air bulkhead fitting respectively on the rear panel and set the supply pressures to 60 psi 2 Turn off any calibration gas supplies entering the instrument and relieve the pressure Make sure the manual air pressure regulator that is mounted to the oven is set to approximately 20 psi 3 From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Select Fuel gt Mixed 4 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Set Pressure and Flow For more information see Set Pressure and Flow in Chapter 3 Operation 5 From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Gas Pressures gt Mixed Fuel Run Set the pressure to create a fuel flow of 125 ml min Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 51 Servicing Adjusting Critical Gas Flows Set the Carrier Pressure Set the Combustion Air Pressure Optimizing the Gas Flows 7 52 Model 55i Instruction Manual and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the corre
142. choose Service Input Board Calibration EH DHOBM Manual Input Calibration The Manual Input Calibration screen is used to do a manual calibration of the input board A D stages per the following procedure Note The flame must not be lit when performing an input board calibration A 1 In the Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration gt Manual Input Cal 2 Press to leave warning screen 3 Make a note of the frequency at gain of 1 4 Use Jand gt to change the gain from 1 to 100 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 87 Operation Service Menu 5 Use f Jand to increment or decrement the D A counts so the frequency at gain 100 matches or is slightly above the frequency at gain 1 within 50 counts 6 Press to save new input board calibration Automatic Input Calibration The Automatic Input Calibration screen is used to do an automatic calibration of the input board A D stages A message will be displayed after the optimum setting has been determined Note The flame must not be lit when performing an input board calibration A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration gt Automatic Input Cal e Press to leave warning screen and begin automatic calibration Input Frequency Display 3 88 Model 55i Instruction Manual The Input Frequency Display screen is used to manually adjust the input board gain settings This may be used as a t
143. col Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt The Block Checksum Characters are calculated beginning with a seed value of 00000000 binary 0x00 and bitwise exclusive ORing with each of the characters of the command string or response including the framing characters lt STX gt and lt ETX gt The checksum works as an error check The command terminator determines the presence or absence of lt BCC gt If a command is terminated by lt ETX gt then the next two characters are the checksum if the command is terminated with CR no checksum is attached The block checksum is represented by two characters which represent a 2 digit hex number 1byte e g 1 byte OxAB hex checksum will be represented by the two characters A amp B The checksum is referred to as lt BCC gt throughout this document The following commands are supported by the Geysitech protocol e Instrument Control Command ST e Data Sampling Data Query Command DA There are seven control commands supported by the Geysitech protocol in the Model 553 This control command is a single letter which triggers an action in the instrument These commands are active only when service mode is inactive and for all commands except X the instrument must not be currently executing a run For commands that initiate a run the instrument must also not be in column conditioning mode and the flame must be lit Command N initiates a zero chromatogram
144. creen is used to enter the methane calibration factor e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Calibration Factors gt CH4 The Non Methane Calibration Factor screen is used to enter the non methane calibration factor e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Calibration Factors gt NMHC The Set Pressure and Flow menu is similar to the Gas Pressures screen in the Instrument Control menu in that it is used to view and adjust the set pressures for the carrier air hydrogen and mixed fuel Again two pressures are specified for each gas one for igniting the flame and the other for running the analyzer in normal operation Acceptable pressure ranges are 5 50 psi Unlike the Gas Pressures screen this screen does not allow pressures to be adjusted while the flame is still lit This is because when a pressure is selected for adjustment the firmware shuts off all other gases This makes it easy to measure the selected gas flow from the exhaust bulkhead on the rear panel Regarding setting the fuel pressures it is important to note whether hydrogen or mixed fuel is the selected fuel and adjust those pressures accordingly When adjusting any of the fuel pressures it is not necessary to Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 85 Operation Service Menu manually turn on the fuel solenoid The analyzer will do it automatically when a fuel pressure is selected The Set Pressures screen shows the current set point for each gas Once one
145. crewdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 57 Servicing Measurement Interface Board Replacement 1 Lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter 2 Unplug all connectors from the measurement interface board Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate re connection 3 Unscrew the two screws at the top of the measurement interface board Pop the measurement interface board off of the two bottom mounting studs and remove the board 4 To install the measurement interface board follow the previous steps in reverse 5 Re install the measurement case assembly 6 Calibrate the input board and the ambient temperature sensor as defined earlier in this chapter and re calibrate the unit with zero air and span gas Mounting Studs 2 Mounting Screws 2 Measurement Interface Board Figure 7 27 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board 7 58 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Front Panel Board Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific N Servicing Front Panel Board Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the front panel board Figure 7 28 Equipment Required
146. ct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port 6 Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Mixed Fuel Ignite Set the pressure to create a fuel flow of 125 ml min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Record the stored pressure value 1 Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Carrier Run Set the pressure to create a carrier gas flow of 55 ml min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port 2 Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Carrier Ignite Set the pressure equal to the setting entered in the Carrier Run screen from the previous step Record the stored pressure value 1 Return to the Set Pressure and Flow sceen choose Air Run Set the pressure to create an air flow of 315 ml min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port 2 Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Air Ignite Set the pressure to create an air flow of 225 ml min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Record the stored pressure value 3 Re connect the IGN BIAS supply cable at J27 located on the
147. ction Manual 2 Press to return to the Calibration Parameters menu and choose Auto Calibration Setup to select Cal Reset option as described earlier 3 Press W to return to the Calibration Parameters menu and choose Auto Verification to set the auto verification option to ON or OFF as described earlier For most applications this option should be set to ON 4 Press W to return to the Calibration Parameters menu and choose Min Verification Cycles to set the minimum number of calibration runs that will be performed if auto verification option is set to ON For most applications the default value of 2 provides adequate performance 5 Press W twice to return to the Main Menu and choose Calibration 6 Be sure that the span gas cylinder is turned on and if you are using the instrument s internal calibration solenoid to control the gas flow adjust the cylinder regulator pressure to about 15 psi 7 From the Calibration screen press gt to initiate the calibration Note The message NOT ABLE TO START CAL NOW is displayed if the flame is not lit or the analyzer is in the middle of a run or in column conditioning mode A 8 During the initial calibration check to be sure that the span gas flow rate is sufficient to flood the sampling line and prevent ambient air or sample from being pulled into the instrument from the atmospheric dump The span solenoid will open and allow span gas to enter the sample line
148. d interfaces between the motherboard and the function key panel and graphics display It serves as a central location to tie the three connectors required for the function key panel the graphics display control lines and the graphics display backlight to a single ribbon cable extending back to the motherboard This board also includes signal buffers for the graphics display control signals and a high voltage power supply for the graphics display backlight External I O is driven from a generic bus that is capable of controlling the following devices e Analog output voltage and current e Analog input voltage e Digital output TTL levels e Digital input TTL levels Note The instrument has spare solenoid valve drivers and I O support for future expansion A The instrument provides six analog voltage outputs Each may be firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 12 bits e 0 100 mV e 0 1V e 0 5V e 0 10V The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through the firmware At least 596 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in the firmware if required The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The voltage outputs are independent of the current outputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Current Outputs Optional Ana
149. d sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 to 50 0 psi Typically these alarm limits are set to 8 0 and 22 0 psi If the fuel pressure reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Fuel Pressure The Minimum Fuel Pressure alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum fuel pressure alarm limit The minimum and maximum fuel pressure screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Fuel Pressure Min or Max The Air Pressure screen displays the current air pressure reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 to 50 0 psi Typically these alarm limits are set to 8 0 and 22 0 psi If the air pressure reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 67 Operation Alarms Menu Min and Max Air Pressure Limits Bias Voltage 3 68 Model 55i Instruction Manual limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Air Pressure The Minimum Air Pressure alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum air pressure alarm limit The minimum and maximum air pressure screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Air
150. data from the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These functions read the contents of one or more contiguous registers These registers are 16 bits each and are organized as shown below All of the values are reported as 32 bit IEEE standard 754 floating point format This uses 2 sequential registers least significant 16 bits first The request specifies the starting register address and the number of registers Registers are addressed starting at zero Therefore registers numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 The register data in the response message are packed as two bytes per register with the binary contents right justified within each byte For each register the first byte contains the high order bits and the second contains the low order bits Model 55i Instruction Manual C 5 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 6 Model 55i Instruction Manual Request Function Code Starting Address Quantity of Registers Response Function Code Byte Count Register Value N Quantity of Registers Error Response Function Code Exception Code 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte N x 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte 0x03 or 0x04 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument 1 to maximum allowed by instrument 0x03 or 0x04 2xN N NorN 1 Function code 0x80 01 IIlegal Function 02 IIlegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request a
151. de lta eid Aos lut iadutafeladtai best d 8 4 Monitoring Signals ied oetad irit a e ibule doe Darin eeu uin 8 5 Output Communication ed cesa cob vente eso Cre d IR Te esti 8 5 Electronics idonee eod tries edipi eripe A N 8 5 Motherboard issnin a niadeecadausiesuwadasiedies 8 6 Measurement Interface Board uoce cecatenece cut see ac dep duit 8 6 Measurement Interface Board Connectors esses 8 6 Input Board cat bs beta tete oat n iecit at petit 8 7 Digital Output Board ice irte en DU adeat cus 8 7 I O Expansion Board Optional 22 eS tesi pido qe 8 7 Front Panel Connector Board ete Gia tuin 8 8 VO Components ioo ts euren oin iiai aai i aa 8 8 Analog Voltage Outputs ssssessesesesesesesesesesesrsesrsrsrsrsrsrreseneseseseseses 8 8 Analog Current Outputs Optional esse 8 9 Analog Voltage Inputs Optional sss 8 9 Digital Relay OU puso uim intet Danus eerste tee E 8 9 1B reeves Dl Bal oleh ec emenpr eat mentee oe ne cd amas Manca decus esed b 8 9 Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents DEPIIDPOPIS edicie n a adc esiste istae aciei Mole 8 10 R3 232 COBBECHOR uo discite cequures Steele ui eredi a tuv tM Rede MS e s 8 10 15 485 Connections oet dos o toidukevet eisie code aie daret gts 8 11 Ethernet Connection nete enira docet sun atomis tua eek dapens 8 11 External Accessory Connector sedi acted etre caged ss ia tuse 0 AUR UEE 8 11 Chapter 9 Optional Eguipimbhi soo orare
152. de of the detector housing 5 Locate and disconnect the ignitor power cable at the Sta kon connector located about 14 inches down the cable Note The Sta con connector should lie outside of the oven A 6 Using the 5 16 inch wrench unscrew the ignitor and lead wire from the detector 7 Install the new ignitor and lead wire into the detector being sure to include the copper ring that acts as a gasket between the plug and the detector housing Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 29 Servicing Checking the Detector Bias Voltage Checking the Detector Bias Voltage 7 30 Model 55i Instruction Manual 8 Dress the lead wire through the access hole in oven housing and reconnect to lead wire from connector 27 9 Shut the instrument fuel supply off at the source Disconnect the fuel line from the back of the instrument and be sure the IGN BIAS connector is re installed on the measurement interface board 10 Before installing the oven cover test the new ignitor To do this loosen the two screws on the top of the detector and lift the flame sensor thermocouple straight out of the detector top 11 Turn the main power ON and wait for the run screen to appear 12 From the Main Menu choose Diagnostics FID Status The FID Status screen appears Note Since the fuel is off the flame should not light but the ignitor pulsing should be clearly visible through the hole in the top of the detector A CAUTION Due to the possibilit
153. deds t nio en ane B 55 Value Source autocad i Cetus ne At i todo Mutin nim cd B 55 Fes decou suid Inforfabattase o eee ty s ecco etten fesses B 55 Translation Table 5oiie diei tm trt eit Pei tones B 56 Selection Table su uve ttes rid vide oq idi EUR Feo B 56 liec M B 56 Exanipless soins ee ate A eau ote eC ester E B 57 Appendix C MODBUS Prot COl enana C 1 Serial Communication Darameters seals len ba die bou eas tos C 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual xv Contents xvi Appendix D Appendix E Model 55i Instruction Manual TCP Communication Parameters eene C 2 Application Data Unit Definition uice ter tee teca edses C 2 Slave Address esatea o bulle abend a a Fu vc C 2 MBAP FIeadetuie sedens tonio an e ducc te a tetra C 2 Funcion des aca fete viestor bee ndedi efie ti Leto et e rented feto C 3 Ii cd Tec UL RE Urt tu e a C 3 Bot Check uacua coma Aquae US uid eme M D ote as C 3 PUTCO NY OES EE E deum ta TE eA eme Sede UIN CH teenies C 3 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Read Inputs 5 2 retten C 3 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers C 5 0x05 Force Write Single Coil ashes aceto te aute ti pretii C 7 MODBUS Parameters SupDbEtedua olo om ecd eoe tele C 8 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol sess D 1 Serial Communication Parameters c ccscccccssssssssssscessescssesscesseeens D 1 TCP Communication Parameters
154. des the cable color codes For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page Tes Note Table 9 2 provides the color coding for both 25 pin cables and 37 pin cables Color codes for pins 1 25 are for 25 pin cables color codes for pins 1 37 are for 37 pin cables A Table 9 1 Cable Options Description Cable Length DB37M to open end Six feet DB37F to open end Six feet DB25M to open end Six feet RS 232 Six feet Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables Pin Color Pin Color 1 BLACK 20 RED BLACK 2 BROWN 21 ORANGE BLACK 3 RED 22 YELLOW BLACK 4 ORANGE 23 GREEN BLACK 5 YELLOW 24 GRAY BLACK 6 GREEN 25 PINK BLACK 7 BLUE End color codes for 25 pin cables continue for 37 pin cables 8 VIOLET 26 PINK GREEN 9 GRAY 27 PINK RED 19 WHITE 28 PINK VIOLET 11 PINK 29 LIGHT BLUE 12 LIGHT GREEN 30 LIGHT BLUE BROWN 13 BLACK WHITE 31 LIGHT BLUE RED 14 BROWN WHITE 32 LIGHT BLUE VIOLET 15 RED WHITE 33 LIGHT BLUE BLACK 16 ORANGE WHITE 34 GRAY GREEN 17 GREEN WHITE 35 GRAY RED 18 BLUE WHITE 36 GRAY VIOLET 19 VIOLET WHITE oy LIGHT GREEN BLACK Mounting Options The analyzer can be installed in the configuration described in Table 9 3 and shown in Figure 9 1 through Figure 9 4 Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 9 3 Mounting Options Mounting Type D
155. disassembly is required make certain the instructions that follow are carefully observed A Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Disassembly Use the following procedure to disassemble the valve rotor Note All disassembly operations must be performed in a clean well lit area A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Unscrew the knurled pre load assembly Do not tamper with the preset socket adjustment screw SOCKET ADJUSTMENT SCREW PRE LOAD ASSEMBLY Figure 7 10 8 Valve Rotor Disassembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 25 Servicing 8 Port Valve Rotor Replacement 3 Engage the end of the rotor Figure 7 11 with a pencil type magnet Cycle the valve one time to break the shear seal between the rotor and the valve body T Equipment Damage Any contact between the interior of the valve body and the metal of the rotor or any tool is likely to cause damage A END OF ROTOR Figure 7 11 Valve with Pre Load Removed 4 Carefully withdraw the rotor from the valve body with the magnet Once the rotor is removed note the orientation of the rotor tab which is marked with an ID letter denoting the type of seal material Cleaning the Valve Use the following procedure to clean the valve body Body 1 Weta cotton
156. dress 1 gt lt SP gt lt measured value2 gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The response uses the same command terminators as used by the received command i e if the received command was terminated with a CR then the response is terminated with lt CR gt and if the command was terminated with a lt ETX gt lt BCCs then the response is terminated with lt ETX gt and the computed checksum lt BCC gt The 02 after the MD indicates that two measurements are present in the reply string 03 for three measurements and so on This will also determine the length of the reply string lt address gt is the Instrument Address Each subsequent measurement attached to the response will have the lt address X gt where X keeps incrementing by 1 for each measurement included lt measured value gt is the concentration value in currently selected gas units represented as exponential representation with 4 characters mantissa and 2 characters exponent each with sign Mantissa sign and 4 digits The decimal point is assumed to be after the first digit and is not transmitted Exponent sign and 2 digits Example 5384000 0 is represented as 5384 06 0 04567 is represented as 4567 02 lt status gt is formed by lt operating status gt and lt error status gt and separated by a space i e operating status SP error status Each of the two operating status and error statu
157. e The minimum and maximum slope threshold screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Crucial Settings gt Slope Threshold gt Minimum or Maximum Methane Calibration The Methane Calibration Error screen is used in determining whether a Error given calibration is valid At the end of each calibration the methane calibration factor is calculated as the ratio of span gas concentration divided by peak height If the methane calibration factor falls within the limits defined by this menu entry the calibration is considered valid Otherwise the calibration is rejected and the appropriate cal fail alarm is triggered e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Crucial Settings gt Methane Cal Error Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 81 Operation Service Menu Min and Max Methane The Minimum Methane Calibration Error screen is used to change the Calibration Error CH calibration error minimum value The minimum and maximum methane calibration error screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Crucial Settings Methane Calibration Error Minimum or Maximum Non Methane Calibration The Non Methane Calibration Error screen is used in determining whether Error a given calibration is valid At the end of each calibration the NMHC calibration factor is calculated as the ratio of span gas concentration divided by peak height If the NMHC calibration factor falls withi
158. e Chapter 3 Operation Auto Verification allows the user to improve confidence in the calibration procedure by automatically running a span check immediately after each calibration Auto verification may be set to ON or OFF by pressing When set to ON a span check is run immediately after the calibration cycle If the span check indicates a difference of greater than 2 0 96 the calibration is automatically repeated The Model 55 will make up to five attempts to achieve a repeatable calibration If Auto Verification is set to OFF no span check will be run and the calibration will be based on a single analysis cycle If the span concentration is too low it will be difficult to achieve 2 repeatability due to the limited resolution available In that case the calibration will be considered valid if the difference between two consecutive readings is less than 0 02 ppm Auto verification can avoid many common calibration errors and should usually be left ON For example an installation that uses a long sample line and introduces span gas at the end of the sample probe may require two or three analysis cycles to achieve a stable concentration of span gas In this case the automatic verification would prevent the instrument from accepting an invalid calibration caused by inadequate flushing of the sample lines The Minimum Verification Cycles screen allows the user to adjust the minimum number of verification cycles used when auto ve
159. e Main Menu choose Service Auto Range Change Use Flat Baseline The Use Flat Baseline screen allows the user to choose whether the instrument will use its normal nm baseline algorithm or just extrapolate backwards from the end of the NMHC window e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Use Flat Baseline Condition Column The Condition Column screen is used to manually initiate a column conditioning cycle This option is useful for cleaning a new column or an older column that shows signs of contamination The column conditioning routine is also useful as a burn in procedure following initial installation Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 77 Operation Service Menu Set Window Timing Methane Start End 3 78 Model 55i Instruction Manual of the 551 or after a prolonged shut down During a column conditioning cycle the valve will shift to the backflush position and the column oven base temperature will rise to 125 C The unit will then cycle the valve once each hour and will hold the high temperature for eight hours After conditioning is complete the unit will automatically set the column oven temperature back to the normal value Although it is best to run the conditioning routine for the full eight hours the cycle can be aborted at any time by pressing _ If column conditioning can not be performed the instrument will respond with PLEASE WAIT UNTIL READY e Inthe Main Menu choose
160. e changed via remote operation When the front panel is locked the user can still navigate the menu and view data instrument parameters and settings but nothing can be changed The password lock icon on the right side of the status bar indicates that the password lock is active The items visible under the Password menu are determined by the instrument s password status e Inthe Main Menu choose Password ip priori E ES E The Set Password screen is used to set the password that is used to unlock the front panel and is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is not set e In the Main Menu choose Password gt Set Password Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Password Menu Lock Instrument The Lock Instrument screen is used to lock the instrument s front panel so users cannot change any settings from the front panel The lock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password Lock Instrument Lock Unlock and If the instrument is locked via the front panel using Password gt Lock Local Remote Operation Instrument the instrument reports being in Remote mode In this mode the front panel is locked where data can be viewed settings can be viewed but not changed using the front panel interface and the remote Set commands are active If the instrument keyboard is unlocked via the front panel using Password Unlock Instrument
161. e digitized signal is sent to the interface board through a ribbon cable which also carries power for the input board and the control signals that are used to set the amplifier gain The input board includes an offset null teature and a test signal that can be activated under firmware control The test signal is injected at the first stage of the input board in parallel with the FID input This allows the input board and the connection to the processor system to be tested without using the FID The digital output board connects to the motherboard and provides relay contact outputs to a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument Ten relay contacts normally open with power off are provided which are electrically isolated from each other The I O expansion board connects to the motherboard and adds the capability to input external analog voltage signals and to output analog currents via a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument It contains local power supplies a DC DC isolator supply a sub processor and analog circuits Eight analog voltage inputs are provided with an input voltage range of 0 to 10 VDC Six current outputs are provided with a selectable operating range of either 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Model 55i Instruction Manual 8 7 System Description 1 0 Components Front Panel Connector Board 1 0 Components Analog Voltage Outputs 8 8 Model 55i Instruction Manual The front panel connector boar
162. e icra tase td Meant eae i ae d 2 5 CombuUstiomAll ia tssaotcunnstacdinieseacal icant amen 2 5 Actuator Arpa PA 2 6 RID Fuel T 2 6 Garer GaS erann i a A E AAN 2 7 Calibration Gasa 2s 2 e eo toad A RGR y 2 7 Connecting Support Gases ences intereat n then eese baee ie ho dr nean 2 8 Sample Inlebo s e naoi ento d ce taxe edel SEET 2 8 Spar Gas Connections sninen a a M UTEM R en 2 9 Sample ByPass and FID EXDaust ouo eet niin tet nh tees 2 11 Power Connection accedi adege rrced a e D Dvd ar R dus 2 12 Connecting External Devices 2525 3 Gare Sie Lo enna 2 13 Terminal Board PCB Assembliesuse tee Die stresses 2 13 VO Terminal Boards su etes eite to puoi due etu Mus 2 13 DIO Termimab BOR scent dep tete th qt et emicat ie 2 15 25 Pm Terminal Board iicet te tees 2 16 SEAT UIA M cro 2 18 Column Conditioning and Initial Burn In sss 2 19 Running West Chronratoc rats s ae heal deduc froid dst 2 19 BIAIS cae E E A EE Pans d eL cA ME 2 20 LUO Y TR 2 20 Seri EET 2 21 Chapter 3 Operation emt 3 1 yr E ES 3 1 Pushibuttonsi iiir re eee s ts rapere bara nee Adee 3 2 Soft IRV o obe leds Sea Spvad dut sette haad scing a oaar e Pleite as 3 3 Alphanumeric Entry Screens contendens ita ate ca dui ee 3 4 Firm wate Overview adeste iota ose e quete us oi aote a Lese od Oops he 3 4 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual vii Contents viii Model 55i Instructio
163. e other side This assembly provides a convenient mechanism for connecting wires from a data system to the analyzer s I O connectors The following terminal board PCB assemblies are available for Series instruments e I O terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e D O terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e 25 pin terminal board PCB assembly included with optional I O expansion board 1 0 Terminal Board Figure 2 6 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable customer supplied to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 1 identifies the connector pins and associated signals Note Not all of the I O available in the instrument is brought out on the supplied terminal board If more I O is desired an alternative means of connection is required See optional Terminal Block and Cable Kits A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 2 13 Installation Connecting External Devices See Detail 2 14 Model 55i Instruction Manual See Detail B N Assembled Connector Detail A Figure 2 6 0 Terminal Board Views Table 2 1 0 Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Detail B Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 Analog 13 Power Fail NC 2 Analog ground 14 Power Fail COM 3 Analog2 15 Power Fail NO 4 Analog ground 16 TTL Inputi 5 Analog3 17 TTL Input2 6 Analog ground 18 TTL Input3 7 A
164. e period of time set forth in the product documentation published specifications or package inserts If a period of time is not specified in Seller s product documentation published specifications or package inserts the warranty period shall be one 1 year from the date of shipment to Buyer for equipment and ninety 90 days for all other products the Warranty Period Seller agrees during the Warranty Period to repair or replace at Seller s option defective Products so as to cause the same to operate in substantial conformance with said published specifications provided that a Buyer shall promptly notify Seller in writing upon the discovery of any defect which notice shall include the product model and serial number if applicable and details of the warranty claim b after Seller s review Seller will provide Buyer with service data and or a Return Material Authorization RMA which may include biohazard decontamination procedures and other product specific handling instructions and c then if applicable Buyer may return the defective Products to Seller with all costs prepaid by Buyer Replacement parts may be new or refurbished at the election of Seller All replaced parts shall become the property of Seller Shipment to Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in accordance with the Delivery provisions of the Seller s Terms and Conditions of Sale Consumables including but not limited to lamps fuses batt
165. e stored B 25 Model 55i Instruction Manual B 9 C Link Protocol Commands Measurements Measurements B 10 Model 55i Instruction Manual Command Description Page start Starts measurement cycle B 12 stop Stops current measurement cycle B 13 stream per Reports sets current time interval for streaming data B 27 stream time Reports sets a time stamp to streaming data or not B 28 thc Reports current THC concentration B 11 thc value Reports current THC concentration B 11 time Reports sets current time 24 hour format B 40 tz Reports sets the timezone string for the network time B 47 protocol server up Simulates pressing up pushbutton B 31 zero chromatogram Reports sets whether use chromatogram option is set to on B 30 or off air pressure This command reports the current air pressure measurement in PSI The following example reports that the air pressure is 19 7 psi Send air pressure Receive air pressure 19 7 psi carrier pressure This command reports the current carrier pressure measurement in PSI The following example reports that the carrier pressure measurement is 15 6 psi Send carrier pressure Receive carrier pressure 15 6 psi fuel pressure This command reports the current fuel pressure measurement in PSI The following example reports that the fuel pressure is 28 0 psi Send fuel pressure Receive fuel pressure 28 0 psi column base temp This command reports the current colum
166. e three connectors that pass through the center of the P g partition panel that connect to the measurement interface board Remove two screws from the left side rear of the case viewed from front Remove one screw from the bottom rear of the case Remove one screw from the top front of the partition panel While holding the case securely loosen the captive screw at the rear of the measurement case assembly and pull the measurement case assembly from the rear of the case Remove the screw at the top rear of the partition panel that secures the top of the panel to the measurement case assembly and lower the panel being careful not to put excessive tension on the cables Re install the measurement case assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the pump Figure 7 4 To rebuild the pump see Pump Rebuilding in the Preventive Maintenance chapter Equipment Required Pump Philips screwdriver Wrench 7 16 inch Nut driver 1 4 inch Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pump Replacement amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the power lines from the measurement interface board 3 Disconnect the air lines from the pump
167. e zero chromatogram option is turned on or off The following example reports that the use zero chromatogram option is turned off Send zero chromatogram Receive zero chromatogram off set zero chromatogram onoff onoff on off This command sets the use zero chromatogram option to o7 or off The following example sets the use zero chromatogram option on Send set zero chromatogram on Receive set zero chromatogram on ok do zero run This command will run a zero chromatogram if the analyzer is in the proper state to do so If the unit is not in the proper state the message can t wrong settings is returned The following example reports that the unit is not in the proper state to perform a zero chromatogram Thermo Fisher Scientific Keys Display Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Keys Display Send do zero run Receive do zero run can t wrong settings push button do ri down right en ru enter run he up help 1 le 2 left 3 me 4 menu button do down en enter he help le left me menu ri right ru run up 1 2 3 4 These commands simulate pressing the front panel pushbuttons The numbers represent the front panel soft keys from left to right Send push enter Receive push enter ok isc iscreen These commands retrieve the framebuffer data used for the display on the iSeries instrument It is 19200 bytes in size 2 bits per pixel 4 pixels per byte
168. eaming data selection into the scratch B 26 pad date Reports sets current date B 38 default params Sets parameters to default values B 38 detector base temp Reports temperature at the detector base B 11 detector oven Reports sets the setpoint for the detector oven B 37 dhcp Reports sets state of use of Dynamic Host Configuration B 43 Protocol DHCP diag volt iob Reports diagnostic voltage levels for I O expansion board B 19 diag volt mb Reports diagnostic voltage levels for motherboard B 19 diag volt mib Reports diagnostic voltage levels for measurement interface B 19 board dig in Reports status of the digital inputs B 49 din Reports sets digital input channel and active state B 49 do down Simulates pressing down pushbutton B 31 do zero run Runs a zero chromatogram B 31 dout Reports sets digital output channel and active state B 50 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page dtoa Reports outputs of the digital to analog converters per B 50 channel dump run current Reports the raw chromatogram data for the most recent run B 19 dump run previous Reports the raw chromatogram data for the previous run B 19 dump zero data Reports the raw chromatogram data for the most recent zero B 19 array chromatogram run en enter Simulates pressing enter pushbutton B 31 er Returns a brief description of the mai
169. ean compressed gas gently blow any dust or particles out of the base Do not lose the aluminum seal ring in the base 5 Usinga clean air supply or other clean compressed gas blow any dust or particular out of the filter element Note If the filter cannot be cleaned adequately with air it may be cleaned with methanol or acetone in an appropriate ultrasonic bath provided it is sufficiently rinsed and dried before it is installed in the instrument Otherwise the filter should be replaced See Chapter 7 Servicing A 6 Install the cleaned filter element back into the base Note Be sure to install the filter element with the open end of the cup facing down into the base and that it is seated flat A 7 Wrap the filter housing threads with Teflon tape then replace the cap nut and tighten with the wrench If Teflon tape is not used the cap nut may become difficult to remove 8 Re install the oven cover and the instrument cover 5 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Filter Base Pump Rebuilding Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding Filter Assembly Cap Nut Figure 5 2 Cleaning the Internal Filter Element For the new technology pump repair kit part number 108002 00 use the following procedure to rebuild the pump Figure 5 3 The new technology pump will have the repair kit part number on its label If no repair kit part number is listed refer to the procedure fo
170. ec Figure 2 10 Test Chromatograms Model 55i Instruction Manual 2 21 Chapter 3 Operation This chapter describes the front panel display screens front panel pushbuttons and menu driven firmware For details see the following topics e Display on page 3 1 e Pushbuttons on page 3 2 e Firmware Overview on page 3 4 e Range Menu on page 3 8 e Calibration Parameters Menu on page 3 12 e Calibration on page 3 18 e Instrument Controls Menu on page 3 18 e Diagnostics Menu on page 3 52 e Alarms Menu on page 3 62 e Service Menu on page 3 73 e Password Menu on page 3 94 Display The 320 x 240 graphics liquid crystal display LCD shows the sample concentrations instrument parameters instrument controls help and error messages Some menus contain more items than can be displayed at one time For these menus use ft Jand J to move the cursor up and down to each item Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 1 Operation Pushbuttons gt o 3 o Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Pushbutto nS ThePushbuttons allow the user to traverse the various screens menus Figure 3 2 Front Panel Pushbuttons 3 2 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific
171. eck air and fuel pressure Check sample pressure reading in Diagnostics menu Hold mirror or chrome tool against the FID exhaust port and check for steam which indicates flame is lit Check BNC connectors at both ends Turn off power and disconnect signal cable Check for open circuit between center post and ground and also between center post and bias voltage supply If they are not open there may be a short Pump does not run Reduced response or no response to span gas Pump switched off in firmware Oven temperature too low Pump overheated Pump bearing failure Vacuum lock System failure Bias voltage has failed No gas reaching the FID Span cylinder empty Calibration system failure Check pump settings under Instrument Controls menu Depending on the pump setting the pump will not run until the detector oven temperature approaches the oven temperature set point 175 C Remove the instrument cover Under the Instrument Controls menu shut the pump off Wait 30 minutes and try to restart pump Shut off the main power and try to rotate the pump fan by hand Jamming or excess noise indicates possible bearing failure Call Thermo Fisher Scientific Service Department Shut off power and rotate the pump fan by hand Re apply power and allow time for the oven temperature to return to operating temperature Pump should start Check alarm screens and diagnostic voltage screens
172. ected occasionally for obvious visible defects CI ean in g such as loose connectors loose fittings cracked or clogged Teflon lines and excessive dust or dirt accumulation Dust and dirt can accumulate in the instrument and can cause overheating or component failure Dirt on the components prevents efficient heat dissipation and may provide conducting paths for electricity The best way to clean the inside of the instrument is to first carefully vacuum all accessible areas and then blow away the remaining dust with low pressure compressed air Use a soft paint brush or cloth to remove stubborn dirt Fan Filter Inspection Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the fan filter Figure 5 1 and Cleaning 1 Remove the fan guard from the fan by unsnapping it No tools are required DO NOT remove the four mounting screws 2 Flush the filter with warm water and let dry a clean oil free air purge will help the drying process or gently blow the filter clean with compressed air 3 Re install the filter and fan guard amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A 5 2 Model 55 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Internal Sample Filter Cleaning A Thermo Fisher Scie
173. ecting a non methane range of 0 200 ppm sets the analog output to concentrations between 0 and 200 ppm Available ranges include 0 20 0 200 and 0 2000 with a medium sample loop The display shows the current non methane range The next line of the display is used to change the range e Inthe Main Menu choose Range NMHC Range 3 10 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Menu The analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 4 See Table 3 3 for channels and pin connections 0000000000000000 00 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector Table 3 3 Default Analog Outputs Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 Raw Signal 2 33 3 Methane 3 5 5 NMHC 4 34 7 THC 5 17 g None 6 36 11 None Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 11 Operation Calibration Parameters Menu Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A Calibration The Calibration Parameters menu is used to adjust operating parameters Parameters Menu that relate to instrument calibration Once the calibration method has been established the actual calibration procedure can be triggered automatically e Inthe Mai
174. ed connect the span gas cylinder to the port labeled CALIBRATION GAS IN and adjust the cylinder pressure to 10 to 15 psi Internally the CALIBRATION GAS IN port is connected to the CALIBRATION GAS OUT port through a two way solenoid valve and a flow restrictor The CALIBRATION GAS OUT port must be connected to the sample probe or sample line outside the instrument using a tee fitting and check valve or some other similar arrangement As a general rule the span gas should be introduced in a manner that simulates the sample inlet as closely as possible For example if a long sample line is being used the span gas should be introduced at the end of the sample line near the probe rather than close to the instrument Model 55i Instruction Manual 2 9 Installation Connecting Support Gases Note During the initial calibration the flow rate of the span gas must be monitored and the pressure regulator adjusted to provide slightly more flow than the instrument pump normally draws in A Some examples of acceptable sampling arrangements are presented in Figure 2 4 and Figure 2 5 If you are unsure about the correct configuration for your installation contact the service department for recommendations FLOW METER EXTERNAL BACK PRESSURE BUMP VENT REGULATOR ye a a SAMPLE INLET CHECK VALVE 1 PSI i E 15 PSI INPUT SAMPLE IN PORT BY PASS SPAN OUT PORT PRESSURE
175. ed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Netmask EDEIZE Pria The Default Gateway screen is used to edit the gateway address The default gateway can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above Any traffic to addresses that are not on the local subnet will be routed through this address e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Gateway The Host Name screen is used to edit the host name When DHCP is enabled this name is reported to the DHCP server e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings T CP IP Settings Host Name Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 37 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol NTP Server screen is used to edit the IP Server address of the NTP server An NTP server may be used to periodically synchronize the instrument s real time clock with a standard More information about the NTP servers and a list of public servers may be found at http www ntp org e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settin
176. eive SMAN 1 SREM KO This command sets the instrument to remote mode The following example sets the instrument to remote mode if the instrument has been set to allow remote mode changes Send SREM KO Receive SREM 2 SAMC KO y This command sets the unit to y where y is either 1 accept or 0 reject remote mode changes according to Table E 11 The following example sets the instrument to accept remote mode changes Send SAMC KO 1 Receive SAMC O Table E 11 Remote Values y Description Reject remote mode change 1 Accept remote mode change E 10 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific
177. el 55i Instruction Manual 7 39 Servicing Valve Actuator Repair Equipment Required Valve O ring replacement kit or Valve actuator replacement Wrench open end 3 8 inch Hex wrench set Screwdriver 3 16 inch Fine pointed pick or other tool for removing O rings Silicone lubricant Lint free tissues and a clean shop rag f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Disassembly Use the following procedure to disassemble the valve actuator 1 With the instrument power on go to the Manual Operation Menu and place the valve in the backflush position 2 Disconnect the air lines from the actuator using the 3 8 inch wrench 3 Use the 9 64 inch hex driver to loosen the socket head screw in the black anodized clamp ring on the actuator Gently slide the actuator off of the standoff Using the same hex driver remove the two screws holding the clamp ring onto the actuator see Figure 7 15 HWSC SC8 10B STANDOFF HWSC SC8 6 Figure 7 16 Removal of a Valve on a Standoff 7 40 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Valve Actuator Repair 4 Use the 9 64 inch hex driver to remove the three O ring screws see Figure 7 17 some models have slotted screws here enn ema p RT O RING FEMALE CYLINDER SUBASSEMBLY MALE SCREWS END CAP END CAP Figure
178. elow Note the optional I O Expansion Board must be installed to use analog outputs e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Select Content select Field Analog Inputs Commit Content The Commit Content screen is used to save any changes that have been made to any of the record fields for the selected record type Saving changes Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 27 Operation Instrument Controls Menu will erase record log file data for that record type If no changes have been made NO CHANGES TO RECORD LIST will appear For more information about selecting the content of logged data fields see Sclect Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Commit Content erat at s USP CIL pr a4 RENO Pa Tite DH kobe ned i i RS id Mie PPh EEE E Reset to Default Content The Reset to Default Content screen is used to reset all of the datalogging field items to default values for the selected record type For more information about selecting the content of logged data fields see Select Content above e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Reset to Default Content ROUSE IBMZCT DI USE ILL oe PPLOGI SCA REIT ATC DH CEgEM LI Pe i iri l PE Configure Datalogging The Configure Datalogging menu deals with datalogging configuration for the curre
179. ent Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect all the power supply electrical connections Note connector locations to facilitate re connection Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 15 Servicing Analog Output Testing Analog Output Testing 7 16 Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 Loosen the captive screw securing the power supply to the chassis plate and shift the power supply slightly toward the rear panel then lift out the power supply Power Supply q Retaining Screws 4 BOTTOM VIEW Captive Screw Figure 7 7 Replacing the DC Power Supply 4 Remove the four screws holding the mounting bracket to the power supply Note orientation of the power supply on the mounting bracket to facilitate remounting 5 To install the DC power supply follow the previous steps in reverse The analog outputs should be tested if the concentration value on the front panel display disagrees with the analog outputs To check the analog outputs connect a meter to an analog output channel voltage or current and compare the meter reading with the output value set on the Test Analog Outputs screen Equipment Required Multimeter Use the following procedure to test the analog outputs 1 Connect a me
180. eplacement Fuel Calibraion Solenoid Valve Replacement A 8 Port Valve Rotor Replacement 7 24 Model 55i Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to replace the fuel or calibration solenoid valve Equipment Required 2 Way solenoid valve assembly Wrench 1 2 inch Wrench 9 16 inch Wrench 5 8 inch Wrench 7 16 inch Teflon pipe thread tape Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Disconnect the solenoid from the measurement interface board Note electrical connections to facitate re connection 2 Remove the attached tubing from the solenoid valve 3 Remove the solenoid valve assembly from the back panel and remove the fittings from the valve body Note the orientation of the fittings before removing them from the solenoid valve 4 Remove and replace the old Teflon pipe thread tape from the fittings 5 To install the new solenoid valve follow the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the 8 port valve rotor Figure 7 10 Equipment Required Valve rotor repair kit Pencil magnet Needle nose pliers Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing 8 Port Valve Rotor Replacement Equipment Damage Do not disassemble the valve unless the system malfunction is definitely isolated to the valve perform all other system checks first If
181. equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Remove the instrument cover 2 Tape the thermometer to the thermistor which is plugged into the measurement interface board Figure 7 9 Note Since the thermistors are interchangeable to an accuracy of 0 2 C and have a value of 10 K ohms at 25 C an alternate procedure is to connect an accurately known 10 K resistor to the thermistor input AMB TEMD on the measurement interface board and enter the temperature reading A A 1 C change corresponds to a 5 change in resistance thus this alternative procedure can be quite accurate as a check however it clearly is not NIST traceable A 3 From the Main Menu choose Service Temperature Calibration The Calibrate Ambient Temp screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 4 Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize use Jand f to enter the known temperature and P press to save the temperature value 5 Install the cover Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 23 Servicing Fuel Calibraion Solenoid Valve R
182. equivalents A response factor is a multiplier that adjusts the instrument reading according to an experimentally determined relationship between the calibration gas and the compound being sampled If a response factor will be used it can be entered under the Instrument Controls menu and will be automatically applied to the instrument reading Note The response factor is only applied to the non methane concentration A As described above the instrument is normally calibrated with a single gas mixture containing methane and a non methane hydrocarbon in air The span gas concentrations should be similar to the concentrations expected in the actual sample For example a good span gas for use in a typical ambient air application would contain about 2 ppm of methane and 1 to 2 ppm of propane in air For other applications the methane and NMHC concentrations should be adjusted as needed However to avoid possible interference from oxygen the methane span concentration should never be less than about 1 5 ppm NMHC concentrations may be as low as needed But to maintain good calibration repeatability the concentration should generally be above 0 5 ppm The possibility of stability problems at extremely low concentrations should also be discussed with the gas supplier In some cases it may be appropriate to use nitrogen rather than air as the balance gas if this will improve the gas stability Because the instrument s response is linea
183. er Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description SPARE DATA J4 CO N C wo A CO N 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground RS485 to Spare Board RS485 to Spare Board 0 J5 o CO N oon A CO N N ce N N a N N a co co N o O1 A 99 N BR M PPY HBO n M N C a A Co N gt Q Power Fail Relay N C Contact Ground TTL Input 1 TTL Input 2 Ground TTL Input 5 TTL Input 7 TTL Input 8 TTL Input 10 Ground TTL Input 13 TTL Input 15 Ground Analog Voltage Output 1 Analog Voltage Output 3 Ground Analog Voltage Output 5 Ground Ground Power Fail Relay COM Power Fail Relay N O Contact Ground TTL Input 3 TTL Input 4 TTL Input 6 Ground Model 55i Instruction Manual 6 11 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator 27 TTL Input 9 28 TTL Input 11 29 TTL Input 12 30 TTL Input 14 31 TTL Input 16 32 Ground 33 Analog Voltage Output 2 34 Analog Voltage Output 4 35 Ground 36 Analog Voltage Output 6 37 Ground SER EN J7 Serial Enable Jumper 2 3 3V 24V IN J10 24V 2 Ground DIGITAL OUTPUT J14 5V 2 24V 3 24V 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Ground 7 SPI Reset 8 SPI Input 9 SPI Output 10 SPI Board Select 11 SPI Clock EXT RS485 J15 1 RS485 to Rear Panel 2 RS485 to Rear Panel 3 5V 4
184. erature in Kelvin according to Table E 10 The following example sets the detector oven setpoint to 443 K 170 C Send ESOL K1 443 Receive ESOL O Table E 10 Oven Temperature Values Temperature Description 1 Detector Base 2 Column Base ESYZ K1 bhmmss hh hours mm minutes ss seconds This command sets the internal clock 24 hour format The following example sets the internal time to 14 57 00 Send ESYZ K1 145700 Receive ESYZ O ESYZ K2 mmddyy mm month dd day yy year This command sets the date of the analyzer s internal clock The following example sets the date to December 1 2006 Send ESYZ K2 120106 Receive ESYZ O AKEN KO This command returns the instrument identification string The following example returns the current setting of the instrument ID Send AKEN KO Receive AKEN O 55i Model 55i Instruction Manual E 9 AK Protocol Commands Communications Configuration EKEN KO ssssssss This command sets the instrument identification string to ssssssss where ssssssss can be up to 40 characters long The string is free form and can contain spaces Longer strings will be truncated The following example shows the instrument ID changed to 557 Send AKEN KO 55i Receive AKEN O SMAN KO This command sets the instrument to manual mode The following example sets the instrument to manual mode if the instrument has been set to allow remote mode changes Send SMAN KO Rec
185. eries bulbs and other such expendable items are expressly excluded from the warranty under this warranty Notwithstanding the foregoing Products supplied by Seller that are obtained by Seller from an original manufacturer or third party supplier are not warranted by Seller but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty rights in such Product that Seller may have from the original manufacturer or third party supplier to the extent such assignment is allowed by such original manufacturer or third party supplier In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs replacements or corrections required in whole or in part as the result of i normal wear and tear ii accident disaster or event of force majeure iii misuse fault or negligence of or by Buyer iv use of the Products in a manner for which Model 55i Instruction Manual A 1 Warranty Warranty they were not designed v causes external to the Products such as but not limited to power failure or electrical power surges vi improper storage and handling of the Products or vii use of the Products in combination with equipment or software not supplied by Seller If Seller determines that Products for which Buyer has requested warranty services are not covered by the warranty hereunder Buyer shall pay or reimburse Seller for all costs of investigating and responding to such request at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates If Seller provides repair
186. ero or reset to normal Full scale sets the analog outputs to the full scale voltage zero sets the analog outputs to 0 volts and reset returns the output to normal operation The analog outputs are returned to normal operation upon exiting this screen The following example shows the screen when all analog outputs are set to normal operating mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs gt ALL Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 Instrument Configuration The Instrument Configuration screen displays information on the hardware configuration of the instrument Note If the analyzer is in service mode pressing will toggle the setting for the selected item Auto calibration needs to be set to YES in order to do zero and span calibration resets The instrument must be power cycled after making a change to the instrument configuration for the new configuration to become fully active A e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Instrument Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 61 Operation Alarms Menu Contact Information Alarms Menu 3 62 Model 55i Instruction Manual o PIRDSPUPMSP O The Contact Information screen displays the customer service information e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Contact Information The Alarms menu displays a list of items that are monitored by the analyzer If the item being monitored goes outside the lower
187. es that are supported by the Model 55i Read Coils Inputs read the status of the digital outputs relays in the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These requests specify the starting address i e the address of the first output specified and the number of outputs The outputs are addressed starting at zero Therefore outputs numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 Model 55i Instruction Manual C 3 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual The outputs in the response message are packed as one per bit of the data field Status is indicated as 1 Active on and 0 Inactive off The LSB of the first data byte contains the output addressed in the query The other outputs follow toward the high end of this byte and from low order to high order in subsequent bytes If the returned output quantity is not a multiple of eight the remaining bits in the final data byte will be padded with zeros toward the high order end of the byte The Byte Count field specifies the quantity of complete bytes of data Note The values reported may not reflect the state of the actual relays in the instrument as the user may program these outputs for either active closed or open A Request Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Quantity of Outputs 2 Bytes 1 to maximum allowed by instrument Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 t
188. escription Bench Positioned on bench includes mounting feet and front panel side trim handles EIA rack Mounted in an EIA style rack includes mounting slides and front panel ElA rack mounting handles Retrofit rack Mounted in an EIA style rack includes mounting slides and front panel EIA rack mounting handles This configuration is intended for direct replacement of a C series instrument in an existing rack The rail mounting location is lower on the case and the front mounting screw slots are in non standard EIA locations Model 55i Instruction Manual 9 3 Optional Equipment Mounting Options 16 75 REF Figure 9 1 Bench Mounting 9 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options Figure 9 2 EIA Rack Mounting Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55 Instruction Manual 9 5 Optional Equipment Mounting Options Figure 9 3 Retrofit Rack Mounting 9 6 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options Figure 9 4 Rack Mount Option Assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 9 7 Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix A Warranty Seller warrants that the Products will operate or perform substantially in conformance with Seller s published specifications and be free from defects in material and workmanship when subjected to normal proper and intended usage by properly trained personnel for th
189. ethane calibration gas concentration in single span gas mode The next line of the display is where the span gas concentration is entered Press to save the new non methane calibration gas concentration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters gt Gas Concentrations gt NMHC Auto Calibration The Auto Calibration Setup menu is used for setting the automatic Setup calibration check options e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters gt Auto Calibration Setup Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 13 Operation Calibration Parameters Menu Pike EE EE Calibration Mode The Calibration Mode screen is used to switch between the various auto calibration modes The list of choices include Off no automatic calibration or check will be performed By Run define number of normal runs between calibrations or By Time calibrations performed after a specified duration starting at a specified time e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters Auto Calibration Setup Cal Mode Settings The Settings submenu is used for setting the auto calibration check parameters Number of runs is only present if calibration mode is BY RUN or OFF Initial time and period are only present if calibration mode is BY TIME or OFF e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters Auto Calibration Setup Settings Number of Runs The Number of Runs screen is used to adjust the number of r
190. evious steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the analog current outputs and analog voltage inputs as defined earlier in this chapter Motherboard Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Figure 7 25 Replacing the 1 0 Expansion Board Optional 0 Expansion Board Motherboard Digital Output Board Figure 7 26 Rear Panel Board Connectors Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 55 Servicing Digital Output Board Replacement Digital Output Board Replacement N Motherboard Replacement 7 56 Model 55i Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to replace the digital output board Figure 7 25 Equipment Required Digital output board Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement procedure in this chapter Disconnect the digital output board ribbon cable from the motherboard Using the nut driver remove the two standoffs securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 26 Pop the digital output board off of the mounting studs and remove the board To install the digital output board f
191. following example sets the fuel control pressure to 15 psi Send set fuel control pressure 1 0 15 000 Receive set fuel control pressure 1 0 15 000 ok column oven This command reports the current setpoint for the column oven The following example shows that the column oven setpoint is set to 78 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration Send column oven Receive column oven 78 set column oven value This command sets the column oven setpoint to value where value is a floating point number representing the column oven setpoint The following example sets the column oven setpoint to 75 Send set column oven setpoint 75 Receive set column oven setpoint 75 ok detector oven This command reports the current setpoint for the detector oven The following example shows that the detector oven setpoint is set to 175 Send detector oven Receive detector oven 175 set detector oven value This command sets the detector oven setpoint to value where value is a floating point number representing the detector oven setpoint The following example sets the detector oven setpoint to 150 Send set detector oven setpoint 150 Receive set detector oven setpoint 150 ok contrast This command reports the LCD screen s level of contrast The following example shows the screen contrast is 50 according to Table B 8 Send contrast Receive contrast 10 50 set contrast le
192. four screws holding the upper detector base to the lower detector base 10 Disconnect the ignitor grounding wire from the detector base 11 Lift the detector assembly straight up about 1 4 inch and slide it off to the side to allow the signal pogo and bias pogo to clear the oven bulkhead Note Use caution not to damage the Teflon loose located on the under side of the upper detector mounting base A 12 Continue with the rebuild procedure in this chapter 13 Once the detector unit is re assembled it can be re installed using the previous steps in reverse and observing all cautionary procedures to avoid assembly damage Hame Thermocouple Upper Detector Base Signal Pogo Lower Detector Upper Detector Base Base Mounting Screws 4 Figure 7 14 Removing the Detector Bias Pogo Detector This section provides the equipment and instructions for rebuilding the Rebuil ding detector assembly as shown in Figure 7 15 A part number and drawing reference for the detector assembly is provided in Table 7 6 It is necessary Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 33 Servicing Detector Rebuilding 7 34 Model 55i Instruction Manual to remove the detector from the instrument as a complete unit before service Refer to the Removing the Detector procedure in this chapter The detector rebuild kit contains one set of high temperature O rings six O rings per set 4 in the detector and 2 bel
193. gs gt TCP IP Settings gt NTP Svr 1 0 Configuration The I O Configuration menu deals with configuration of the analyzer s I O system The analog input configuration is displayed only if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration EE EINE Output Relay Settings The Output Relay Settings menu displays a list of the 10 digital output relays available and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected 3 38 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Note The digital outputs may take up to one second after the assigned state occurs to show up on the outputs A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings Logic State The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital output pin and ground is normally open and closes to trigger the digital output action e Press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or normally closed EH hid Pin Pari Instrument State The Instrument State submenu allows the user to select the instrument state that is assigned to the selected relay output A submenu lists signal types of either alarms or non alarm to choose
194. gt Set Oven Temperatures DH ouod FiLBSGgUPPI The Set Detector Oven Temperature screen allows the user to set the detector oven temperature The permitted range for the detector oven is 100 to 200 C with a default of 175 C Note Temperatures are set at the factory and should not be arbitrarily changed A Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A Thermo Fisher Scientific Column Oven Temperature Manual Fuel Valve Thermo Fisher Scientific Bypass Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Set Oven Temperatures gt Detector Oven EN DHOBM PFLPPPI The Set Column Oven Temperature screen allows the user to set the oven temperature The permitted range for the column oven is 50 to 150 C with a default of 75 C Note Temperatures are set at the factory and should not be arbitrarily changed A Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Set Oven Temperatures gt Column Oven The Manual Fuel Valve Bypass screen allows the user to open the fuel valve manually overriding automatic operation Manual operation will terminate after five minutes for safety purposes Toggle Solenoid appears only if Bypass is ON Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Manual Fue
195. gure 7 20 One of the flats on the drive shaft will line up with a line drawn between two of the holes in the O ring plate as shown in Figure 7 22 Slide the subassembly onto the pins of the male end cap with this flat lined up with the air inlet on the end cap 4 Install the cylinder sliding it over the subassembly and pressing the male endcap into it 5 Place the washers and bearing in the female end cap The thin washer goes in first as in Figure 7 20 Press the endcap into the cylinder making sure the air inlet hole is in the same orientation as the one in the male end cap 6 Install the three O ring screws 7 Replace the valve mounting hardware and air supply lines Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 43 Servicing Valve Actuator Repair 7 44 Rebuilding the Subassembly Model 55i Instruction Manual 8 Apply air pressure to the actuator inlet nearest to the valve so that the actuator will be in the same position it was in when it was removed Figure 7 22 O Ring Plate Orientation 9 Slide the actuator onto the standoff making sure that the square hole in the end of the standoff drive shaft is fully engaged by the square of the actuator drive shaft Tighten the clamp ring screw 10 Check the alignment of the valve and adjust if needed see Valve Alignment in this section This section will be unnecessary but just in case the subassembly fell apart somewhere along the line here is how to get it b
196. h a blanking plate Pressurized zero air must be plumbed to the calibration inlet if present or the sample inlet carrier inlet FID fuel inlet and FID air inlet ports The air supply pressure should be set to 10 psig and the readings on the screen should be Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 89 Operation Service Menu recorded then the air should be cut off using a pinch off valve and new readings should be recorded after on minute None of the pressures should drop by more than 1 0 psig over this one minute interval Note The flame must not be lit when performing a leak test A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Leak Test Press 9 to leave warning screen and start test Analog Output Calibration The Analog Output Calibration menu provides access to the 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels for calibration Current channels are visible only if the I O expansion board option is installed Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal 3 90 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu EP DHOBM PLI EUs ETE CELL Analog Output Calibrate The Analog Output Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the Zero zero state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a meter to the output and adjust the output until it reads 0 0 V on the meter for a voltage
197. hat its orientation can be checked and go on with Step 2 of the assembly procedure The Model 55 supplies air to the valve in three second bursts For accurate valve alignment a temporary method of supplying continuous air pressure to the selected air inlet must be devised Equipment Required Hex driver 9 64 inch Wrench open end 7 16 It is important to note that the actuator drives only the rotor within the valve body via the standoff driveshaft The valve body remains stationary with respect to the actuator To check alignment cycle the actuator from one position to the other and observe the location of the rotor pin see Figure 7 24 The rotor pin should come to rest against both sides of the cutout in the valve body Re alignment is needed if it does not END OF ROTOR PIN CUTOUT IN EITHER POSITION ADJUST ALIGNMENT ADJUST STROKE PROPER ALIGNMENT Figure 7 24 Visual Check of Alignment Rotor Pin Shown in Both Positions Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing General Electrical Testing Alignment Use the following procedure for accurate valve alignment 1 Actuate the valve to the position in which the rotor pin is against the stop 2 With the 9 64 inch hex driver slightly loosen the screw in the clamp ring on the actuator body allowing the actuator to complete its travel The actuator may rotate a few degrees 3 Tighten the clamp ring screw and cycle the actuator to the other position The pin should now come
198. he Check bypass or atmospheric pressure vent to stabilize calibration gas is verify that the zero air system is providing more inadequate or too flow than the instrument is drawing but not high pressurizing the inlet Instrument is not Check pressure readings on the Diagnostics drawing inspangas screen Window timing is Check the window timing in the Service menu improperly set Span Drift Line voltage Check to see if line voltage is within fluctuations Unstable span source Pressure carrier gas is unstable Fuel and or air supply pressure unstable specifications Verify span source pressure is stable if not replace source gases Check pressure in Diagnostic screen Check pressure in Diagnostic screen Excessive Noise Defective input board or BNC connection Identify defective component and replace Model 55i Instruction Manual 6 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Noise pick up by recorder or data logger Unstable bias voltage Check analog output cable shielding and grounding Try to localize source of noise by comparing analog signal to data collected through RS 232 or Ethernet Check bias voltage in Diagnostic screen Non linear response Leak in sample line Leak within the analyzer Problem with input board range switching Check for sample dilution Check for loose fittings in analyzer Extinguish the flame turn off fuel supply Go to Input Frequency Di
199. he following example shows that the current fuel type is hydrogen Send fuel type Receive fuel type HYDROGEN set fuel type value This command sets the fuel type to value where value is either hydrogen or mixed The following example sets the fuel type to mixed Send set fuel type mixed Receive set fuel type mixed ok idle This command reports whether the instrument idle is on or off The following example shows that the instrument idle is on Send idle Receive idle on set idle onoff onoff on off This command sets the instrument idle to o7 or off The following example turns the instrument idle off Send set idle off Receive set idle off ok set ignite flame This command will set the instrument to attempt to light the FID flame Send set ignite flame Receive set ignite flame ok pump This command reports the status of the pump The following example reports that the pump is always on Send pump Receive pump pump on always Model 55i Instruction Manual B 39 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Communications Configuration B 40 Model 55i Instruction Manual set pump off always set pump on always set pump on when hot These commands set the pump to always off always on or on when hot The following example sets the pump to turn on when hot Send set pump on when hot Receive set pump on when hot ok save set save params These commands store all current parameters
200. he gateway address from a DHCP server When DHCP is set to off the instrument gets these addresses from system memory The following example sets the DHCP service to on Note If DHCP is changed from on to off and then the IP address the netmask address or the gateway address is changed you must cycle power to the instrument before the change takes effect Until you cycle the power the address assigned by the DHCP server will still be used and reported as the current address A Send set dhcp on Receive set dhcp on ok format This command reports the current reply termination format The following example shows that the reply format is 00 which means reply with no checksum according to Table B 9 Send format Receive format 00 set format format This command sets the reply termination format where format is set according to Table B 9 The following example sets the reply termination format to checksum Send set format 01 Receive set format 01 ok Model 55i Instruction Manual B 43 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 44 Model 55i Instruction Manual Table B 9 Reply Termination Formats Format Reply Termination 00 CR 01 NL sum xxxx CR where xxxx 4 hexadecimal digits that represent the sum of all the characters bytes in the message host name This command reports the host name string The following example reports the host name is set to Series This command returns
201. he precision specifier which now becomes a field number This is useful when formatting for example numbers which have varying precision depending on the mode of the instrument Binary numbers can also have an optional precision specifier which is used to determine how many bits to print For example the specifier b4 will print the lowest four bits of the parsed number There are serious restrictions on where an s field may appear currently sources 1 and 2 must be s and no others may be s The value source is followed by optional alarm information indicated by a commercial at sign with a source indicator and a starting bit indicator All alarm information is presumed to be two bits long low and high The bitfield extraction is performed on the integer part of the source Typical alarm information would appear as 6 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual B 55 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Translation Table Then there appears an optional translation table within braces This is a string of words separated by spaces An example translation table would be Code_0 Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 The value once extracted is used as a zero based index into the translation table to determine the string to display Selection Table Then there appears an optional selection table within parentheses This is a string of numbers separated by spaces 0 1 The selection table lists the translation tab
202. he span gas concentrations for the methane and non methane channels Concentrations may be entered in parts per million by volume ppm or in parts per million carbon ppmc Concentration values are edited using the arrow keys The cursor is moved using the left and right arrows and the highlighted digit is incremented or decremented using the up and down arrow keys The decimal point may be moved by locating the cursor in the desired position and then using the arrow keys to change the digit to one less than 0 or to 1 more than 9 Once the display has been adjusted press to lock in the new value If a mixed span gas containing both methane and a non methane hydrocarbon is not available a value of zero may be entered for one channel In that case the channel set to 0 0 will not be adjusted during subsequent calibrations The instrument may be configured for one span gas or three via the DIAGNOSTICS INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION menu If three span gases are configured it is the user s responsibility to provide the correct span gas to the span or sample port of the instrument at the proper time The Auto Calibration Setup option allows the user to determine whether the instrument will perform automatic calibrations and how they will be scheduled The options for automatic calibration mode are OFF which disables automatic calibration feature BY RUN which allow the user to specify the number of analytical cycles between calibrations and
203. he user to set the input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 0 00 to 10 50 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of measure e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt select Point gt Volts Ehhe fiii i The User Value screen allows the user to set the output value for the corresponding input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 9999999 to 99999999 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of measure e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt select Point gt User Value Thermo Fisher Scientific Screen Contrast Service Mode Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Screen Contrast screen is used to change the contrast of the display Intensities between 0 and 10096 in increments of 5 are available Changing the screen contrast may be necessary if the instrument is operated at extreme temperatures Note The optimal contrast will change with changes in temperature A Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD to another If the LCD is replaced the contrast may need to be reset A
204. head 4 Loosen and release the four screws holding the pump mounting plate to the floor 5 Remove the two screws holding the pump to the mounting plate 6 Install the new pump by following the previous steps in reverse Pump Bracket Floor Plate Pump Mounting Screws 2 Bottom Figure 7 4 Replacing the Pump Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 11 Servicing Fan Filter Replacement Fan Filter Replacement A 7 12 Model 55i Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to replace the fan and the fan filter Figure 7 Equipment Required Fan Fan filter Philips screwdriver Cable cutter for tie wrap removal Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Remove the fan guard and filter from the fan by unsnapping it If the fan is not being replaced install the new filter and snap it back into place and skip the remaining steps Disconnect the fan power cable from the measurement interface board Remove the four fan mounting screws and remove the fan Do not lose the four nuts Install a new fan following the previous steps in reverse order Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Input Board Replacement E A Mounting Screws 4 Fan Guard Filter
205. her Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 5 7 Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding 5 8 Model 55i Instruction Manual For older models repair kit part number 8606 use the following procedure to rebuild the pump Figure 5 4 To replace the pump see Pump Replacement in the Servicing chapter 1 Turn the intrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Loosen the fittings and remove both lines going to the pump 3 Loosen the four screws holding the pump plate to the floor of the instrument Unplug the pump power connector from the measurement interface board and remove the pump assembly from the instrument 4 Remove the four screws from the top plate remove top plate flapper valve and bottom plate 5 Remove the clamping disc with the needle nose pliers holding the diaphragm and Teflon protection wafer onto the clamping rod Remove both diaphragm and Teflon wafer 6 Assemble the pump by following the above procedure in reverse making sure not to over tighten clamping disc and to have the Teflon side of the diaphragm facing up and that the flapper valves cover the holes of the top and bottom plate 7 Check that the flow from the pump exhaust is 1 LPM with the pump inlet open to the air Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding Top Plate Diaphragm Figure 5 4 Rebuilding the Pump Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 5 9 Safety Precautio
206. hermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to the highest range value for the installed sample loop The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value If the concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Methane Conc Min and Max Methane The Minimum Methane Concentration alarm limit screen is used to Concentration Limits change the minimum CH concentration alarm limit The minimum and maximum methane concentration alarm limit screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Methane Conc Min or Max Min Trigger The Minimum Trigger screen allows the user to view and set the minimum CH concentration alarm trigger type to either floor or ceiling The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Methane Conc Min Trigger Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 71 Operation Alarms Menu Non Methane The Non
207. hermo Fisher Scientific Text Value String Value Source Alarm Information Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition The button when pressed triggers input from either a dialog box or a selection list There are five kinds of buttons B I L T and N Each line in the layout string corresponds to one line on the display The layout string describes each of the three major fields as well as translation mechanisms and corresponding commands The first field in the layout string is the text It is delimited by a The string up to the first will be read and inserted in the text field of the line This is followed by a possible string enclosed in quotes that is used to place a string into the value field The value source which is the item or word number in the DATA EREC response appears next This is followed by an optional bitfield designator The datum identified by the value source can be printed as a string s hexadecimal x decimal d floating point f or binary b number Typically bitfield extractions are only done for decimal or hexadecimal numbers Floating point numbers can be followed with an optional precision specifier which will be used as an argument to printf s f format for example a field of 4 would be translated into the printf command of 3f Alternately the special character can precede the precision specifier this causes an indirection on t
208. hermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Alarm Detector Temp Alarm Filter Temp Alarm Column Temp Alarm Flame Out Failed heater or sensor Gas supply failure Check temperatures in diagnostic screen Check heaters for open or short circuits Check thermocouples for open or short circuits Check gas pressures Alarm Carrier Pressure is outside Check gas supply pressure Pressure alarm window Check plumbing for leaks Alarm Fuel Pressure Verify pressure controller output pressure is Alarm Air Pressure present Diagnostic menu Alarm CH4 Overrange Sample conc Increase CH4 range setting exceeds range Alarm NMHC Overrange Sample conc exceeds range Increase NMHC range setting Alarm Data Integrity Run Data error s Call Thermo Fisher Scientific Service Department Alarm Bias Voltage Circuit failure Check voltages in Diagnostics Alarm Heater Fail Check heaters Refer to General Electrical Testing in the Servicing chapter Alarm Temp Sensor Fail Check temperature sensors Refer to General Electrical Testing in the Servicing chapter Alarm CH4 Span Check Alarm NMHC Span Check Span value exceeds offset Re calibrate or shift offset Alarm Window Sanity Window timing incorrect In Service Mode modify window timing Alarm CH4 Cal Fail A
209. ic instruments the accuracy of the measurements depends on proper calibration In general terms calibration also called standardization is the process that establishes the relationship between the detector s output signal and the parameter the operator is attempting to measure When organic compounds in the carrier gas stream enter the instrument s detector organic molecules are ionized by the hydrogen air flame This ionization process causes an electrical current to flow between two electrodes located in the detector The magnitude of the current flow can be measured and is directly related to the concentration of organic compounds in the sample Calibration allows the electrical current measured in pico amps to be related to a gas or vapor concentration which is usually expressed in parts per million ppm by volume Because signal intensity can be affected by operating parameters such as fuel type fuel flow or detector temperature a permanent calibration cannot be established and the instrument must be calibrated on a routine basis Calibration is best achieved using gas mixtures that are similar to the unknown sample being measured and ideally should be conducted under conditions that are similar to the actual operating conditions While multi point calibration is usually the most precise method the model 55 like most field instruments relies on a simpler two point calibration that utilizes a zero and a span The calibration is
210. ical connection needed for start up of the Model 55 is the power cord which plugs into a receptacle on the rear panel Figure 2 2 Before the power cord is connected be sure that the front panel power switch is off WARNING The Model 55i is supplied with a three wire grounded power cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A For detailed information about connecting to the instrument refer to Connecting External Devices on page 2 13 Instrument Controls Menu on page 3 18 I O Configuration on page 3 38 Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 10 Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9 1 For detailed information about troubleshooting a connection refer to Analog Output Testing on page 7 16 Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices Connecting Several components are available for connecting external devices to iSeries External Devices instruments These connection options include e Individual terminal board PCB assemblies standard e Terminal block and cable kits optional e Individual cables optional For detailed information on the optional connection components refer to the Optional Equipment chapter For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 Terminal Board PCB The terminal board PCB assemblies are circuit boards with a D Sub Assemblies connector on one side and a series of screw terminals on th
211. ignal strength As the fuel pressure is increased the concentration readings will increase along a curve to reach a peak value then begin to decay toward zero with any additional increases in pressure The fuel pressure will be considered optimized when the concentration reading reaches the peak level Adjust the pressure up through the peak value and then reduce back to the peak value Record the peak pressure value and go to step 4 From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Gas Pressures gt Air Run At the Set Pressure screen increase the pressure by 1 0 psi increments beginning from the initial stored value Observe the THC concentration reading at the top of the front panel display Notice an increase in the reported concentration level which directly corresponds to an increase in signal strength As the air pressure is increased the concentration readings will increase along a curve to reach a plateau where any additional increase in pressure will result in a negligible increase in concentration The air pressure pressure is optimized when this plateau is reached Re calibrate the instrument prior to recording any permanent data Once the calibration is complete there should be no need to repeat this procedure All new pressure settings should be recorded for future reference Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 53 Servicing Fuse Replacement Fuse Replacement 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Replacement 7 54 Model 55i In
212. ill attempt to light the FID If ignition fails the fuel will be shut off and the front screen will prompt the user to press to try again During the ignition cycle check the fuel pressure and if necessary adjust to match the value shown on the factory test sheet Thermo Fisher Scientific Column Conditioning and Initial Burn In Running Test Chromatograms Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Column Conditioning and Initial Burn In 5 If the pump is currently off turn it on using the pump settings on off screen in the Instrument Controls menu and then press to start automatic analyses using the factory entered parameters and calibration 6 If the instrument fails to start or if the FID fails to light refer to the Troubleshooting chapter and the Servicing chapter in this manual Although all Model 55 analyzers are optimized and run for at least two days at the factory before shipment most units require a short burn in period after installation The simplest procedure for achieving stable operation is to follow the startup procedures described above and then run the built in column conditioning routine The column conditioning routine automatically raises the oven temperatures for a period of 8 hours which then helps condition the column and clean out any accumulated hydrocarbons Use the following procedure to initiate a column conditioning cycle 1 From the Main Menu choose Service Note If Service Mode
213. imit screen is used to change Span Check the minimum methane span check alarm limit The minimum and maximum methane span check screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt CH4 Span Check gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 69 Operation Alarms Menu PILSPIPPO Non Methane Span The Non Methane Span Check screen allows the user to view the status of Check the most recent non methane span check and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 75 to 125 0 percent Typically these alarm limits are set to 97 0 and 103 0 percent If the non methane reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt NMHC Span Check PILSPIPEPO Min and Max Methane The Minimum Non Methane Methane Span Check alarm limit screen is Span Check used to change the minimum non methane span check alarm limit The minimum and maximum non methane span check screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt NMHC Span Check gt Min or Max AP EOSGROGUPSILQIO PUERSSPCHP P Methane Concentration The Methane Concentration screen displays the current instrument reading CH concentration and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits 3 70 Model 55i Instruction Manual T
214. ing For initial installation and operation the user should become familiar with the sampling system the gas flow patterns the analog signal outputs and the hydrocarbon detection and measurement methods described in this chapter For those who are interested in a more complete description of the chromatographic process a detailed explanation can be found in most textbooks on analytical instrumentation The Model 55 is an automated batch analyzer which repeatedly collects and analyzes small amounts of the sample stream drawn in by the pump Central to the instrument s operation is an eight port two position rotary valve which is used to introduce the gas sample into the analyzer and to control the flow of gases through the chromatographic column As shown in Figure 1 1 the rotary valve is designed in a circular configuration with the eight ports or connection points spaced equally around the periphery of the valve body Internally the valve includes a cone shaped rotor at the hub which has a set of 4 channels or grooves cut in the surface Each channel connects two adjacent ports The rotor can be shifted to either of two positions to provide two different gas flow configurations For example port number two can be connected to either port number one or port number three while port number three can be connected to port number two or port number four Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Principle of Operation
215. initial use As a general rule a new instrument should also be re calibrated once each day As the operator gains experience with the instrument the frequency of calibration may be adjusted as needed In addition to daily calibration it is also recommended that the standard operating procedures should include an on going quality control plan that allows the frequency of calibration to be modified depending on historical calibration and or zero and span check data A quality control program is essential to ascertain the accuracy and reliability of the air quality data collected The data compiled for such a program might include items such as dates of calibration atmospheric conditions control settings and other pertinent data The Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems published by the U S EPA Research Triangle Park NC 27711 can be consulted for detailed quality assurance guidelines The following information is used to select the calibration mixture used and choice of concentration units For applications involving measurement of a known compound the best calibration standard is a mixture that contains that specific compound For example if the Model 55 will be used for measuring toluene emissions from a printing operation a calibration mixture containing methane and toluene will produce the most accurate results Although span gases that have similar composition to the actual sample will provide the most
216. into the following chapters and appendices to provide direct access to specific operation and service information Chapter 1 Introduction provides an overview of product features describes the principles of operation and lists the specifications Chapter 2 Installation describes how to unpack setup and startup the analyzer Chapter 3 Operation describes the front panel display screens the front panel pushbuttons and the menu driven firmware Chapter 4 Calibration provides the procedures for calibrating the analyzer and describes the required equipment Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance provides maintenance procedures to ensure reliable and consistent instrument operation Chapter 6 Troubleshooting presents guidelines for diagnosing analyzer failures isolating faults and includes recommended actions for restoring proper operation Chapter 7 Servicing presents safety alerts for technicians working on the analyzer step by step instructions for repairing and replacing components and a replacement parts list It also includes contact information for product support and technical information Chapter 8 System Description describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections Chapter 9 Optional Equipment describes the optional equipment that
217. ir analysis and a span mix A set of sample chromatograms is shown in Figure 2 10 and procedures for obtaining each type of chromatogram are presented below Ideally all test chromatograms should look similar except for the presence or absence of peaks for methane NMHCs and oxygen Although spikes occurring at the time of injection and backflush are normal the baseline should recover within five seconds and should otherwise appear flat and relatively noise free In the case that test chromatograms do not appear similar to the examples shown here see the Troubleshooting chapter in this manual A blank chromatogram consists of an injection and backflush of instrument carrier gas This can be achieved by disconnecting the sample line from the back of the analyzer turning off the pump and then running a series of five or more analysis cycles During the initial two or three cycles the instrument will probably report a non zero value for methane and non methane hydrocarbons and the chromatograms will show peaks for air methane and non methane hydrocarbons However after a few cycles the instrument readings should drop to zero At that point the chromatograms should appear flat other than the pressure pulses caused by the valve switching Although zero air is not required for calibration a test chromatogram made with hydrocarbon free zero air may be useful for evaluation of instrument performance In order to obtain a zero chromat
218. it DET BASE specifies the current FID base temperature If the FID flame is out pressing 9 will trigger the ignition sequence e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt FID Status TERIZT Pi Tal DH DIEM AP i ESGROGUPSIQZO OPUERSPCHPE d 3 56 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Flame Out Power The Flame Out Power Up Information screen read only displays the Up Information number of flame outs since the last power up and the date and time of the last power up e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Flame Out Powerup Info Calibration History The Calibration History screen is a list of diagnostic data from the 5 most recent calibrations This includes date and time of calibration the type of calibration activity the signal intensity produced by the zero and or span gas and the other diagnostic information The possible calibration types include zero adjust span adjust manual calibration and automatic calibration For detailed calibration procedures and reports refer to Chapter 4 Calibration Note If a calibration fails or produces a fault condition it is noted in the Calibration History and the unit will continue to operate using the last valid calibration A e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Calibration History Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 57 Operation Diagnostics Menu ep guts FiLSGguPbPI Run Histor
219. l Table B 7 Fuel and Status Values Fuel Type Status Set 0 Hydrogen 0 Run 1 Mixed 1 Ignite carrier control pressure This command reports the current carrier control pressure according to Table B 7 The following example shows that for mixed fuel during ignition the carrier control pressure is set to 5 psi Send carrier control pressure 1 1 Receive carrier control pressure 1 1 5 000 set carrier control pressure fuel status value This command sets the carrier control pressure according to Table B 7 The following example sets the carrier control pressure for mixed fuel during the run mode to value where value is a floating point number representing the carrier control pressure in PSI The following example sets the carrier control pressure to 5 psi Send set carrier control pressure 1 O 5 000 Receive set carrier control pressure 1 0 5 000 ok fuel control pressure This command reports the current fuel control pressure according to Table B 7 The following example shows that for mixed fuel during ignition the fuel control pressure is set to 15 psi Send fuel control pressure 1 1 Receive fuel control pressure 1 1 15 000 set fuel control pressure fuel status value This command sets the fuel control pressure according to Table B 7 The following example sets the fuel control pressure for mixed fuel during the run mode to value where value is a floating point number representing the fuel control pressure in PSI The
220. l 55i Instruction Manual Wrench open end 7 16 inch Wrench open end 9 16 inch Wrench open end 1 2 inch CAUTION Avoid contact with the heated oven components Allow the oven to cool to room temperature before handling oven components A small fan directed into the oven will speed cooling A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the oven cover and allow the internal components to cool 3 Shut off all support gases 4 Loosen the two screws on the flame thermocouple retainer located on the top of the detector and pull the flame sensor out of the detector Note Gently rock the sensor if needed to dislodge the O ring seal A 5 Disconnect the BNC coax signal connection to the signal pogo 6 Disconnect the BNC bias cable from the bias pogo 7 Using the 9 16 inch wrench disconnect the exhaust vent line from the top of the detector Note The stainless steel vent tube can be gently flexed if necessary to remove it from the fitting A 8 Locate and disconnect the ignitor power cable by disconnecting the ignitor lead wire at the Sta kon connector and pulling it through the oven bulkhead access port Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Detector Rebuilding 9 Usingan Allen wrench remove the
221. l Header MBAP is used to identify the message This header consists of the following components Transaction Identifier 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Passed back in response Protocol Identifier 2 Bytes 0x00 MODBUS protocol Length 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Number of following bytes Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Thermo Fisher Scientific Function Code Data Error Check Function Codes 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Read Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol Function Codes A slave address is not required in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols include device addressing The unit identifier is not used by the instrument The function code is a single byte in length The following function codes are supported by the instrument Read Coils 0x01 Read Inputs 0x02 Read Holding Registers 0x05 Read Input Registers 0x04 0x05 Force Write Single Coil Read Exception Status 0x06 If a function code is received that is not in this list an invalid function exception is returned The data field varies depending on the function For more description of these data fields see Function Codes below In MODBUS over serial an error check is included in the message This is not necessary in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols ensure error free transmission The error check is a two byte 16 bit CRC value This section describes the various function cod
222. l Valve Bypass Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 75 Operation Service Menu Bypass Flame The Bypass Flame Detection screen allows the user to bypass the flame Detection detection routines overriding automatic operation When ON the analyzer will act as if the flame is lit in all respects whether it is or not and when turned OFF the analyzer will go to FLAME OUT condition and go through the ignition sequence unless the flame is still lit e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Bypass Flame Detection Idle Mode The Idle Mode screen is used to turn off the pump and the hydrogen which extinguishes the flame but leaves the heaters running so the instrument stays at temperature Turning idle mode back to OFF will re start pump and initiate the flame ignition sequence e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Idle Mode Pe PULQPUPMPO Select Fuel The Select Fuel screen is used to select the fuel type either hydrogen or mixed so that the corresponding pressures set in the gas pressures screen will be utilized 3 76 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Select Fuel Auto Range Change The Auto Range Change screen allows the user to choose whether the instrument will automatically attempt to change ranges if a run is out of range The auto range change feature only works if the unit is also in continuous operation mode e Inth
223. l confined space such as a closed cabinet it is preferable to run an exhaust line outside or to a ventilation system If an exhaust line is used it should be as short as possible and the diameter should be as large as possible to prevent pressurizing the FID Since the FID flame produces steam any exhaust line that is used must be configured to slope down away from the instrument to drain off condensation Excess sample flows out one of the ports labeled BYPASS at a rate of up to one liter per minute If the sample stream contains potentially hazardous materials the bypass should be connected to a ventilation system Otherwise the bypass may be left open If an exhaust line is connected to the bypass the connection should be as short as possible and should open Model 55i Instruction Manual 2 11 Installation Connecting Support Gases Power Connection 2 12 Model 55i Instruction Manual N at near atmospheric pressure Do not connect the sample by pass and the FID exhaust port to the same line or to a strong vacuum such as another pump When designing your installation be aware that changes in the bypass pressure can affect the pump sampling rate and may also affect the accuracy of the analysis Because of the importance of sample pressure and because air is mixed with the sample by the pump solenoid the bypass should not be used to supply sample to another instrument without consulting the service department The only electr
224. l connectors e Function Key Panel and Display e Measurement Interface Board e I O Expansion Board e Digital Output Board e AC Distribution The measurement interface board serves as a central connection area for all measurement electronics in the instrument It contains power supplies and interface circuitry for sensors and control devices in the measurement system It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals from the motherboard Connectors located on the measurement interface board include e Data communication with the motherboard Thermo Fisher Scientific Input Board Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional System Description Electronics e 24 V and 120 VAC power supply inputs e Solenoid outputs e 120 VAC output for the pump and fan e 120 VAC outputs for the oven heaters e Pressure controller communication links e Thermocouple sensor inputs e Ambient temperature sensor e FID high voltage bias supply e Measurement input board e Shielded Analog FID signal output The input board is located in an aluminum housing mounted on the side of the detector oven The board receives the FID signal through a BNC cable that runs from the FID and scales it by a factor of approximately 1 10 or 100 The board includes a high impedance input with a multistage amplifier active filters and a voltage to frequency converter that is used to digitize the signal Th
225. larm NM Cal Fail Cal value outside cal error window Verify correct cal error settings in Serivce menu Crucial Settings screen Alarm Methane Conc Alarm Non Methane Conc Sample conc beyond alarm window Review alarm data screen for legitimate failure Alarm External Alarms External alarm input active Check externally connected device Alarm Motherboard Status Alarm Interface Status Alarm I O Exp Status Internal cables not connected properly Board improperly seated Board is defective Check that all internal cables are connected properly Re cycle AC power to analyzer If still alarming change board Turn power off and re seat board Replace board Model 55i Instruction Manual 6 7 Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams Board Level Figure 6 1 and Figure 6 2 are board level connection diagrams for the common electronics and measurement system These illustrations can be Connection used along with the connector pin descriptions in Table 6 4 through Table D lagrams 6 9 to troubleshoot board level faults VOEXPANSION BOARD EXPANSONIO Ji NEASUREVENT DIGITAL OUTPUT TO SYSTEM BOARD DIGITAL 2 outputs S Pn 11 Fin 8 Rin J14 PLA 14Pn LCD FGCSO RS485 PPl 3m ji FPO DISPLAY RLR PIB Jags PANEL Mg 9BHn 34 Bin BOARD 3Hn BASET
226. le 2 3 D O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 Relay1 ContactA 13 Relay7_ContactA 2 Relay1_ContactB 14 Relay7_ContactB 3 Relay2_ContactA 15 Relay8_ContactA 4 Relay2_ContactB 16 Relay8_ContactB 5 Relay3_ContactA 17 Relay8 ContactA 6 Relay3 ContactB 18 Relay9_ContactB 7 Relay4_ContactA 19 Relay10_ContactA 8 Relay4_ContactB 20 Relay10_ContactB 9 Relay5_ContactA 21 not used 10 Relay5_ContactB 22 24V 11 Relay6_ContactA 23 not used 12 Relay6_ContactB 24 24V The 25 pin terminal board is included with the optional I O Expansion Board Figure 2 9 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable customer supplied to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 4 identifies the connector pins and associated signals Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices See Detail A bS See Detail B Detail A Detail B Assembled Connector Figure 2 9 25 Pin Terminal Board Views Table 2 4 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 lOut1 13 Analog In1 2 Isolated ground 14 Analog In2 3 IOut2 15 Analog In3 4 Isolated ground 16 Ground 5 IOut3 17 Analog In4 6 Isolated ground 18 Analog Inb5 7 lOut4 19 Analog_In6 8 Isolated ground 20 Ground 9 lOut5 21 Analog In7 10 Isolated ground 22 Analog In8 11 IOut
227. le entries which the user may select from when setting the parameter This is not necessarily the same as the entries which may be displayed Button Designator Then there appears an optional button designator This will be one of B Ts TS T or NC B Indicates a button which pops up an input dialog prompting the user for a new value using the designated input format The input format is specified from the B through the subsequent semicolon I Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with input translation That is the values read are translated before they are compared to the selection list options L Indicates a button which pops up a selection list without any translation The output value is the number of the selected option T Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with output translation The number of the option selected is used as an index into the translation table to generate an output string N Indicates a button which only sends the subsequent command to the instrument No user prompting happens The following string through an optional or the end of the line is the command which is to be sent to the instrument upon the completion of the button selection The command string should normally contain print style formatting to include the user input Ifa is present it indicates a command which is sent to the instrument upon successful completion of the button command to update
228. lect Keypad Col 3 Select Keypad Col 4 Select LCD BACKLIGHT J4 5V Supply NC Ground Table 6 7 0 Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label EXPANSION 1 0 Reference Designator J1 Pin cO a N on A CO N a N N LA 99 N Signal Description Analog Voltage Input 1 Analog Voltage Input 2 Analog Voltage Input 3 Ground Analog Voltage Input 4 Analog Voltage Input 5 Analog Voltage Input 6 Ground Analog Voltage Input 7 Analog Voltage Input 8 Ground NC Current Output Return Ground Model 55i Instruction Manual 6 19 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Label Designator Pin N N N N co co N Oo C1 20 22 23 24 25 Signal Description Current Output 1 Current Output Return Current Output 2 Current Output Return Current Output 3 Current Output Return Current Output 4 Current Output Return Current Output 5 Current Output Return Current Output 6 MOTHER BD J2 rS o N C wo A CO N 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground RS485 to Motherboard RS485 to Motherboard Table 6 8 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Label Designator MOTHER BD J1 6 20 Model 55i Instruction Manual Pin cO CO N on A CO N ce Signal Description 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground SPI Reset SPI Input SPI Output SPI Board Select
229. ling any internal component A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Service Locations Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the ribbon cable and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Remove the four screws at the corners of the LCD module 4 Slide the LCD module out towards the center of the instrument 5 Replace the LCD module by following the previous steps in reverse Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD screen to another After replacing the LCD screen the contrast may need to be reset If the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible use the set contrast 10 C Link command to set screen constrast to mid range then optimize the contrast See the C Link Protocol Commands appendix for more information on this command A Se rvice Lo
230. list of the analog Select Channel output channels available for configuration Channel choices include all voltage channels all current channels individual voltage channels 1 6 and individual current channels 1 6 if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Analog Output Config 3 42 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu ERED TE ki EH rnd Prid Allow Over Under Range The Allow Over Under Range screen is used to select whether or not the analog outputs are allowed to exceed the maximum selected value of 100 mV 1 V 5 V 10 V or 20 mA or the minimum selected value of 0 V 0 mA or 4 mA By default this parameter is set to on and 596 over and under range is allowed for all analog output channels e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt Allow Over Under Range ri res bet EUs ETE CPVL FH rPPI Analog Output Configuration The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog Select Action output configuration choices from which the user selects the parameter to adjust for the selected output channel Configuration choices include selecting range setting minimum maximum values and choosing the signal to output e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Analog Output Config All
231. lliliters per minute of flow Model 55i Instruction Manual 2 5 Installation Selecting Hardware and Support Gases Actuator Air FID Fuel 2 6 Model 55i Instruction Manual Compressed air is available in several grades or quality levels with higher grades being more expensive The grade of the support air will have some effect on performance especially when measuring low concentrations of hydrocarbons For applications involving hydrocarbon measurements below 1 or 2 ppm wltra zero or ultra high purity air containing less than 0 1 ppm of total hydrocarbons is the best choice Ultra zero grade air is available in cylinders from scientific gas suppliers or can be obtained from a zero air generator such as the Thermo Scientific s Model 1160 For less critical applications involving measurement of hydrocarbons at concentrations of about 2 ppm or higher zero air with up to 1 ppm hydrocarbons can be run through charcoal or molecular sieve scrubbers and used as FID support air Compressed air from an industrial house air system can also be used but will require an oil trap a particulate filter a water scrubber and a hydrocarbon scrubber These filters and traps will ensure that no harmful contaminants reach the instrument To operate the rotary valve actuator the actuator air pressure coming into the instrument must be set between 40 and 45 psi and the system must be able to supply at least 2 liters per minute of flow Air pre
232. log Voltage Inputs Optional Thermo Fisher Scientific Digital Relay Outputs Digital Inputs System Description 1 0 Components The optional I O expansion board includes six isolated current outputs These are firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 11 bits e 0 20 mA e 4 20mA The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through the firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in the firmware if required The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The current outputs are independent of the voltage outputs The current outputs are isolated from the instrument power and ground but they share a common return line Isolated GND The optional I O expansion board includes eight analog voltage inputs These inputs are used to gather measurement data from third party devices such as meteorological equipment The user may assign a label unit and a conversion table 2 to 10 points Each point in the conversion table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 5 V and a corresponding user defined reading value Only two points are necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs All voltage inputs have a resolution of 12 bits over the range of 0 to
233. ls Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt RS 232 485 Selection Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 31 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Instrument ID Communication Protocol 3 32 Model 55i Instruction Manual WEN Pa Tite DH kobe Hi Lid pn vi MIS PURSPHPPO The Instrument ID screen allows the operator to edit the instrument ID number The ID is used to identify the instrument when using the C Link or MODBUS protocols to control the instrument or collect data It may be necessary to edit the ID number if two or more instruments of the same model are connected to one computer Valid instrument ID numbers are from 0 to 127 The Model 55 has a default instrument ID of 55 For more information about the instrument ID see Appendix B C Link Protocol or Appendix C MODBUS Protocol e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Instrument ID The Communication Protocol screen is used to change the protocol for serial communications Possible choices include C Link MODBUS Geysitech AK and Streaming Data e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Communication Protocol Thermo Fisher Scientific Streaming Data Configuration Streaming Data Interval Choose Stream Data Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Streaming Data Configuration menu is used to allow for configura
234. lt which has no effect on the NMHC reading Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 19 Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Response Factor Gas Pressures The Gas Pressures menu is used to view and adjust the set pressures for the carrier air hydrogen and mixed fuel Note that pressures for both hydrogen and mixed fuel can be entered See the next section on how to select which fuel is to be used Two pressures are specified for each gas One is used during flame ignition ignite and the other is used during normal operation run Acceptable pressure ranges are 5 50 psi refer to the customer data sheet for initial settings e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Gas Pressures The following example sets the CARRIER RUN pressure to 32 9 psi All of the other set pressure screens function the same way 3 20 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Column Oven Enable Detector Oven Enable Pump Settings Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Column Oven Enable screen is used to turn the column oven heater on or off Note This setting is NOT saved on power cycle it is always reverted to ON on power up A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Column Oven Enable EH pikap The Detector Oven Enable screen is used to turn the detector oven heater on or off Note This setting is NOT
235. lue set alarm internal temp max value These commands set the internal temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the internal temperature alarm limits in degrees C The following example sets the internal temperature alarm maximum value to 47 C Send set alarm internal temp max 47 Receive set alarm internal temp max 47 ok alarm nm chk min alarm nm chk max These commands report the current non methane calibration check alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the non methane calibration check alarm minimum value is 97 Send alarm nm chk min Receive alarm nm chk min 97 0 set alarm nm chk min value set alarm nm chk max value These commands set the non methane calibration check alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the non methane calibration check alarm limits in percent The following example sets the non methane calibration check alarm maximum value to 103 Send set alarm nm chk max 103 Receive set alarm nm chk max 103 ok alarm pressure air min alarm pressure air max Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms These commands report the current air pressure alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the air pressure alarm minimum value is 8 0 psi Send alarm pressure air min Re
236. lues to value where value is a floating point number representing the detector temperature alarm limits in degrees C The following example sets the detector temperature alarm maximum value to 180 C Send set alarm detector temp max 180 Receive set alarm detector temp max 180 ok alarm filter temp min alarm filter temp max These commands report the current filter temperature alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the filter temperature alarm minimum value is 170 0 C Send alarm filter temp min Receive alarm filter temp min 170 0 deg C set alarm filter temp min value set alarm filter temp max value These commands set the filter temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the Model 55i Instruction Manual B 15 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 16 Model 55i Instruction Manual filter temperature alarm limits in degrees C The following example sets the filter temperature alarm maximum value to 180 C Send set alarm filter temp max 180 Receive set alarm filter temp max 180 ok alarm internal temp min alarm internal temp max These commands report the current internal temperature alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the internal temperature alarm minimum value is 8 0 C Send alarm internal temp min Receive alarm internal temp min 8 0 deg C set alarm internal temp min va
237. lumn Base 3 Filter Base 4 Flame AUKA KO This command reports the current Instantaneous FID signal in hertz The following example reports that the current FID reading is 19988 Hz Send AUKA KO Receive AUKA O 19988 ASTF KO This command returns the error status each separated by space according to Table E 4 The number of errors is not reported in the response of this command only the active alarm status The following example reports that the bad calibration and service alarms are activated Send ASTF KO Receive ASTF 64 1 Model 55i Instruction Manual E 5 AK Protocol Commands Calibration Calibration E 6 Model 55i Instruction Manual Table E 4 Alarm Status Descriptions Alarm Number Description 256 Flame Out Flag set if flame is out 64 Bad Calibration 32 NM Concentration Alarm Over Alarm Setpoint 16 C1 Concentration Alarm Over Alarm Setpoint 8 Low Carrier Pressure Alarm 4 Low Fuel Pressure Alarm 2 Low Air Pressure Alarm 1 Service Alarm AKAKKmMr lt iss s S This command returns the current span gas concentration for the requested measurement m and range r according to Table E 5 and Table E 6 The following example shows the low range methane span concentration is 2 500 If both measurements are requested the methane is the first value reported Send AKAK K1 M1 Receive AKAK 1 2 500 Table E 5 Measurement Values Measurement Description 0
238. ly using soap and water A Due to the possibility of residual fuel in the detector keep your face away from the FID The ignitor pulse is clearly visible from a distance when the thermocouple has been removed A Avoid contact with the heated oven components Allow the oven to cool to room temperature before handling oven componenets A small fan directed into the oven will speed cooling A Do not apply power to the Model 55 until all other installation procedures have been completed An incorrect start up sequence could damage the instrument A Do not attempt to lift the analyzer by the cover or other external fittings A Heating the column oven while the carrier gas is not flowing may damage the column A Disconnect the serial cable before changing the RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to any equipment that the analyzer is currently connected to A Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Do not disassemble the valve unless the system malfunction is definitely isolated to the valve perform all other system checks first If disassembly is required make certain the instructions that follow are carefully observed A Any contact between the interior of the valve body and the metal of the rotor or any
239. manual Span Drift Clogged sample inlet Warm up not complete Carrier contamination Column is dirty Chec pass Check temperature readings in Diagnostic menu and wait for stabilization Check chromatogram baseline against samples shown flow rate at sample inlet and sample by Run column conditioning routine located in Service menu Replace gas scrubbers and use higher quality carrier Excessive Response Time Sample leak Leak test sampling lines and fittings under positive pressure or replace sample bag Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Service Locations Alarm Message Possible Cause Sample filter dirty Cold spots in sampling system or column oven Troubleshooting Service Locations Action Replace external filters first then clean internal filter with acetone and bake out if problem continues Check column temperatures under Diagnostic menu Check detector and filter oven temperatures for low or no temperature For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International Model 55i Instruction Manual 6 29 Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 7 Servicing This chapter explains how to replace the Model 55 subassemblies It assumes that a subas
240. manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alert Descriptions Alert f DANGER f WARNING f CAUTION j Equipment Damage Description A hazard is present that could result in death or serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A A hazard or unsafe practice could result in serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A A hazard or unsafe practice could result in minor to moderate personal injury if the warning is ignored A A hazard or unsafe practice could result in property damage if the warning is ignored A Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts in this Manual Alert il WARNING Description The Model 55i is supplied with a three wire grounded power cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Alert CAUTION f Equipment Damage About This Manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Description The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A During operation the sample intake sample bypass and FID exhaust bulkheads are extremely hot Use caution when working with a hot instrument A If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediate
241. matic flow control SD Refer to Table 8 2 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration DB9 Pin Function 2 receive 8 receive 7 transmit 3 transmit 5 ground An RJ45 connector is used for the 10Mbs Ethernet connection supporting TCP IP communications via standard IPV4 addressing The IP address may be configured for static addressing or dynamic addressing set using a DHCP server Any serial port protocols may be accessed over Ethernet in addition to the serial port Up to three simultaneous connections are allowed per protocol The external accessory connector is not used in the Model 55 analyzer Model 55i Instruction Manual 8 11 System Description 1 0 Components This port is used in other models to communicate with smart external devices that may be mounted hundreds of feet from the analyzer using an RS 485 electrical interface 8 12 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific 1 0 Expansion Board Assembly 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly Terminal Block and Thermo Fisher Scientific Cable Kits Chapter 9 Optional Equipment The Model 55 is available with the following options e I O Expansion Board Assembly on page 9 1 e 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly on page 9 1 e Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9 1 e Cables on page 9 2 e Mounting Options on page 9 3 The I O expansion board provides six analog cur
242. max alarm pressure fuel Reports sets fuel pressure alarm minimum value B 17 min alarm trig conc c1 Reports sets current methane concentration alarm trigger B 18 sense alarm trig conc nm Reports sets current non methane concentration alarm B 18 trigger sense allow mode cmd Reports sets whether set mode locks instrument front B 45 panel analog iout range Reports sets analog current output range per channel B 48 analog vin Retrieves analog voltage input data per channel B 48 analog vout range Reports sets analog voltage output range per channel B 49 backflush Sets multiport valve to move to backflush position B 12 backflush time Reports sets delay value from injection to the switching of B 32 the multiport valve to the backflush position baud Reports sets current baud rate B 42 bias voltage Reports current bias supply voltage B 18 c1 alarm level Reports sets current methane concentration maximum alarm B 14 value c1 alarm status Reports alarm status for methane B 13 c1 range Reports sets current methane measurement range B 34 c1 span Reports sets methane 1 span gas concentration B 29 c1 span high Reports sets methane 3 span gas concentration B 29 c1 span low Reports sets methane 3 span gas concentration B 29 c1 span med Reports sets methane 3 span gas concentration B 29 cl value Reports current methane concentration B 11 c1 window end Reports sets delay time from injection to closing of the B 33 methane window c1 window star
243. mezone string for the instrument for use with the NTP server where string is a standard timezone string Common strings are listed in the Timezone screen description in Chapter 3 Send set tz EST 5EDT Receive set tz EST 5EDT ok analog iout range channel This command reports the analog current output range setting for channel where channel must be between 1 and 6 inclusive The following example reports current output channel 4 is in the 4 20 mA range according to Table B 13 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog iout range 4 Receive analog iout range 4 2 set analog iout range channel range This command sets analog current output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 13 The following example sets current output channel 4 to the 0 20 mA range This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send set analog iout range 4 1 Receive set analog iout range 4 1 ok Table B 13 Analog Current Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 20 mA 2 4 20 mA 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined analog vin channel This command retrieves the analog voltage input channel data both the calculated value and the actual voltage In the following example the calculated value of channel 1 is 75 325 degrees F volts are 2 796 This
244. move the cover 2 Use the Philips head screwdriver to loosen the eight thumb screws if necessary and remove the oven cover and allow the internal components to cool 3 Using the 1 inch wrench remove the filter assembly cap nut see Figure 5 2 Note This nut may be difficult to move Be careful not to bend any of the 1 8 inch tubing attached to the filter assembly while undoing the cap nut A 4 Remove the old filter element and gasket from the assembly base and gently dislodge the element from the base with a screwdriver if necessary 5 Usinga clean air supply or other clean compressed gas blow any dust or particles out of the base 6 Install the new filter element and gasket into the base Note Be sure to install the filter element with the open end of the cup facing down into the base and that it is seated flat A 7 Wrap the filter housing threads with Teflon tape then replace the cap nut and tighten with the wrench If Teflon tape is not used the cap nut may become difficult to remove 8 Re install the oven cover and the instrument cover The actuator O rings need periodic replacement In rare cases the entire actuator may need to be replaced This section describes the procedure for changing the actuator O rings which also includes instructions for replacing the whole actuator The alignment of the valve will need to be checked and adjusted if needed whenever the actuator is removed from the instrument Mod
245. mperature Calibration 15r tracce tertio 3 89 Leak Festo oto stood ut Pu AD DAR Cu OE UE 3 89 Analog Output Cal DEREIOTLc ores qud e ie iacere esce uit des 3 90 Analog Output Calibrate Zero sxe aut oneal Aotect i a siesta xe 3 91 Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale artt 3 91 Analog Input Calibration e iet tede er ede 3 92 Analog Input Calibrate Ze odere e isti etes 3 92 Model 55i Instruction Manual xi Contents Analog Input Calibrate Pull Scale 5e qactidieenes 3 93 Display Pixel Test net rented i eer verdes eos 3 93 Restore User Defaults ida ota oed etfi teatro tees 3 93 Password Menu inei tart iced pes inito PER EH epi are x epa ae eben 3 94 Ser Password oue ond aet ete ts fte oe spi ae 3 94 Lock Instrument a eek a ledit eR M pep eis 3 95 Lock Unlock and Local Remote Operation 3 95 Change Password aces ten cecus eiit eee NEUE 3 95 Remove Password icol ticis tO ME ia don Uude 3 96 Unlock Instrumentasi Lco tret iai si 3 96 Chapter 4 rper P 4 1 Frequency of Cal ration un assentire ra eode ra ancvateece Pi 4 2 Selecting Calibration Mixture aia ep edet t canes 4 2 Span Gas Conipositiofi ais enei edd diede dedico Monin iip cost oo ei aedis 4 2 Selecting Span Gas Concentrations oc once uri a ie Pun 4 3 Connecting the Calibration 348 4 npe Cer ee ted 4 4 Calibration Mens a fis cncttsncese Sec am re dt b scence le ecdesia 4 4 Calibration Parameters ii acit dte d Ea
246. ms A flow meter and a mirror or chrome tool will also be helpful As discussed in Chapter 2 the chromatogram is obtained by attaching a chart recorder or other datalogging device to the BNC connector on the rear panel The chart speed should be set to about 6 inches per minute and the recorder range should be approximately half of the Model 557 s full scale output 5 volts Some sample chromatograms showing proper instrument performance and the effects of various malfunctions are included on the following pages In each case a blank a zero air chromatogram and a span chromatogram are included Blank chromatograms which illustrate the instrument s basic function can be obtained by disconnecting the sample line turning off the pump and running three or four analysis cycles to flush any sample air out of the system Zero air chromatograms are run with the pump on and the sample line connected to a source of hydrocarbon free zero air Span chromatograms shown in these examples were obtained by analyzing a span mix containing 2 ppm each of methane and propane in air The first step in using this portion of the trouble shooting guide is obtain a full set of chromatograms from the Model 55 and to compare those to the chromatograms shown here Based on that comparison it may be possible to narrow down the problem to one instrument area If the source of the problem is not clear from the chromatogram it may be helpful to check the table of po
247. n measurement output user selectable per channel Digital outputs 1 power fail relay Form C 10 relays Form A user selectable alarm output relay logic 100 mA 200 VDC Digital inputs 16 digital inputs user select programmable TTL level pulled high Serial ports 1 RS 232 or RS 485 with two connectors baud rate 1200 115200 data bits parity and stop bits protocols C Link MODBUS Geysitech Bayern Hessen AK and streaming data all user selectable Ethernet connection RJ45 connector for 10 Mbs Ethernet connection static or dynamic TCP IP addressing up to 3 simultaneous connections per protocol Note All NMHC specifications are based on propane Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Lifting Chapter 2 Installation Installation of the Model 55 includes unpacking and inspection connecting sample zero and span lines attaching the analog and or digital outputs to a recording device and connecting any control or status lines that will be used The startup section includes instructions for initial powerup of of the Model 55 and for adjustment of basic operating parameters such as gas pressures The installation should always be followed by instrument calibration as described in the Calibration chapter of this manual Equipment Damage Do not apply power to the Model 55 until all other installation procedures have been completed An incorrect start up sequence could damage the i
248. n Descriptions 6 19 Table 6 8 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 20 Table 6 9 Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions sss 6 22 Table 6 10 Troubleshooting Performance Problems 6 28 Table 7 1 Model 55 Replacement Parts ssssssssssss 1 5 Table 7 2 Model 55i Cables c nti rete eco tetendit 1 6 Table 7 3 External Device Connection Components sss 7 7 Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 1 18 Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 1 19 Table 7 6 Part Number and Drawing Reference for Detector Assembly 7 38 Table 7 7 Acceptable Heater Resistance Readings 7 48 Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration 8 11 Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration ss 8 11 Table 9 1 Cable Options 9 2 Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables ss 9 3 Table 9 3 Mounting Options scoala 9 3 Table B 1 Error Response Messages c ccccccscesesescetesesestetesesesteteseseetenesees B 3 Table B 2 C Link Protocol Commands B 3 Table B 3 Condition Column Values sss B 12 Model 55i Instruction Manual xix Tables xx Model 55i Instruction Manual Table B 4 Alarm Trigger
249. n Manual PowerUp SETEED acest iet tes ect ietetisten tana t die dais aaa 3 6 PRAISE Iz reece tessa Sarat ido tuve bas ste st epe MINES cd e are 3 6 Main Men eee rte eve E VEN QU eU vehe dtu qe cness 3 8 Range Men Bl M E 3 8 Concentration Units ie eioe ee Eee Derecec iode ie eed tiva 3 9 Methane Rate eed ioc e de Oe do t ect Ses 3 10 Non Methane Range osa ecd e a tomate 3 10 Calibration Parameters Metusa si echa uces tees tse iesei t ee tree o o dest 3 12 Gas Concentrato DSi oec EIE C IEEE de 3 12 Methane Calibration Gas Concentration eese 3 12 Non Methane Calibration Gas Concentration s 3 13 Auto Calibration Bep as dod Goods ote tua bu tud utes oc 3 13 Calibration Model Aosta ette Cer E Re eed 3 14 SELLLHIBS osos doxes opu nated td ortu vrai Fdo detis g us 3 14 Number ob PTS itt c oer astcivcabv ve taucht eso tees b tos te T 3 14 Intel T Hle se edebat in poa rtt entia ida ter 3 15 Bero ustogep ot eMe M mU d LT TP E 3 15 Calibration Reseau is tudine quiate nu irc ee Mr titre ene t 3 16 Auto VHT CARON in aiina ce hotter dedi nq Dae le Ld mesa 3 16 Min Verification Cycles cst aae stereo vie vepres eoata hene hee dbesieh ds 3 16 Use Zero Chromatogram eeeiiee tertie in exa ar Rd beue 3 17 Reset User Calibration Defaults 25558 oreet tete etude 3 17 EE ONU Sousa du east MEME M A EE Mr 3 18 Instrument Controls Menu eese eene eene enne 3 18 Set Operation Oe inorganic 3 19 Sampling Time
250. n Menu choose Calibration Parameters Gas Concentrations The Gas Concentrations menu allows the user to set the calibration gas concentrations for methane and non methane The screens below show the gas concentrations for single span gas mode and three span gas mode low mid and hi For more information on number of span gases see Instrument Configuration on page 3 61 e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters gt Gas Concentrations ROUGE TRAST DI USE PLE h i Tat F i i E DHOBM PLI Methane Calibration Gas The Methane Calibration Gas Concentration screen is used to enter the Concentration one methane calibration gas concentration in 1 span gas mode OR the selected low middle or high concentration in 3 span gas mode The display shows the current methane calibration gas concentration in single span gas mode The next line of the display is where the span gas 3 12 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Parameters Menu concentration is entered Press to save the new methane calibration gas concentration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters Gas Concentrations gt CH4 Non Methane Calibration The Non Methane Calibration Gas Concentration screen is used to enter Gas Concentration the one non methane calibration gas concentration in 1 span gas mode OR the selected low mid or hi concentration in 3 span gas mode The display shows the current non m
251. n base temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the current column base temperature is 78 5 C Send column base temp Receive column base temp 78 5 deg C Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurements detector base temp This command reports the current detector base temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the current detector base temperature is 174 9 C Send detector base temp Receive detector base temp 174 9 deg C filter temp This command reports the current sample filter temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the current filter temperature is 175 1 SES Send filter temp Receive filter temp 175 1 deg C flame temp This command reports the current FID flame temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the current flame temperature is 221 0 C Send flame temp Receive flame temp 221 0 deg C fid signal This command reports the average raw FID signal in Hz The following example reports that the fid signal is 4577 Send fid signal Receive fid signal 4577 internal temp This command reports the current internal instrument temperature The following example reports that the internal temperature is 25 3 C Send internal temp Receive internal temp 025 3 deg C cl value nm value thc thc value These commands report the measured methane non methane and total hydro
252. n only Measurement Interface Board Figure 8 1 Hardware Components 8 2 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Flame lonization Detector FID Sample Filter Internal Pump Electr Thermo Fisher Scientific Rotary Valve onic Pressure Controllers System Description Hardware The Flame Ionization Detector FID quantifies the hydrocarbon concentration by measuring the current that flows between two electrodes when organic compounds are burned in a hydrogen air flame The in line sample filter is located just downstream of the sample inlet bulkhead fitting and protects the pump rotary valve and flow restrictors from particulate matter in the sample stream The filter assembly contains a cup shaped sintered metal element that can be cleaned or replaced by the user The standard element is rated for removal of particulate down to 0 5 microns Additional external filtering is strongly recommended for applications that involve high levels of fine particulate such as monitoring of cement kilns The internal pump if installed draws sample into the analyzer and into the oven through the sample inlet port The sample is delivered to the Sample Loop through a venturi which develops a differential pressure from the sample stream supplied by the pump The internal pump has a nominal flow rate of approximately 0 8 liters per minute and has adequate head pressure to draw sample through 100 feet of 1 4 inch OD sample li
253. n operating conditions B 23 in the format specified in the commands erec Returns a snapshot of the main operating conditions B 23 measurements and status in the specified format erec format Reports sets erec format ASCII or binary B 24 erec layout Reports current layout of erec data B 25 fid signal Reports current raw FID signal B 11 filter temp Reports temperature at the sample filter B 11 flags Reports current active measurement status flags in HEX B 20 flame status Reports the state of the FID flame B 20 flame temp Reports FID flame temperature B 11 format Reports sets current reply termination format B 43 fuel control Reports sets current fuel control pressure B 36 pressure fuel pressure Reports current fuel pressure B 10 fuel type Reports sets current fuel type B 39 gas unit Reports sets current gas units B 34 he help Simulates pressing help pushbutton B 31 history cal Reports the calibration history records in ASCII table form B 21 history run Reports the run history in ASCII table form B 20 host name Reports sets host name string B 44 idle Reports sets instrument in idle mode B 39 ignite flame Sets to attempt to light the FID flame B 39 inject Sets multiport valve to move to injection position B 12 instr name Reports instrument name B 44 instrument id Reports sets instrument id B 44 internal temp Reports current internal instrument temperature B 11 isc iscreen Retrieves framebuffer data used for the display B 31 Model 55i Instruc
254. n the limits defined by this menu entry the calibration is considered valid Otherwise the calibration is rejected and the service alarm is triggered e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Crucial Settings gt Non Methane Cal Error Min and Max Methane The Minimum Non Methane Calibration Error screen is used to change Calibration Error the NMHC calibration error minimum value The minimum and maximum non methane calibration error screens function the same way 3 82 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Crucial Settings gt Non Methane Calibration Error gt Minimum or Maximum Gain Factors The Gain Factors menu is used to set the gain factors used to compensate for changes in the instrument measuremenet range That is they reflect the difference in amplifier gain between the low mid and high measurement ranges Gain factors are set at the factory and should not require adjustment unless the input board is repaired or replaced e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Crucial Settings Gain Factors Mid Range Gain Factor The Mid Range Gain Factor screen is used to enter the mid range gain factor This is the multiplication factor between the low and mid gain settings on the input board e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Crucial Settings gt Gain Factors gt Mid Range Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 83 Ope
255. nalog4 19 TTL_Input4 8 Analog ground 20 Digital ground 9 Analog5 21 TTL Inputb 10 Analog ground 22 TTL Input6 11 Analog6 23 TTL Input7 12 Analog ground 24 Digital ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices The analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 2 7 See Table 2 2 for channels and pin connections O 0000000000000000 00 OOOOOOOOOOOcOOOOOOOO o Figure 2 7 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector Table 2 2 Default Analog Outputs Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 FID Signal 2 33 3 Methane 3 15 5 NMHC 4 34 7 THC 5 17 9 None 6 36 11 None Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A D O Terminal Board Figure 2 8 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable customer supplied to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 3 identifies the connector pins and associated signals Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 2 15 Installation Connecting External Devices See Detail A Assembled 25 Pin Terminal Board 2 16 Model 55i Instruction Manual See Detail B i w ZZXN e Detail A Detail B onnector Figure 2 8 D O Terminal Board Views Tab
256. nd not in column conditioning Otherwise it returns with cal check can t wrong settings Send cal check Receive cal check ok calibrate set calibrate These commands initiate a calibration cycle if not in Service Mode run is done flame is lit and not in column conditioning Otherwise it returns with calibrate can t wrong settings Send calibrate Receive calibrate ok cal verify This command reports whether calibration verification is on yes or off no The following example shows that the calibration verification is on Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration Send cal verify Receive cal verify yes set cal verify onoff yesno onoff on off yesno yes no This command sets the calibration verification to on yes or off no The following example turns the calibration verification off Send set cal verify off Receive set cal verify off ok return ch4 cal chk return nm cal chk These commands report the results of the most recent methane or non methane calibration check run The following example reports result of the most recent non methane calibration check run in percent Send return nm cal chk Receive return nm cal chk 98 cl span cl span low cl span med cl span high span conc cl span conc cl low span conc cl med span conc cl high nm span nm span low nm span med nm span high span conc nm span conc nm low
257. nd reports the current time interval in seconds for streaming data The following example reports the streaming period is set to 10 seconds Send stream per Receive stream per 10 sec set stream per number value number value 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 300 This command sets the time interval between two consecutive streaming data strings to number value in seconds The following example sets the number value to 10 seconds Model 55i Instruction Manual B 27 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 28 Calibration Model 55i Instruction Manual Send set stream per 10 Receive set stream per 10 ok stream time This command reports if the streaming data string will have a time stamp attached to it or not according to l able B 6 The following example reports that the streaming data shall not include a time stamp Send stream time Receive stream time O set stream time value This command enables value where value is to attach or disable time stamp to streaming data string according to Table B 6 The following example attaches a time stamp to streaming data Send set stream time O Receive set stream time O ok Table B 6 Stream Time Values Value Stream Time 0 Disables time stamp to streaming data string 1 Attaches time stamp to streaming data string cal check set cal check These commands initiate a calibration check cycle if not in Service Mode run is done flame is lit a
258. nd response to read registers 10 13 Request Field Name Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No of Registers Hi No of Registers Lo Response Field Name Function Byte Count Register Value Hi 10 Register Value Lo 10 Register Value Hi 11 Register Value Lo 11 Hex 0x03 0x00 0x09 0x00 0x04 Hex 0x03 0x06 0x02 0x2B 0x00 0x00 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x05 Force Write Thermo Fisher Scientific Single Coil MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Register Value Hi 12 0x00 Register Value Lo 12 0x64 Register Value Hi 13 0x00 Register Value Lo 13 0x64 The contents of register 10 are shown as the two byte values of 0x02 0x2B Then contents of registers 11 13 are 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x64 and 0x00 0x64 respectively The Force Write Single Coil function simulates the activation of the digital inputs in the instrument which triggers the respective action This function code is used to set a single action to either ON or OFF The request specifies the address of the action to be forced Actions are addressed starting at zero Therefore action number 1 is addressed as 0 The requested ON OFF state is specified by a constant in the request data field A value of OxFF00 requests the action to be ON A value of 0x0000 requests it to be OFF All other values are illegal and will not affect the output The normal response is an echo of the request returned after the state has been written
259. ne The rotary valve is a key piece of hardware central to the operation of the instrument It consists of an 8 port valve body containing a valve rotor and driven by a pneumatic actuator The valve assembly operates between two positions Inject and Backflush The inject mode directs sample gas stored in the Sample Loop into the front end of the separation column The Backflush mode provides two functions it reloads the empty sample loop and reverses the directional flow of the carrier gas such that the hydrocarbons trapped within the column are released from the internal packing materials to exit the column from the direction that they entered The analyzer utilizes electronic pressure controllers and fixed flow restrictors to control the flow rate of fuel combustion air and carrier gas going to the FID The electronic pressure controllers utilize pressure sensors and temperature compensated electronic proportional valves in a closed loop control system to provide a fixed gas pressure to flow restrictors located in the base of the FID and the internal oven plumbing The pressure controller assembly consists of three closed loop 0 50 psi pressure controllers pressurizing thermally stable restrictors to provide smooth consistent gas flow to the FID Each controller is individually Model 55i Instruction Manual 8 3 System Description Firmware Separation Column Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Calibration Solenoid Firmware Instr
260. ne hydrocarbons are back flushed out and carried to the FID for measurement As the NMHCS reach the FID they create a signal that is proportional to the total NMHC concentration and can be converted to a ppm reading by comparison with the signal generated by a known standard Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Principle of Operation If the FID signal is continuously monitored with a chart recorder or data acquisition system the output will create a chromatogram showing one peak for methane and a second peak that represents the combined non methane hydrocarbons A typical chromatogram obtained from the analysis of a standard mixture containing 2 ppm each of methane and propane is shown in Figure 1 3 In this case the methane peak reaches a maximum approximately 17 seconds after injection and is preceded by a smaller peak that represents oxygen The 17 second elapsed time between injection and the top of the methane peak is referred to as the methane retention time C1 Rt and is critical for proper operation of the instrument Note The retention time varies with the specific model and configuration of the analyzer Please see the factory test report to determine the correct retention time for your analyzer A The non methane peak as shown in Figure 1 3 will generally be lower and wider than the methane peak and it can have varying retention times depending on operating conditions and composition of
261. nge the calibration will be rejected an alarm will be triggered and the instrument will continue operation using the last valid calibration factors If the cycle was initiated automatically the instrument will pause for 30 seconds to flush any residual span gas out of the sampling system Otherwise it will return to the Main Menu Following calibration the calibration factors and other diagnostic information can be viewed by selecting Diagnostics from the Main Menu Calibration History Also if automatic calibration or calibration checks have been requested the counter will reset to zero following a manual calibration if the automatic calibration or calibration check is set to BY RUN The user has the option to store a zero chromatogram run in the instrument Subsequent calibration and sample runs will have this zero run subtracted out before calculation of concentration if the Use Zero Chromatogram is turned ON This feature can help resolve methane and non methane peaks if the instrument baseline is less than ideal Stored zero chromatogram data will become invalid if the user changes the window timing parameters in the Service menu If the data bcomes invalid it will not be used for baseline correction regardless of the user setting Invalid data warnings will be shown in the Calibration screen and in the Use Zero Chromatogram screen Before storing a zero chromatogram the user should ensure that no air or sample remains in the
262. ns Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 6 Troubleshooting This instrument has been designed to achieve a high level of reliability In the event of problems or failure the troubleshooting guidelines board level connection diagrams connector pin descriptions and testing procedures presented in this chapter should be helpful in isolating and identifying problems For additional fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual The service mode described in the Operation chapter includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems The Technical Support Department at Thermo Fisher Scientific can also be consulted in the event of problems See Service Locations on page 6 29 for contact information In any correspondence with the factory please note both the serial number and program number of the instrument This chapter provides the following troubleshooting and service support information e Safety Precautions on page 6 1 e Firmware Diagnostic Information on page 6 2 e Troubleshooting Guides on page 6 2 e Board Level Connection Diagrams on page 6 8 e Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 10 e Performance Problems on page 6 22 e Service Locations on page 6 29 Read the safety precautions in the Preface and Servicing chapter before performing any actions listed in this chapter Model 55i In
263. nstrument A This chapter provides the following recommendations and procedures for installing the instrument e Lifting on page 2 1 e Unpacking and Inspection on page 2 2 e Selecting Hardware and Support Gases on page 2 3 e Connecting Support Gases on page 2 8 e Connecting External Devices on page 2 13 e Startup on page 2 18 e Column Conditioning and Initial Burn In on page 2 19 e Running Test Chromatograms on page 2 19 When lifting the instrument use a procedure appropriate to lifting a heavy object such as bending at the knees while keeping your back straight and upright Grasp the instrument at the bottom in the front and at the rear of the unit Although one person can lift the unit it is desirable to have two persons lifting one by grasping the bottom in the front and the other by grasping the bottom in the rear Model 55i Instruction Manual 2 1 Installation Unpacking and Inspection Unpacking and Inspection 2 2 Model 55i Instruction Manual Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings A The Model 55i is shipped complete in one container If there is obvious damage to the shipping container when the instrument is received notify the carrier immediately and hold for inspection The carrier is responsible for any damage incurred during shipment Note Save all packing material If it is ever necessary to ship the instrument for
264. nstrument to be in sample zero span mode if valid for that instrument This is achieved by using the supported Geysitech commands listed below Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet For details of the Model 55 Geysitech Protocol specification see the following topics Serial Communication Parameters on page D 1 TCP Communication Parameters on page D 2 Instrument Address on page D 2 Abbreviations Used on page D 2 Basic Command Structure on page D 2 Block Checksum on page D 3 Geysitech Commands on page D 3 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the Series to support Geysitech protocol Number of Data bits 7 or 8 Number of Stop bits lor2 Parity None Odd or Even Data rate 1200 to 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 55i Instruction Manual D 1 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Instrument Address Abbreviations Used Basic Command Structure D 2 Model 55i Instruction Manual iSeries instruments support the Geysitech protocol over TCP IP The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for Geysitech 9882 The Geysitech instrument address has a value between 0 and 127 and is represented by a 3 digit ASCII number with leading zeros or leading spaces if
265. nt range for methane is medium Send c1 range Receive c1 range med set cl range value set nm range value value low med high These commands set the methane and non methane measurement range to low medium high The following example sets the measurement range for non methane to high Send set nm range high Receive set nm range high ok gas unit This command reports the current gas units ppm ppb ug m mg m 96 or ppmc The following example reports that the gas units are set to ppb Send gas unit Receive gas unit ppb set gas unit unit unit ppm ppb pg m3 mg m3 percent ppmc This command sets the gas units to ppm ppb pg m mg m 96 or ppmc The following example sets the gas units to mg m Send set gas unit mg m3 Receive set gas unit mg m3 ok response factor This command reports the current non methane response factor that is the multiplier set for the non methane measurement before the concentration is displayed The following example shows the response factor is 1 000 Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration Send response factor Receive response factor 1 000 set response factor value This command sets the non methane response factor to value where value is any floating point number representing the non methane response factor The following example sets the non methane response factor to 5 Send set response factor 5
266. ntific Preventive Maintenance Internal Sample Filter Cleaning Mounting Screws 4 Do not remove Guard Filter Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters This section provides the requirements and instructions for cleaning the internal sample filter element in the Model 557 Use the following procedure to remove and clean the internal sample filter element Equipment Required Wrench 1 inch Long Philips head screwdriver Teflon pipe thread tape Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A 1 Shut off the main power and remove the instrument cover Using the Philips head screwdriver loosen the eight thumb screws remove the oven cover and allow the internal components to cool Model 55i Instruction Manual 5 3 Preventive Maintenance Internal Sample Filter Cleaning 2 Using the 1 inch wrench remove the filter assembly cap nut Figure 5 2 Note This nut may be very difficult to move Be careful not to bend any of the 1 8 inch tubing attached to the filter assembly while undoing the cap nut A 3 Remove the filter element from the assembly base Gently dislodge the element from the base with a screwdriver if necessary 4 Using a clean air supply or other cl
267. ntly selected record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging 3 28 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Memory Allocation The Memory Allocation Percent screen is used to select the percentage of Percent total memory that may be used by the selected record type lrecs or srecs Percentages between 0 and 100 are available in increments of 10 Changing this value results in log erasure for both types of records and changing the percent allocated to one record type will automatically change the other e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Configure Datalogging Memory Allocation 96 Communication l he Communication Settings menu is used for communications control 8 f Settings and configuration e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 29 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Serial Settings The Serial Setting submenu is used for serial communications control and configuration e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Serial Settings DH Guided Pil fiie fiini Baud Rate The Baud Rate screen is used to set the RS 232 RS 485 interface baud rate Baud rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 are available
268. o OxFF Passed back in response Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Byte Count 1 Byte N Output Status N Byte N N or N 1 N Quantity of Outputs 8 if the remainder not equal to zero then N N 1 Error Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Exception Code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 lllegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read outputs 2 15 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Thermo Fisher Scientific Registers MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Request Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Starting Address Hi 0x00 Starting Address Lo 0x02 Quantity of Outputs Hi 0x00 Quantity of Outputs Lo 0x0D Response Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Byte Count 0x03 Output Status 2 10 OxCD Output Status 11 15 Ox0A The status of outputs 2 10 is shown as the byte value OxCD or binary 1100 1101 Output 10 is the MSB of this byte and output 2 is the LSB By convention bits within a byte are shown with the MSB to the left and the LSB to the right Thus the outputs in the first byte are 10 through 2 from left to right In the last data byte the status of outputs 15 11 is shown as the byte value 0x0A or binary 0000 1010 Output 15 is in the fifth bit position from the left and output 11 is the LSB of this byte The four remaining high order bits are zero filled Read Holding Input Registers reads the measurement
269. odel 55i Instruction Manual B 13 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 14 Model 55i Instruction Manual set alarm ch chk min value set alarm ch chk max value These commands set the methane calibration check alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the methane calibration check alarm limits in percent The following example sets the methane calibration check alarm maximum value to 10396 Send set alarm ch4 chk max 103 Receive set alarm ch4 chk max 103 ok alarm column temp min alarm column temp max These commands report the current column temperature alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the column temperature alarm minimum value is 65 0 C Send alarm column temp min Receive alarm column temp min 65 0 deg C set alarm column temp min value set alarm column temp max value These commands set the column temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the column temperature alarm limits in degrees C The following example sets the column temperature alarm maximum value to 75 C Send set alarm column temp max 75 Receive set alarm column temp max 75 ok alarm conc cl min alarm conc cl max cl alarm level alarm conc nm min alarm conc nm max nm alarm level These commands report the current methane and non methane concentration alarm minimum and maximum values settings
270. oer re tpe OR e ru Lees feu 3 19 FRESPO NSE ACEOR a ctus pat decere dms aeo dupiu d a ai t ERU 3 19 Cxas Pressuressi iieri eid e tele o GRE 3 20 Column Oven Enable vasa sontes fuites hein cd deem added 3 21 Detector Oven Bnabl s ette ire ete de eb Rb eet 3 21 P nip Settings cie tree ep hee enh p ene einen Si eee ena epo eig eh ucts 3 21 Datalogging Settings s cette m cu toO totals 3 22 Select Stec A66 so tiat oa bete etis AE EEE 3 23 View Logged Data nte ret iode evel att Petreius 3 23 Number o ReCoRds da esq eieke ipe uei et abe esci Potes Erai 3 23 Dated Tinem enni konma A iure dofasuth Potete os 3 24 IS CEP Y 3 25 Select Cottelibzatetonssadd atu Stade NEP MS M ES HI 3 25 Choose Field D 8Std xc en cene AE bee tt to bin dod 3 26 Concentrations enaena anan dui tome cgsha eet an Tost ean Ad ciun 3 26 Other M asureniebtsusaa a ences at etd Eee ei ICH a ine de 3 26 Analog Ipsae node turbas nd na decade Sereda fiat 3 27 Commit Contente easy eee iode tier es DE EN c dede ot eb reds 3 27 Reset to Default Content se vese circ crus qe rati va etu guided es 3 28 Configure Datalopging eod aceti tested ele ees 3 28 Memory Allocation Detbtellt scooters m edet Masa g qe dE 3 29 Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Communication Settings csini de s ed se iie Maite 3 29 Serial Settings iesirea etre atio tutari rd e e eau dps 3 30 DAR Rte uon tettebadot inei na siet E oe R tee EN 3 30 Data Bitss asocio ioiiseitetoieneuveituise iit teens 3 30 levy
271. of the drive mechanism Orient the ID letter toward port 5 of the valve body see Figure 7 13 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 27 Servicing Testing and Replacing the Ignitor 7 28 Testing and Replacing the ignitor Model 55i Instruction Manual ROTOR TAB ID LETTER Figure 7 13 Location of the ID Letter on the Rotor 2 Insert the rotor into the valve body again being careful that the tab doesn t touch the polished interior of the valve body Make sure the rotor tab is fully inserted into the slot in the driver Using a pencil or other small pointed object hold the rotor in place in the valve body while the magnet is pulled free 3 Replace the knurled pre load assembly tightening it into the valve body by hand just beyond the point where it touches the rotor Cycle the valve ten times to seat the sealing surfaces leaving the valve fully in its clockwise or counterclockwise position 4 Tighten the pre load in quarter turn increments cycling the valve ten times after each step The pre load must end up fully bottomed out but attempts at further tightening will not affect the sealing forces Note Make certain that the valve is never left partially actuated It should always be in either a fully clockwise or fully counterclockwise position A The FID flame ignition is achieved by applying a controlled voltage to an ignitor that screws into the side of the detector housing The ignitor contains
272. of the screen indicates the current status of the instrument and operating mode During power up the title bar displays HOT START WARM START or COLD START After 15 seconds the title bar will change to WARMING UP During normal operation the title bar displays the measurement mode as AUTO RUN MODE SINGLE RUN MODE or IDLE MODE 3 6 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview If the column conditioning function is started then the title bar displays CONDITIONING COLUMN for the duration of the conditioning If the flame detection has been bypassed then the title bar displays FLAME DETECTION BYPASSED instead of the run mode The first line on the run screen labeled CH4 displays the current methane reading The second line labeled NM displays the current non methane reading If the unit is configured or programmed for continuous operation a run screen similar to that shown below will appear on the front display Pressing will cancel a run The INJ TIME field shows what time the sample was injected for the current data being displayed on the run screen The left side of the message field displays the current measurement run state SAMPLING INJECT BACKFLUSH PROCESSING DONE CANCELED or PURGE The right side of the message field displays the FID status FLAME OUT PRESSURE W
273. ogram attach a source of hydrocarbon free air to the sample inlet and with the pump on run a series of five to seven analysis cycles Be sure to include a vent or atmospheric pressure dump in the sampling system to prevent pressurizing the inlet After two to three analysis cycles the methane and non methane readings should drop to 0 00 ppm and the associated peaks should disappear from the chromatogram As illustrated in Figure 2 10 the chromatogram will show one small peak representing oxygen that was not present in the blank chromatogram Also it should be noted that many zero air sources do not completely remove methane and it is not unusual for the zero air chromatogram to show a small peak at the normal location of methane Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Running Test Chromatograms Span The final test chromatogram should be run with a calibration mixture containing methane and a non methane hydrocarbon in air For most applications a mixture containing approximately 2 ppm each of methane and propane will provide a good test gas As with the zero test the gas mixture for the span test gas should be introduced through the sample inlet and a vent should be included to avoid pressurizing the system Methane Peak Non Methane Peak Air Peak Backflush Injection Span Zero Gas Carrier Gas Blank wo RANE ae oS i MEE IS BENED 5 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 Elapsed Time s
274. ohm J5 Filter Heater FLT 140 ohm 10 ohm 3 Ifthere is a short circuit to ground in the heater circuits on the measurement interface board there will be continuity between any pin in any of the three connectors and ground Test with the multimeter between ground and each pin If the circuit shows anything other than open contact the service center for further instructions Use the following procedure to test the temperature sensors 4 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Prior to removing any connectors note their location in order to facilitate re connection Note The instrument needs to cool completely to ambient temperature P y P prior to testing the temperature sensors A 5 Flame Thermocouple Disconnect the flame thermocouple from the measurement interface board J15 Connect the flame thermocouple to the electronic temperature gauge The measurement value should be equivalent to the current ambient temperature 5 C 6 Filter Base Thermocouple Disconnect the filter thermocouple from the measurement interface board J12 Connect the filter base thermocouple to the electronic temperature gauge The measurement value should be equivalent to the current ambient temperature 5 C 7 Detector Base Thermocouple Disconnect the detector base thermocouple from the measurement interface board J13 Connect the detector base thermocouple to the electronic temperature gauge The measurement val
275. ollow the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the motherboard Figure 7 25 Equipment Required Motherboard Philips screwdriver Nut driver 3 16 inch Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement Interface Board Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing Measurement Interface Board Replacement Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement procedure in this chapter 3 Remove the digital output board See the Digital Output Board Replacement procedure in this chapter 4 Unplug all connectors from the motherboard Note connector locations to facilitate re connection 5 Using the nut driver remove the eight standoffs securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 26 6 Pop the motherboard off of the support bracket and remove the motherboard 7 To install the motherboard follow the previous steps in reverse 8 Calibrate the analog voltage outputs as defined earlier in this chapter all ranges Use the following procedure to replace the measurement interface board Figure 7 27 Equipment Required Measurement interface board Philips s
276. ollowing procedure to calibrate the input board WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A Note The flame must not be lit when performing an input board calibration A Thermo Fisher Scientific DC Power Supply Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific N Servicing DC Power Supply Replacement 1 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration The Input Board Calibration menu appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 Atthe Input Board Calibration menu choose Automatic Input Cal which automatically calibrates the input board and stores the D A value If preferred the user may choose the Manual Input Cal function and use the following procedure to perform the calibration 3 The screen displays the frequency at GAIN 1 Make a note of the FREQ value displayed then press or to change the GAIN to 100 4 Atthe GAIN 100 screen use t to increment or decrement the D A counts until the FREQ value matches or is slightly above within 50 counts the value noted in the previous step 5 Press to store the value The screen flashes Calculating Please Wait and Done Values Saved messages Use the following procedure to replace the DC power supply Figure 7 7 Equipment Required DC power supply Philips screwdriver Equipm
277. on the instrument to ensure proper operation Since usage and environmental conditions vary greatly the components should be inspected frequently until an appropriate maintenance schedule is determined This chapter includes the following preventive maintenance information e Safety Precautions on page 5 1 e Cleaning the Outside Case on page 5 2 e Visual Inspection and Cleaning on page 5 2 e Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning on page 5 2 e Internal Sample Filter Cleaning on page 5 3 e Pump Rebuilding on page 5 5 Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 5 1 Preventive Maintenance Cleaning the Outside Case Cleanin the Outside Clean the outside case using a damp cloth being careful not to damage the 8 P 8 8 C ase labels on the case T Equipment Damage Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Visual Inspection and The instrument should be insp
278. or upper limit the status of that item will go from OK to either LOW or HIGH respectively If the alarm is not a level alarm the status will go from OK to FAIL The total number of alarms detected is displayed at the top of the menu to indicate how many alarms have occurred To see the actual reading of an item and its minimum and maximum limits move the cursor to the item and press Items displayed are determined by the options installed Flame Out CH4NMHC Overrange Data Integrity Heater Fail Temperature Sensor Fail Window Sanity and CH4 NM Cal Fail are display only The External Alarms menu is displayed only if assigned as a digital input The Motherboard Status Interface Status and I O Expansion Status if che I O expansion board is installed indicate that the power supplies are working and the connections are successful There are no setting screens for these alarms If any alarms are active the alarm bell icon is displayed on the right side of the status bar e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Thermo Fisher Scientific Internal Temperature Min and Max Internal Temperature Limits Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu The Internal Temperature screen displays the current internal temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 8 to 47 C If the internal temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit
279. ormal Chromatograms 6 24 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Performance Problems Gas Leak in Column The chromatograms shown in Figure 6 4 illustrates the effect of a leak in Thermo Fisher Scientific Oven the chromatographic system In this case the leak is located at the backflush end of the column As seen in the blank chromatogram a leak usually causes the baseline to shift each time the valve is actuated This shift is caused by a difference in the carrier flow rates in the inject and backflush portions of the chromatogram In addition if the leak develops after system optimization the peak retention times may be noticeably affected In this case the NMHC peak is severely delayed by the decreased flow rate during the backflush Span Gas Zero Air Carrier Gas 5 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 Elapsed Time sec Figure 6 4 Gas Leak in Column Oven Chromatograms Model 55i Instruction Manual 6 25 Troubleshooting Performance Problems Contaminated This set of chromatograms in Figure 6 5 shows one possible result of Carrier Gas hydrocarbon contamination in the carrier gas At the point of injection the baseline signal jumps up and then starts a very gradual downward slope When the valve switches to the backflush position the baseline either stays at the same level or in some cases will jump to an even higher level and then drop off through the rest of the analysis The same pattern is
280. orts sets the non methane response factor B 34 return ch4 cal chk Reports result of the most recent methane cal check run B 29 return nm cal chk Reports result of the most recent non methane cal check run B 29 ri right Simulates pressing right pushbutton B 31 ru run Simulates pressing run pushbutton B 31 sampling time Reports sets the sampling delay B 35 save Stores parameters in FLASH B 40 save params Stores parameters in FLASH B 40 sc screen C series legacy command that reports a generic response B 32 Use iscreen instead service alarm status Reports state of service alarm B 18 sp field Reports sets item number and name in scratch pad list B 27 span conc c1 Reports sets methane 1 span gas concentration B 29 span conc c1 high Reports sets methane 3 span gas concentration B 29 span conc c1 low Reports sets methane 3 span gas concentration B 29 span conc c1 med Reports sets methane 3 span gas concentration B 29 span conc nm Reports sets non methane 1 span gas concentration B 29 span conc nm high Reports sets non methane 3 span gas concentration B 29 span conc nm low Reports sets non methane 3 span gas concentration B 29 span conc nm med Reports sets non methane 3 span gas concentration B 29 Sr Reports the last srec stored B 23 srec Reports maximum number of srecs B 23 srec format Reports sets output format for srecs ASCII or binary B 24 srec layout Reports current layout of srec data B 25 srec mem size Reports maximum number of srecs that can b
281. oth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A 2 QI 2 ea Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap The firmware can be updated by the user in the field via the serial port or over the Ethernet This includes both the main processor firmware and the firmware in all low level processors Refer to the Port manual for the firmware update procedure If the Service menu is not displayed on the Main Menu use the following procedure to display it 1 From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode The Service Mode screen appears 2 Press to toggle the Service Mode to ON 3 Press W gt to return to the Main Menu 4 Return to the procedure Thermo Fisher Scientific Replacement Parts Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Replacement Parts List Table 7 1 lists the replacement parts for the Model 55 major subassemblies Refer to Figure 7 2 to identify the component location List g p Table 7 1 Model 55i Replacement Parts Part Number Description 100480 00 Front Panel Pushbutton Board 101491 32 Processor Board 1
282. ow the detector and three Teflon insulators Each time the detector is opened the O rings should be replaced Teflon insulators should last for at least two years of normal operation In most cases metal parts of the detector do not need to be replaced and can be cleaned and re used Use the following procedure for rebuilding the detector Equipment Required Detector rebuild kit Philips screwdriver Needle nose piers Hex wrench set Wrench 5 16 inch Wrench 7 16 inch Wrench 1 2 inch Wrench 9 16 inch Screw starter long handled flat blade optional but very useful Pick for removing O rings angled fine pointed optional Clean cloth or paper towels lint free Clean beaker or other vessel Laboratory detergent such as Alconox Clean solvent such as Methanol or Acetone Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Remove the detector assembly from the lower detector base see Removing the Detector earlier in this chapter and remove the signal and bias pogo assemblies Note If there is a short to ground in either pogo assembly recheck the continuity measurement of these assemblies while they are removed and contact the service center A Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Detector Rebuilding Remove the four flat head screws securing
283. ower must be cycled after any of these parameters have been changed for the change to take effect A Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 35 Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings TCP IP Settings erin nmtTgprm ri ihi Lil Li EE vs Ties EEE i Use DHCP The Use DHCP screen is used to specify whether to use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or not When DHCP is enabled the network dynamically provides an IP address for the instrument e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Use DHCP curt Smile Tr iY 5 EE POEL i PRESET BPD EPOPEE Eunet Bone oh E Tunt F n Pe Pike E F IP Address The IP Address screen is used to edit the IP address The IP address can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt IP Addr 3 36 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Netmask Default Gateway Host Name Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Netmask screen is used to edit the netmask The netmask is used to determine the subnet on which the instrument can directly communicate to other devices The netmask can only be chang
284. performed by flooding the sample inlet with a span mix containing known concentrations of methane and NMHC prepared in hydrocarbon free air The instrument injects a sample of the span gas and runs a complete chromatogram During the analysis a series of background or zero readings are taken at times when no hydrocarbons are expected to elute from the column The FID s response to the known concentrations of methane and non methane hydrocarbons is also recorded and calibration factors that relate concentration to FID response are calculated The following sections discuss the calibration process and procedures for calibrating the instrument Model 55i Instruction Manual 4 1 Calibration Frequency of Calibration Frequency of Calibration Selecting Calibration Mixture Span Gas Composition 4 2 Model 55i Instruction Manual e Frequency of Calibration on page 4 2 e Selecting Calibration on page 4 2 e Connecting the Calibration Gas on page 4 4 e Calibration Menus on page 4 4 e Manual Calibration Procedure on page 4 7 Each instrument is calibrated and tested for accuracy at the factory The calibration and accuracy tests are run using mixed methane and propane standards at concentrations ranging from 2 0 to 2000 ppm A copy of the test results is included in the instrument packet Although data from the factory calibration test is stored in memory the operator must calibrate the instrument prior to
285. press _ to calibrate the input voltage for the selected channel connected to the source voltage 6 Press gt W Jto return to the input channels display and repeat Steps 3 5 to calibrate other input channels to the source voltage as necessary Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 21 Servicing Thermistor Replacement Thermistor Use the following procedure to replace the ambient temperature thermistor Replacement Equipment Required Thermistor assembly Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Squeeze the thermistor latch and pull the thermistor assembly from the AMB TEMP connector on the measurement interface board 3 Snap the new thermistor assembly into the AMB TEMP connector Thermistor Figure 7 9 Replacing the Thermistor Ambient Tempe rature Use the following procedure to calibrate the ambient internal temperature Calibration for the instrument Equipment Required Calibrated thermometer or 10 K 1 Resistor 7 22 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Ambient Temperature Calibration WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A If the
286. r a simple two point calibration will provide good accuracy and repeatability for measurements taken Model 55i Instruction Manual 4 3 Calibration Connecting the Calibration Gas Connecting the Calibration Gas Calibration Menus Calibration Parameters 4 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual throughout the measurement range As a general rule the instrument will be accurate to within 296 at sample concentrations ranging from 2096 to 120 of the span concentration Readings taken outside that range are usually accurate but may be considered suspect until confirmed by re calibration Calibration gas is introduced through the sample inlet If the calibration gas is run through the analyzer Span In and Span Out ports the instrument will control when the span gas is turned on and off However the calibration gas must still be connected to the sample line external to the instrument To the extent possible calibration gas should be introduced to the sample inlet in a manner that simulates the introduction of actual sample That is if the installation includes a long sample line and a probe the span gas should be introduced at the probe not at the back of the instrument If a span gas cylinder is connected directly to the instrument an atmospheric pressure dump or by pass must also be included to prevent pressurizing the sample inlet A simple vent system is shown in Figure 2 3 Some examples of acceptable configurations for the span
287. r Pere dule 4 4 Gas COMCEIETATIONTS sxx urbi sai nates Great bom Due e vel dnsinstendeownat Rp eerta 4 5 Au to Calibration SEED oec qose ccs utendi acte sa dtes 4 5 Auto Verca n sos ino s ia tle aie Nona ds 4 6 Minimum Verification Cycles ie ees de aerei det 4 6 Use Zero Chromatopratm 3 22 ette ente tea aceti uea eue tun 4 6 Reset User Cal Default easi eee orate irte dede 4 6 ellc m 4 7 Cali ra Gt cesta te ore ite Rea E MEM 4 7 Calibration CHeckeosa ud ote te Seater aetna scientes nl 4 7 Do Zero CrOmatOBraliteec pot ete quic oec onte 4 7 Manual Calibration Procedure tue eitis fefiitaeti beste 4 7 Zero Ghromatogfanm a xctl te donet sce ounce puede ten tinge 4 9 Performing a Zero Chromiatogram i eto eee 4 9 Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance s cscsscssssssssssessesssesessssesnesneseetenesnesneeeeaeenees 5 1 Safety PEeCAUIONSC an oops Mo oe tae treu DN a NR ai 5 1 Cleaning the Outside Case iuste ei eae itae adus 5 2 Visual Inspection and CIeaminp oes ce oreet o Pad tita us 5 2 Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning oinnes eiie quale 5 2 Internal Sample Filter leaning 553 Gita rate ae ersten crest 5 3 Pamp Rebinldimg aue ete Tested aE Eis 5 5 Chapter 6 illuni 6 1 Safety Drecautiolls iat sek sete tanen ec p Rer 6 1 Firmware Diagnostic Information a i t rte td eon ierra stg 6 2 Troubleshooting Guldes uoce he erben te eet ee eis 6 2 xii Model 55i Instruction Manual
288. r detector base onto the detector cover Screw the signal and bias pogo assemblies back into the detector cover Feed the signal and bias pogo assemblies through the oven wall clearance holes and position the detector over the base Use caution when assembling the upper detector base to the lower detection base to avoid damage to the Teflon boss located on the underside of the upper detector mounting base Screw the detector assembly down to the lower base remembering to re connect the ignitor ground wire with one of the screws Place a new O ring into the hole on top of the detector and replace the thermocouple retainer loosely Insert the flame sensor thermocouple and tighten the two screws until snug Rotate the sensor while inserting it through the O ring to avoid cutting the rubber Re install the ignitor if necessary and re connect the ignitor power cable Re connect the bias and signal cables to the correct locations Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Detector Rebuilding 19 Re connect the exhaust vent tube to the detector Note Following an FID rebuild the instrument requires a burn in time of 48 to 72 hours The instrument can be used during burn in but requires more frequent calibration A Figure 7 15 Rebuilding the Detector Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 37 Servicing Internal Sample Filter Replacement Table 7 6 Part Number and Drawing Reference for Detector Assembly
289. r the older model pump following this procedure To replace the pump see Pump Replacement in the Servicing chapter Equipment Required Pump repair kit Allen wrench 3mm Screwdriver Philips Screwdriver slotted Wrench 9 16 inch Needle nose pliers Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Model 55i Instruction Manual 5 5 Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding 5 6 Model 55i Instruction Manual Loosen the fittings and remove both lines going to the pump Loosen the four screws holding the pump plate to the flow of the instrument Unplug the pump power connector from the measurement interface board and remove the pump assembly from the instrument Remove the four screws from the compressor housing cover and remove the cover Remove the four screws and from the top plate remove top plate flapper valve and bottom plate Turn the fan until the diaphragm is positioned at the top dead center Unscrew the old diaphragm by turning it counterclockwise using both hands While unscrewing the diaphragm with one hand use the other hand to secure the support cup and shim rings onto the diaphragm stud Lift the diaphr
290. rating ranges of 100 to 240 VAC The internal pump and heaters all operate on 110 VAC An optional internal transformer is required if operating on the 210 250 VAC or 90 110 VAC ranges Model 55i Instruction Manual 8 5 System Description Electronics Motherboard Measurement Interface Board Measurement Interface Board Connectors 8 6 Model 55i Instruction Manual An on off switch controls all power to the analyzer and is accessible on the front panel The motherboard contains the main processor power supplies and a sub processor and serves as the communication hub for the instrument The motherboard receives operator inputs from the front panel function keys and or over I O connections on the rear panel The motherboard sends commands to the other boards to control the functions of the instrument and to collect measurement and diagnostic information The motherboard outputs instrument status and measurement data to the graphics display and to the rear panel I O The motherboard also contains I O circuitry and the associated connector to monitor external digital status lines and to output analog voltages that represent the measurement data Connectors located on the motherboard include External connectors e External Accessory to external converter e RS 232 485 Communications two connectors e Ethernet Communications e I O connector with Power Fail Relay 16 Digital Inputs and 6 Analog Voltage Outputs Interna
291. ration Service Menu High Range Gain Factor Calibration Factors EDEIZE Pria 3 84 Model 55i Instruction Manual The High Range Gain Factor screen is used to enter the high range gain factor This is the multiplication factor between the low and high gain settings on the input board e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Crucial Settings Gain Factors gt High Range The Calibration Factors menu is used to automatically adjust the calibration factor for CH and NMHC during each calibration cycle As described earlier the CH calibration factor is calculated as the ratio of the span gas concentration divided by CH4 peak height and the NMHC cal factor is calculated as the NMHC span concentration divided by the NMHC peak area The Crucial Settings menu allows the calibration factors to manually adjust This procedure may be useful as a short term solution to operating the instrument when proper calibration gases are not available The screens below show the calibration factors for single span gas mode and three span gas mode low mid and hi For more information on number of span gases see Instrument Configuration on page 3 61 e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Crucial Settings gt Calibration Factors Thermo Fisher Scientific Methane Calibration Factor Non Methane Calibration Factor Set Pressure and Thermo Fisher Scientific Flow Operation Service Menu The Methane Calibration Factor s
292. ration gas must be used The instrument is set to measure and interpret the highest peak as the methane concentration Since ambient air is 2 ppm methane a calibration gas standard with a balance of nitrogen is required Various grades or qualities of span gas are available However it should be noted that the accuracy of the Model 55 measurement can be no better than the accuracy of the calibration standard For most applications a calibration gas that has been analyzed with an accuracy of 296 will be sufficient If the sample being monitored is known to contain specific hydrocarbons other than methane and propane a custom span gas containing those same components can often be obtained In most cases a custom mixture that is similar to the gas stream being monitored will provide the most accurate calibration However custom mixtures are more expensive and may be less stable Information concerning custom calibration gases can be obtained from scientific gas suppliers Model 55i Instruction Manual 2 7 Installation Connecting Support Gases Connecting Support Gases Sample Inlet 2 8 Model 55i Instruction Manual As a GC based system the Model 55 automatically resets the baseline during each analysis thus a separate zero gas is not essential for calibration If required by regulations or the specific application a zero chromatogram can be run to establish an instrument baseline that will then be subtracted from subsequent
293. rec containing just the current NMHC level could be generated every 5 minutes while an lrec containing a full set of diagnostic data could be generated once every hour The analyzer s computer system includes three megabytes of flash memory which is enough to store a full Irec containing 32 data items and a full srec containing 32 items once each minute for a week gt 20 000 total records If logging is limited to the minimum content of date time NMHC concentration and error flags the analyzer can store data once each minute for 4 months gt 190 000 total records The Datalogging Settings menu allows the user flexibility in how data is stored and recorded e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu EueZE Th Zo DEN et i Select Srec Lrec The Select Srec Lrec screen is used to select the log record type for other operations in this menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Srec Lrec View Logged Data The View Logged Data screen is used to select the starting point to view the logged data by the number of records or by date and time Note that both types of records cannot be viewed at the same time only the selected record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings View Logged Data Number of Records The Number of Records screen is
294. removed A Avoid contact with the heated oven components Allow the oven to cool to room temperature before handling oven components A small fan directed into the oven will speed cooling A If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Do not disassemble the valve unless the system malfunction is definitely isolated to the valve perform all other system checks first If disassembly is required make certain the instructions that follow are carefully observed A Any contact between the interior of the valve body and the metal of the rotor or any tool is likely to cause damage A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 3 Servicing Firmware Updates Firmware Updates Accessing the Service Mode 7 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cl
295. rent output channels 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA and eight analog voltage inputs 0 10 V The DB25 connector on the rear panel provides the interface for these inputs and outputs The 25 pin terminal board assembly is included with the optional I O expansion board Refer to Terminal Board PCB Assemblies in the Installation chapter for information on attaching the cable to the connector board For associated part numbers refer to the Servicing chapter The optional terminal block and cable kits provide a convenient way to connect devices to the instrument These kits break out the signals on the rear panel connector to individual numbered terminals Two types of terminal block and cable kits are available One kit is for the DB37 connectors and can be used for either the analog output connector or the relay output connector The other kit is for the DB25 connector and can be used for the optional I O expansion board For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 Model 55i Instruction Manual 9 1 Optional Equipment Cables Cables 9 2 Model 55i Instruction Manual Each kit consists of e one six foot cable e one terminal block e one snap track Note Supporting all of the connections on units with the optional I O expansion board requires e two DB37 kits e one DB25 kit Table 9 1 identifies the optional individual cables that are available for the instrument and Table 9 2 provi
296. replaced If the reading is within range continue with step 2 A 2 To test the connection between the bias power supply and the FID turn the main power OFF and remove the IGN BIAS connector J27 from the measurement interface board 3 Connect the multimeter between the bias pin 3 in the connector and instrument ground and check that it shows an open circuit Any indication of continuity shows a short in the wire or at the detector To test the interconnect cable disconnect the BNC connection at the bias pogo and check the continuity between the BNC center pin and pin 3 of J27 plug The reading should indicate continuity 5 To test the bias pogo disconnect instrument power open the oven and allow cooling Once cooled remove the bias pogo from the detector housing using a 7 16 inch wrench It may be necessary to remove the signal pogo to gain access to the bias pogo Once the bias pogo is removed check for continuity between the BNC center socket and the tip of the plunger The reading should indicate continuity The FID detector can be removed from the instrument as a single unit It might be easier to service after removing the whole detector and in some circumstances it is necessary see Figure 7 14 Use the following procedure to remove the detector Equipment Required Philips screwdriver Hex wrench set Wrench open end 5 16 inch Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 31 Servicing Removing the Detector 7 32 Mode
297. required e g instrument address of 1 is represented as 001 or lt SP gt lt SP gt 1 The default instrument address is 55 The instrument address is the same as the Instrument ID used for C Link and MODBUS commands This can be set via the front panel The instrument address is represented by lt address gt in the examples throughout this document Note Device IDs 128 through 247 are not supported because of limitations imposed by the C Link protocol A The following is a list of abbreviations used in this document CR is abbreviation for Carriage Return ASCII code 0x0D lt STX gt is abbreviation for Start of Text ASCII code 0x02 lt ETX gt is abbreviation for End of Text ASCII code 0x03 SP is abbreviation for space ASCII code 0x20 The following is the basic structure of a Geysitech command STX Command text lt ETX gt lt BCC gt OR STX Command text lt CR gt Each command is framed by control characters STX at the start and terminated with either lt ETX gt or CR If a command is terminated with ETX then two additional characters lt BCC gt is attached after lt ETX gt This is the block checksum Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt may be added to the command to prevent processing invalid commands Thermo Fisher Scientific Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt Geysitech Commands Instrument Control Command ST Thermo Fisher Scientific Geysitech Bayern Hessen Proto
298. rformance Problems Model 55i Instruction Manual Table 6 10 Troubleshooting Performance Problems Alarm Message Possible Cause Not Repeatable Carrier pressure out of adjustment Gas flows not optimized Sampling system leaks Bias voltage bad Carrier contamination Insufficient span flow Action Check methane retention time and adjust to 12 13 seconds by changing carrier pressure Check and adjust support air and fuel pressures and if necessary re optimize Check for leaks or pressure fluctuations at sample inlet Check detector bias voltage as described in general guide troubleshooting section Check chromatogram baseline while running blanks Re condition column Replace gas scrubbers and use higher quality carrier Check that span flow rate is higher than the instrument sampling rate Non Linear Response Sample exceeds current instrument range Gas flows incorrect Bad calibration Span gas supply and sample inlet flow don t match Chromatograms baseline is not flat Check the range setting in the Range menu and adjust as necessary If sample exceeds maximum range consult Thermo Fisher Scientific Service Department Check and adjust support gas pressures at the instrument Check calibration factors in Crucial Settings menu and re calibrate Check that span flow is sufficient and that excess flow is vented Check test chromatograms against samples detailed in
299. rier min 5 0 psi set alarm pressure carrier min value set alarm pressure carrier max value Model 55i Instruction Manual B 17 C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics Diagnostics B 18 Model 55i Instruction Manual These commands set the carrier pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the carrier pressure alarm limits in pounds per square inch The following example sets the carrier pressure alarm maximum value to 10 psi Send set alarm pressure carrier max 10 Receive set alarm pressure carrier max 10 ok service alarm status This command reports the status of the service alarm status as on or off The service alarm is active if any alarms other than concentration alarms are active The following reports that service alarm status is off Send service alarm status Receive service alarm status off alarm trig conc cl alarm trig conc nm These commands report the current methane or the non methane concentration alarm trigger action for the minimum alarm to either floor or ceiling The following example shows the C1 concentration minimum alarm trigger to ceiling according at Table B 4 Send alarm trig conc c1 Receive alarm trig conc c1 1 set alarm trig conc cl value set alarm trig conc nm value These commands set the methane or the non methane concentration alarm minimum value where value is set to either floor or ceiling according to Table B 4 The follo
300. rification is ON Values are between 2 default and 5 The Use Zero Chromatogram screen allows the user to choose whether to use a previously stored zero chromatogram for baseline correction or not For additional discussion of this feature see Zero Chromatogram in this chapter The Reset User Cal Default screen allows the user to reset calibration settings to default values Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Calibration Check Do Zero Chromatogram Manual Calibration Procedure Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Manual Calibration Procedure The calibration screen presents three commands These allow the operator to initiate a manual calibration a manual calibration check or to do a zero chromatogram Each procedure is described below Selecting Manual Calibration will trigger a calibration cycle The span solenoid will open to allow the calibration mixture to flow into the sample line The instrument will pause for 30 seconds then inject a span gas and measure the methane and non methane peaks Calibration factors which relate peak size to gas concentration will be calculated using the span gas values that were entered in the Calibration Parameters menu If the auto verification option is set to ON the span solenoid will stay open and the calibration cycle will be repeated The calibration cycle will continue to repeat until two consecutive calibrations agree to within 2 If 2 repeatability i
301. roubleshooting tool to ensure that the input board is working properly The gain setting and test mode are reset upon exiting this screen That is no changes are saved Note that this screen can be used while the flame is still lit and is mainly for diagnostic purposes Thermo Fisher Scientific Temperature Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Leak Test Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration gt Input Frequency Disp e Press to leave warning screen e Use f Jand to toggle the test signal between ON and OFF The test signal allows the input board and measurement interface board circuitry to be tested independent of the FID hardware e Use Jand gt to change the gain between 1 10 and 100 Zo p tithe The Temperature Calibration screen allows the user to view and set the ambient temperature sensor offset which basically adjusts the temperature sensor so that it reads correctly Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Temperature Calibration DuRHZE EAP TTD p i PRidUES ili Lii PLP PRE The Leak Test screen is used to set the analyzer into leak test configuration opening valves and controllers to facilitate the test To conduct a leak test the detector assembly must be replaced wit
302. rs are listed on the following pages A plumbing schematic is presented in Figure 1 4 Figure 1 4 Model 55i Flow Schematic Specifications Table 1 2 lists the specifications for the Model 557 Table 1 2 Model 55i Specifications Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement ranges CH4 and NMHC set independently 0 5 50 500 ppm 0 10 100 1000 ppm 0 20 200 2000 ppm 0 50 500 5000 ppm Limit of detection 50 ppb Analysis time Approximately 70 seconds Accuracy 1 of range Repeatability 2 of measured value or 50 ppb whichever is larger Drift without auto calibration 2 of span over 24 hours Ambient operating temperature 15 35 C Model 55i Instruction Manual 1 7 Introduction Specifications 1 8 Model 55i Instruction Manual Sample temperature Ambient to 80 C standard higher temperatures optional Sample flow rate 0 5 liter minute minimum Power requirements 100 VAC 50 60 Hz 115 VAC 50 60 Hz 220 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 420 Watts Support gases HC free air 275 350 cc min N carrier 35 70 cc min H2 fuel 25 50 cc min or mixed fuel 100 150 cc min Span mix 2 liter calibration Physical dimensions Weight Analog outputs 16 75 W X 8 62 H X 23 D Approximately 50 Ibs 6 voltage outputs 0 100 mV 1 5 10 V user selectable 596 of full scale over under range user selectable 12 bit resolutio
303. rument identification number If the instrument ID is set to 0 then this byte is not required For more information on changing Instrument ID see Chapter 3 Operation The analyzer must be in the remote mode in order to change instrument parameters remotely However the command set mode remote can be sent to the analyzer to put it in the remote mode Report commands commands that don t begin with set can be issued either in the remote or local mode For information on changing modes see Chapter 3 Operation The commands are not case sensitive Each command must begin with the proper instrument identification number ASCII character The command in the following example begins with the ASCII character code 183 decimal which directs the command to the Model 557 and is terminated by a carriage return CR ASCII character code 13 decimal Many of the commands have two forms One form reads parameter from the instrument s memory and the other writes or updates a parameter The syntax for a write command adds the word set in front of the command and provides an argument Command responses are generally echoed with a data element appended Note If the Service Mode is active C Link set commands are not allowed This is to prevent parameters from being changed remotely while the unit is being serviced locally A If an incorrect command is sent an error message is generated The list of error responses
304. ry line and the keyboard as well as to move within the keyboard To select a character to add to the string use the cursor keys to position the cursor over the desired character and then press the key to add that character to the entry line On the right side of the keyboard are special functions BKSP is used to move the cursor in the entry line one place to the left deleting the character that was to the left of the cursor and moving any character at or to the right of the cursor one place to the left PAGE is used to change the keyboard character page For the English language this switches between upper and lower case alphabetic characters SAVE stores the string from the entry line into the parameter Alternately if the active cursor is moved to the entry line may be pressed to store the string from the entry line into the parameter The Model 55 utilizes the menu driven firmware as illustrated by the flowchart in Figure 3 3 The Power Up screen shown at the top of the flowchart is displayed each time the instrument is turned on This screen is displayed while the instrument is warming up and performing self checks After the warm up period the Run screen is automatically displayed The Run screen is the normal operating screen This screen provides the measurement of methane and non methane organics along with some additional information concerning the instrument status From the Run screen the Main Menu can be displayed by
305. s Test Analog Outputs 3 60 Model 55i Instruction Manual The Digital Inputs screen read only displays the state of the 16 digital inputs If nothing is connected to an input the internal electronics will pull the voltage up to high and the input will read 1 If a device is connected to an input the user configures whether the relay is normally open or normally closed see Digital Input Settings earlier in this chapter This will dictate whether the input is brought to high 1 or to ground 0 to call for an action e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Digital Inputs The Relay States screen displays the state of the 10 digital outputs and allows toggling of the state to either on 1 or off 0 The relays are restored to their original states upon exiting this screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Relay States e Press to toggle and set the relay state to open or closed for the selected digital output ip ouod Pil pihe fiini i The Test Analog Outputs menu is used to set each of the analog output channels to zero or full scale Channel choices include all analog outputs 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels if the I O expansion board option is installed e In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Set Analog Outputs The Set Analog Outputs screen contains three choices Set to full scale set to z
306. s are formed by two characters each representing a 2 digit hex number which is one byte 8 Bits operation status and one byte 8 Bits error status These two bytes contain the information about the main operating conditions of the instrument at that instant For details on how to interpret the status bytes refer to Table D 1 and Table D 2 below Model 55i Instruction Manual D 5 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands lt SFKT gt is the space provided for future use for special function It currently contains a string of ten 0 s i e 0000000000 Example Geysitech Protocol with transmission of three concentrations Instrument ID is 1 Operation Status is 03 Error Status is 04 Data Query String lt STX gt DA lt CR gt Reply String lt STX gt MDO3 lt SP gt 001 lt SP gt 2578 01 lt SP gt 03 SP 04 SP 0000000000 SP 002 SP i 7 T Address First Concentration E format 25 78 Address 1 5681 00 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000 lt SP gt 003 lt SP gt 1175 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP T T T Second Concentration 5 681 Address 2 Third Concentration 11 75 0000000000 lt SP gt lt CR gt The attached concentrations are in the selected gas units The measurements that are attached to the response if not valid in a particular mode will report a value of 0 0 Measurements reported in The following 3 measurements reported in response to DA command for e Methane e Non Methane
307. s appendix Table C 2 Read Registers for 55i Register Number Variable 0 INVALID 1 amp 2 METHANE 3 amp 4 NMHC 5 amp 6 THC 7 amp 8 DETECTOR TEMP 9 amp 10 FILTER TEMP 11 amp 12 COLUMN TEMP 13 amp 14 FLAME TEMP 15 amp 16 INTERNAL TEMP 17 amp 18 AIR PRESSURE 19 amp 20 CARRIER PRESSURE 21 amp 22 FUEL PRESSURE 23 amp 24 RAW SIGNAL 25 amp 26 FLAME STATUS 27 amp 28 CH4 PEAK HEIGHT 29 amp 30 CH4 PEAK RETENTION TIME 31 amp 32 CH4 BASELINE 33 amp 34 CH4 LOD 35 amp 36 NM PEAK HEIGHT 37 amp 38 NM PEAK AREA 39 amp 40 NM BASE START 41 amp 42 NM BASE END 43 amp 44 NM LOD 45 amp 46 NM START INDEX 47 amp 48 NM END INDEX Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Register Number Variable 49 amp 50 NM MAX SLOPE 51852 NM MIN SLOPE 53 amp 54 NM DATA POINTS 55 amp 56 ANALOG IN 1 57 amp 58 ANALOG IN 2 59 amp 60 ANALOG IN 3 61862 ANALOG IN 4 63 amp 64 ANALOG IN 5 65 amp 66 ANALOG IN 6 67 amp 68 ANALOG IN 7 69 amp 70 ANALOG IN 8 71872 EXTERNAL ALARMS IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the coil number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A Note Writing 1 to the coil number shown in the following
308. s not achieved within the user specified minimum number of verification cycles a fault alarm will be triggered and the instrument will continue to operate using the last valid calibration The Manual Calibration Check option allows the operator to check the repeatability or validity of the current calibration without making any adjustments When manual check is selected the span solenoid opens and floods the sample line with span gas A reading is then taken and compared to the original span reading that is stored in memory Results of the calibration check are available in the CH4 Span Check and NMHC Span Check from the Alarms menu Any error or difference between the two readings is displayed as percent error It should be understood that the calibration check function does not alter the instrument calibration It serves only as a convenient method of checking instrument drift or for evaluating possible calibration errors Do Zero Chromatogram triggers a run which will be stored as the new zero chromatogram The user must be sure that no air or sample is injected for this run For additional discussion see Zero Chromatogram in this chapter Use the following procedure to initiate a calibration 1 From the Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters Enter the span gas concentrations for the methane and non methane channels Model 55i Instruction Manual 4 7 Calibration Manual Calibration Procedure 4 8 Model 55i Instru
309. sampling system Use the following procedure to perform a zero chromatogram 1 Disconnect the sample line from the instrument sample inlet 2 Turn the pump OFF From the main menu choose Instrument Controls Pump Settings Select Always Off and press Model 55i Instruction Manual 4 9 Calibration Zero Chromatogram 3 Set the instrument to single run mode From the main menu choose Instrument Controls Set Operation Mode Select Single and press e 4 Press gt to return to the Run screen 5 Run at least three analysis cycles If possible use the FID SIG analog output or other means streamed raw data or dump run current C Link command to observe the baseline of the run Continue running cycles until the obtained signal trace is consistent 6 Runa zero chromatogram Press to return to the Main Menu and choose Calibration From the Calibration screen press 4 This will perform an analysis cycle and store the baseline data into the instrument for subtraction from subsequent analyses No concentrations are calculated for this run 7 Press W to return to the Main Menu and choose Calibration Parameters Use Zero Chromatogram Press toggle value to Yes to subtract the acquired zero chromatogram data from all analyses 4 10 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance This chapter describes the periodic maintenance procedures that should be performed
310. se in detergent solution If possible ultrasonic agitation is recommended for five to ten minutes otherwise just stir vigorously c Rinse all the parts with large amounts of clean water and set the Teflon pieces aside on a clean towel to dry Rinse ONLY the metal with acetone or methanol d If the detector base has been cleaned blow out any remaining liquid from the gas feed lines with clean compressed air or nitrogen Always apply pressure to the fitting end of the tube rather than the holes in the base Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 35 Servicing Detector Rebuilding 7 36 Model 55i Instruction Manual 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 e If possible dry all the pieces in an oven at 175 C for an hour and allow them to cool before reassembling Allow the pieces to dry overnight if no oven is available Place the wavy washer flat washer and O ring into the detector cover The O ring will hold the other pieces in place Place new O rings into the two channels on the lower detector base Place a new O ring onto the bottom of the jet plate around the jet tube and one onto the upper detector base Re assemble the remaining internal parts of the detector onto the upper base Carefully place the detector cover over the stack of pieces Be certain to orient the detector cover properly on the upper detector base Otherwise the FID air holes will not line up and no FID air will flow Screw the uppe
311. seen in all three chromatograms However it may be difficult to recognize the problem in the span chromatogram because the NMHC peak obscures the baseline shift that occurs during the backflush Note that higher levels of contamination may cause different patterns However in all cases carrier contaminants will produce an unstable baseline Zero Air Carrier Gas 5 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 Elapsed Time sec Figure 6 5 Contaminated Carrier Gas Chromatograms 6 26 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Performance Problems Contaminated Contaminated column chromatograms as shown in Figure 6 6 illustrate Column tbe effects of a badly contaminated column Looking at the blank chromatogram note that the baseline drops rapidly following injection and then stays relatively flat until the backflush Immediately following the backflush there is a slight drop in the baseline This is followed by an exponential rise that occurs from 5 to 30 seconds after the backflush Following the rise the baseline appears to re stabilize at the higher signal level Chromatograms made with span gas or with zero air show the same general shape but with the normal peaks superimposed over the unstable baseline Zero Air Carrier Gas 5 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 Elapsed Time sec Figure 6 6 Contaminated Column Chromatograms Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 6 27 Troubleshooting Pe
312. sembly has been identified as defective and needs to be replaced For fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter and the Troubleshooting chapter in this manual The service mode section in the Operation chapter also includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems For additional service assistance see Service Locations at the end of this chapter This chapter includes the following parts information and component replacement procedures e Safety Precautions on page 7 3 e Firmware Updates on page 7 4 e Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 e Replacement Parts List on page 7 5 e Cable List on page 7 6 e External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 e Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel on page 7 9 e Pump Replacement on page 7 10 e Fan Filter Replacement on page 7 12 e Input Board Replacement on page 7 13 e Input Board Calibration on page 7 14 e DC Power Supply Replacement on page 7 15 e Analog Output Testing on page 7 16 e Analog Output Calibration on page 7 19 e Analog Input Calibration on page 7 20 Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 1 Servicing Service Locations e Thermistor Replacement on page 7 22 e Ambient Temperature Calibration on page 7 22 e Fuel Calibraion Solenoid Valve Replacement on page 7 24 e 8 Port Valve Rotor Repl
313. ser will be required to correct the interference at his or her Own expense A The following symbol and description identify the WEEE marking used on the instrument and in the associated documentation Symbol Description Marking of electrical and electronic equipment which applies to waste electrical and electronic equipment falling under the Directive 2002 96 EC rn WEEE and the equipment that has been put on the market after 13 August 2005 A Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual Where to Get Help Where to Get Help Service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual v About This Manual Where to Get Help vi Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Chapter 1 IMP OUUG HOM eec T 1 1 Principle OL Operation artn nana ie Lente dicta e 1 2 Specie tns oae pesos reat oai V Badio cato eE uci ri 1 7 Chapter 2 Dante GUO mee ecaens 2 1 a of gh Or cat a Rec nS E EERIE EO Pat 2 1 Unpacking and Inspection I Pata etes ciet 2 2 Selecting Hardware and Support Gases esses 2 3 Gas Pressure Regulators ciue etti de Pe E Renan 2 4 Plumbing Lines and Tings eet mac neque eiat d cobi 2 4 Gas Serubhers erni ce nti t
314. service the original packing material should be re used It is especially important to cap all fittings and to wrap the instrument in plastic before shipment to avoid contamination of the gas lines with packing foam A Use the following procedure to unpack and inspect the instrument 1 Remove the instrument from its shipping container and set it on a table or bench that allows easy access to both the front and rear 2 Remove the instrument from the plastic bag and remove the caps or plugs that cover the gas fittings on the rear panel 3 Remove the cover to expose the internal components 4 Remove the packing material in the analyzer Figure 2 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Selecting Hardware and Support Gases l Remove Packing 2 pieces 1 Remove Packing ah 2 pieces 8 o e i Units without Optional I O Board Units with Optional 1 0 Board Selecting Hardware and Support Gases Thermo Fisher Scientific Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material 5 Check for possible damage during shipment 6 Check that all connectors and circuit boards are firmly attached 7 Re install the cover 8 Remove any protective plastic material from the case exterior The Model 55 requires a number of support gases and some external plumbing for operation It is important that support gases regulators gas lines gas scrubbers and fittings are
315. services or replacement parts that are not covered by the warranty provided in this warranty Buyer shall pay Seller therefor at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates ANY INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE REPAIR SERVICE RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF OR OTHER TAMPERING WITH THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY ANY PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT SELLER S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OR ANY USE OF REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY SELLER SHALL IMMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AFFECTED PRODUCTS THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PRODUCTS ARE ERROR FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH ANY PARTICULAR RESULT A 2 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands This appendix provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control a Model 55 analyzer using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger C Link protocol may be used over RS 232 RS 485 or Ethernet C Link functions can
316. set the selected content e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Erase Log Select Content The Select Content submenu displays a list of 32 record fields to use to configure the data to be logged When a field is selected a submenu list appears of the items to choose from to assign to those fields Item types are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed These record fields comprise a temporary list of items for the selected record type that must be committed via the datalogging menu before the changes will apply Note that committing any changes to this list will erase all currently logged data for the selected record type only as the format of the stored data is changed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Select Content EN DHOBM LP Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 25 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 3 26 Choose Field Data Concentrations Other Measurements Model 55i Instruction Manual The Choose Field Data submenu displays a list of the types of data that can be logged for the current field Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Field 1 32 The Concentrations screen allows the user to a
317. sp Test screen Service menu and step through each range with the test voltage on Gain 1 freq 5750 7500 Gain 10 freq 30000 35000 Gain 100 freq 275000 300000 Excessive response time Leak within the analyzer Carrier gas pressure too low Check for loose fittings in analyzer Check carrier pressure Analog signal doesn t match expected value Firmware has not been configured Analog output goes above full scale or below zero Recorder is loading down output Analog outputs are not calibrated Verify that the selected analog output has been properly configured to match the data system and that the outputs have been calibrated By default a 5 over and under range on the analog outputs is provided If this is not desirable due to system restrictions it may be turned off in the Instrument Controls IO Configuration Analog Output Config screens Verify that the recorder or data logger input impedance meets minimum requirements Run test of analog outputs under Diagnostics menu Table 6 3 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages Alarm Message Alarm Internal Temp Possible Cause Fan stopped Fan filter is dirty Sensor failed Action Replace fan if not operating properly Clean or replace foam filter refer to Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual Check 10K thermistor on measurement interface board replace if bad 6 6 Model 55i Instruction Manual T
318. ssible problems that follows the sample chromatograms or to check the instrument s Diagnostics menu described at the end of this chapter Model 55i Instruction Manual 6 23 Troubleshooting Performance Problems Normal When operating correctly instrument should produce chromatograms Chromatograms similar to those shown here The top chromatogram was obtained with a span gas containing 2 ppm each of methane and propane in air Note the relative size and position of the methane and air peaks As shown in Figure 6 3 the methane peak should have a retention time of 16 to 17 seconds and should be at least 1 5 times the size of the air peak The center chromatogram was produced by analysis of hydrocarbon free zero air As shown here good quality zero air should produce an air peak in the normal position but there should be no methane or NMHC peak The bottom chromatogram was obtained by turning the pump off and allowing the instrument to cycle without sample Note that the baseline is relatively flat and maintains the same signal level during injection and backflush The two small spikes represent pressure pulses that result from the rotary valve shifting position In some cases the pressure pulses may be larger but the baseline is fully stabilized within 5 seconds or less Methane Peak Non Methane Peak Air Peak Backflush Injection Span Zero Gas Carrier Gas 5 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 Elapsed Time sec Figure 6 3 N
319. ssign one of the concentrations to the selected record field The selected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Concentrations The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the selected record field The selected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Other Measurements Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Analog Inputs The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to assign an analog input signal none or analog inputs 1 8 to the selected record field The selected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content b
320. ssor to produce the final measurement values The tenth second accumulated counts representing the chromatogram are used to determine the CH4 and NMHC concentrations which are reported at the end of each discrete sample run The one second average of the other analog inputs such as oven temperature are reported directly no additional signal conditioning is performed by the high level processor The model 55 also provides a separate shielded analog output available through a BNC connector located on the rear panel This signal output is specifically for tapping into the FID raw signal and produces a real time non time stamped reproduction of the chromatogram emerging from the FID during a run It is provided for chromatographic signal diagnostic purposes The front panel display serial and Ethernet data ports and analog outputs are the means of communicating the results of the above calculations The front panel display presents the CH and NMHC concentrations The display is updated at the end of each run The analog output ranges are user selectable via the firmware The analog outputs are defaulted based on the measurement range Negative concentrations can be represented as long as they are within 5 of full scale The zero and full scale values may be set by the user to any desired value All electronics operate from a universal switching supply which is capable of auto sensing the input voltage and working over the specified ope
321. ssures in excess of 45 psi can reduce the service life of the valve actuator and pressures lower than 40 psi may cause erratic performance The same air source that supplies the combustion air can be used for the actuator air as long as the pressure is between 40 and 45 psi Alternatively less expensive air grades can be used to drive the valve The Model 55 FID operates most efficiently with high purity hydrogen fuel However pre mixed helium hydrogen fuel can also be used The air purity considerations discussed earlier can also apply to the fuel For critical applications ultra high purity hydrogen is available with purity levels of 99 999 percent or better For less demanding applications pre purified or zero grade fuels with total hydrocarbon content of less than 0 5 ppm will be adequate A good quality hydrogen generator is also an excellent source of FID fuel If the instrument operates with a mixed helium hydrogen fuel the ratio should be 40 hydrogen and 60 helium This is a standard mixture available from most scientific gas suppliers and is sold as FID fuel with a total hydrocarbon content of less than 0 5 ppm Thermo Fisher Scientific Carrier Gas Calibration Gas Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Selecting Hardware and Support Gases Note Operation with mixed fuel requires approximately 2 5 times higher fuel flow than hydrogen A special mixed fuel flow restrictor that provides adequate flow is available from
322. state and instrument parameter for the relay selected Note The digital inputs must be asserted for at least one second for the action to be activated A Note Not all of the I O available in the instrument is brought out on the supplied terminal board If more I O is desired an alternative means of connection is required See optional Terminal Block and Cable Kits A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Digital Input Settings DNI TREIT mt 4APTtd Bast ade 4i DEP USE CELL PME hae TEEN EE The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital input pin and ground is normally open and closes to trigger the digital input action e Press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or normally closed Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 41 Operation Instrument Controls Menu S PILRBOPUHPMSPO Instrument Action The Instrument Action submenu allows the user to choose the instrument action that is assigned to the selected digital input The zero and span modes are only present if the zero span valve option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Digital Input Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument Action Analog Output Configuration The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a
323. struction Manual A With the setting of the air and fuel complete all of the instrument gas flows are considered optimized If any changes are made to the sample flow the fuel and air setting may need to be re optimized to maintain the correct fuel to sample ratio Use the following procedure to replace the fuse Equipment Required Replacement fuses refer to the Replacement Parts List in this chapter 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the fuse drawer located on the AC power connector 3 Ifeither fuse is blown replace both fuses 4 Insert fuse drawer and re connect power cord Use the following procedure to replace the optional I O expansion board Figure 7 25 Equipment Required I O expansion board Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Unplug the I O expansion board cable from the EXPANSION BD connector on the motherboard 3 Remove the two standoffs holding the I O expansion board connector to the rear panel Figure 7 26 Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement 4 Pop the board off of the mounting studs and remove the board 5 To install the I O expansion board follow the pr
324. struction Manual 6 1 Troubleshooting Firmware Diagnostic Information Firmware Diagnostic Information Troubleshooting Guides 6 2 Model 55i Instruction Manual Diagnostic information that might be useful in troubleshooting hardware problems can be found in the Diagnostics menu Typical oven temperatures and support gas pressures for an instrument that is operating correctly are shown in Table 6 1 In most cases the values can vary some without causing problems Information available in the Model 55 Diagnostic menu is generally related to performance issues and is discussed in the appropriate section Table 6 1 Model 55i Firmware Diagnostic Information Oven Temperatures Detector Oven 170 to 180 C Filter 170 to 180 C Column Oven 70 to 85 C Flame 225 to 350 C Internal Ambient 7 C Support Gas Pressures Air 50 to 60 psi Fuel 50 to 60 psi Hydrogen 50 to 60 psi Mixed Helium Hydrogen Carrier Nitrogen 50 to 60 psi The troubleshooting guides presented in this chapter are designed to help isolate and identify instrument problems Table 6 2 provides general troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience an instrument problem Table 6 3 lists all the alarm messages you may see on the graphics display and provides recommendations about how to resolve the alarm condition See Alarms Menu in the Operation chapter for detailed informa
325. t channels available for configuration This screen is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed Configuration includes entering the Descriptor Units Decimal Places choice of 1 10 points in the table and corresponding number of points selected e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Analog Input Config Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 47 Operation Instrument Controls Menu pH ouod PLP pH sud PLP Descriptor The Descriptor screen allows the user to enter the descriptor or name for the selected analog input channel The descriptor is used in datalogging and streaming data to report what data is being sent out The descriptor may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to IN1 to IN8 user input channel number e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Descriptor Units The Units screen allows the user to enter the units for the selected analog input channel The units are displayed on the diagnostic screen and in datalogging and streaming data The units may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to V volts e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config select Channel Units 3 48 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu EH DHOBM LP Decimal
326. t with span gas Methane concentrations are measured using peak height measured from baseline references taken before and after the oxygen and methane elute from the column Due to the variability in peak shapes and retention times NMHCs are quantified based on peak area rather than height Because the instrument takes several references during each analysis a separate zero gas is not usually required for calibration Note however that the instrument does provide the option of running zero chromatograms if required Methane and non methane hydrocarbon concentrations are reported on the front panel digital display as methane CH4 and non methane NM respectively Concentration units are the same as those used in calibration and may be set to display parts per million ppm or parts per million carbon ppmc The front panel display also includes the time the sample was injected the instrument operating mode and various status messages Separate analog outputs on the rear panel indicate the results of the most recent methane and non methane analysis A dedicated analog output provides a continuous indication of the FID signal the chromatogram Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Specifications Other rear panel connections allow for remote operation of the unit either by dedicated control lines or with a bi directional RS 232 Ethernet computer link Performance specifications and a description of important instrument paramete
327. t Panel Board 7 3 p S Power Supply Transformer Motherboard 100 and 220 V option only Measurement Interface Board Figure 7 2 Model 55i Component Layout 7 8 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel Removing the The measurement case assembly can be removed and the partition panel can be lowered to improve access to connectors and components Refer to Measurement Case the following steps when a procedure requires lowering the partition panel Assembly and Lowering igure 7 3 the Partition Panel REMOVE SCREWS SLIDE CASE ASSEMBLY OUT Pass Through Connectors 4 Remove Screw Loosen Partition Panel Captive Screw ry Remove Screw LOWER PANEL Remove Hidden Screw Figure 7 3 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel Equipment Required Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 9 Servicing Pump Replacement Pump Replacement 7 10 Model 55i Instruction Manual 10 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord If the instrument is mounted in a rack remove it from the rack Remove the cover Disconnect th
328. t Reports sets delay time from injection to opening of the B 33 methane window cal check Initiates a calibration check cycle B 28 Model 55i Instruction Manual B 5 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 6 Model 55i Instruction Manual Command Description Page cal verify Reports sets whether calibration verification is set to on or B 28 off calibrate Initiates a calibration cycle B 28 carrier control Reports sets current carrier control pressure B 36 pressure carrier pressure Reports current carrier pressure B 10 clr Irecs Clears away only Irecs that have been saved B 22 clr records Clears away all logging records that have been saved B 22 clr srecs Clears away only srecs that have been saved B 22 column base temp Reports temperature at the column base B 10 column oven Reports sets the setpoint for the column oven B 36 condition column Reports sets column conditioning mode B 12 contrast Reports sets current screen contrast B 37 copy Irec to sp Sets copies current Irec selection into the scratch pad B 26 copy sp to Irec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into Irec list B 26 copy sp to srec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into srec list B 26 copy sp to stream Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into stream list B 26 copy srec to sp Sets copies current srec selection into the scratch pad B 26 copy stream to sp Sets copies current str
329. t etr perit retreat tiene 9 1 I O Expansion Board Assernblyc cett ctm tenete teet 9 1 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly edet iae tte ted tienda cet 9 1 Terminal Block and Cable BOts ameta cte ei adt ti d tene 9 1 Cables MEER SOPORE 9 2 Mounting prions qLocicpdon A DIR na a AA ne LAN E 9 3 Appendix A Warranty ucc itum ate icc ead au MEE A 1 Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands seen B 1 Instrument Identification Numa Der icc sada steade hy iavare weitere tae cess B 2 Gs aha ste hal Komen ote bo M od mM etc c ire ore Mast B 2 Commands Lise essc debt a oe ot ete en B 3 Nieasute ments coded ptite tid E el MG He Sdn B 10 Instrument Controlo errira eti ome ty eco B 12 Pint a B 13 Diagnostics E B 18 ata nt occ dederit omuia uon ie oec eti nde B 22 Calibration eo decode yatta a ieu bcp uen B 28 Keys Display C s B 31 Measurement Configuration 4 otra ete dre bad ne eue E Ra Ke da B 32 Hardware Configurations ond ooh trei bom dept m beta B 35 Communications Configuration sce ced ae buic italie pede B 40 VO confir ofc soe ee at Mte eM EL ac Ls B 48 Record Layout Detmbilon a ae enis t daetstnden tue tiendetdie B 53 Format Specifier for ASCII Responses eere B 53 Format Specifier for Binary Responses eene B 54 Format Specifier for Erec Layout etudes dcos B 54 po pe B 55 Value StEDE siete don don e i etie
330. table will initiate the action triggered listed in the table This state must be held for at least 1 second to ensure the instrument detects the change and triggers the appropriate action A Note The coils within each coil group in the following table are mutually exclusive and will not be triggered if there is conflict Before you assert 1 one coil in a group make sure the other coils in the group are de asserted 0 A Table C 3 Write Coils for 55i Coil Number Action Triggered 100 INVALID 101 INITIATE RUN 102 INITIATE CAL 103 INITIATE CAL CHECK 104 STOP 105 INJECT 106 BACKFLUSH Model 55i Instruction Manual C 11 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported C 12 Model 55i Instruction Manual Coil Number Action Triggered 107 SET IDLE MODE 108 AOUTS TO ZERO 109 AOUTS TO FS 110 EXTERNAL ALARM 1 111 EXTERNAL ALARM 2 112 EXTERNAL ALARM 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Serial Communication Thermo Fisher Scientific Parameters Appendix D Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol This appendix provides a description of the Geysitech Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The Geysitech commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The Geysitech protocol support for the Series enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and to trigger the i
331. ter to the channel to be tested Figure 7 8 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs The Test Analog Outputs screen appears Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Output Testing Press amp to scroll to the desired channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pins where the meter is connected and press The Set Analog Outputs screen appears Press to set the output to zero The Output Set To line displays Zero Check that the meter is displaying the zero value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full scale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows Press f to set the output to full scale The Output Set To line displays Full Scale Check that the meter is displaying a full scale value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full scale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows Press to reset the analog outputs to normal Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 17 Servicing Analog Output Testing HS e Current Outputs I Analog Voltage Inputs Analog Voltage Outputs 7 18 Model 55i Instruction Manual C Ne Figure 7 8 Rear Panel
332. thane concentration alarm B 14 maximum value alarm conc nm min Reports sets current non methane concentration alarm B 14 minimum value alarm detector temp Reports sets detector temperature alarm maximum value B 15 max alarm detector temp Reports sets detector temperature alarm minimum value B 15 min alarm filter temp Reports sets filter temperature alarm maximum value B 15 max alarm filter temp Reports sets filter temperature alarm minimum value B 15 min alarm internal temp Reports sets internal temperature alarm maximum value B 16 max alarm internal temp Reports sets internal temperature alarm minimum value B 16 min alarm nm chk max Reports sets current non methane cal check alarm maximum B 16 value alarm nm chk min Reports sets current non methane cal check alarm minimum B 16 value alarm pressure air Reports sets air pressure alarm maximum value B 16 max alarm pressure air Reports sets air pressure alarm minimum value B 16 min B 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page alarm pressure Reports sets carrier pressure alarm maximum value B 17 carrier max alarm pressure Reports sets carrier pressure alarm minimum value B 17 carrier min alarm pressure fuel Reports sets fuel pressure alarm maximum value B 17
333. the 7th element and the precision specifier is taken from the 8th If the asterisk were not present it would indicate instead that 8 digits after the decimal point should be displayed Thermo Fisher Scientific Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix C MODBUS Protocol This appendix provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The MODBUS commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The MODBUS protocol support for the iSeries enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and other measurement values read the status of the digital outputs of the analyzer and to trigger or simulate the activation of a digital input to the instrument This is achieved by using the supported MODBUS parameters listed below Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet For details of the Model 55i MODBUS Protocol specification see the following topics e Serial Communication Parameters on page C 1 e TCP Communication Parameters on page C 2 e Application Data Unit Definition on page C 2 e Function Codes on page C 3 e MODBUS Parameters Supported on page C 8 Additional information on the MODBUS protocol can be obtained at http www modbus org References are from MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1 1a MODBUS IDA June
334. the sample In the automatic or continuous operating mode the instrument initiates the next analysis by injecting another sample as soon as the non methane measurement is complete The time required for analysis of one sample is about 70 seconds However if rapid analysis times are not required the instrument cycle time can be slowed by specifying an extended Sampling Time in the Instrument Controls menu For applications with limited sample volume such as those involving sample collection in Tedlar or Teflon bags the instrument may be set to Single Analysis mode In this mode the analyzer completes one analysis and then pauses for operator input Model 55i Instruction Manual 1 5 Introduction Principle of Operation 1 6 Model 55i Instruction Manual volts SE SPON ID RE Methane 874 Jc M Oxygen oT Sigs 6 Heg M PER d i J4 4 7 P IN a eaaa ee p MEE EM 2 T T T T T T 5 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 ELAPSED TIME seconds Figure 1 3 Typical Model 55i Span Gas Chromatogram The Model 55 is calibrated using a mixture of methane and non methane hydrocarbons which simulates the actual sample In most applications propane is a good choice for the non methane component Instrument calibration may be initiated manually or may be performed automatically at user specified intervals Calibration is achieved by flooding the sample inle
335. the sample time The following example sets the sample time to 30 seconds Send EFDA KO 30 Receive EFDA 1 Model 55i Instruction Manual E 7 AK Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration Hardware Configuration E 8 Model 55i Instruction Manual SEMB Km Mr This command sets the methane or non methane m full scale range r according to Table E 5 and Table E 7 respectively The following example sets the methane range to high Send SEMB K1 M3 Receive SEMB O Table E 8 Measurement Values Measurement Description 1 Methane 2 Non Methane SINT KO This command starts a measurement cycle Send SINT KO Receive SINT O STBY KO This command puts the instrument in standby cancelling any run in progress and stopping further runs if in auto mode Send STBY KO Receive STBY 1 ASOL Km This command returns the requested oven temperature setpoint in Kelvin according to Table E 9 The following example reports that the column oven setpoint is 343 K 70 C If both are requested the detector oven is reported first Send ASOL K2 Receive ASOL O 343 Table E 9 Oven Temperature Values Temperature Description 0 Both 1 Detector Base 2 Column Base Thermo Fisher Scientific Communications Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific AK Protocol Commands Communications Configuration ESOL Km ttt This command sets the requested oven setpoint to 7 7 where ttt is an integer representation of the temp
336. tion Table 6 10 provides possible problems that follow the sample chromatogram and help narrow down the problem to one instrument area Table 6 2 Troubleshooting General Guide Malfunction Possible Cause Action Does not start up the No power Check the line to confirm that power is display backlight is available and that it matches the voltage and off and nothing is on frequency configuration of the instrument the display Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Malfunction Front panel display functions but pump heaters and or fan do not operate correctly Possible Cause Main fuses are blown or missing Bad switch or wiring connection DC power supply failure DC power distribution failure Display failure Wrong voltage configuration Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Unplug the power cord to the analyzer open the fuse drawer on the back panel and check fuses visually or with a multimeter Unplug the power cord to the analyzer disconnect the switch on the front panel and check operation with a multimeter Check the green LED on the back edge of the power supply If the LED is off the supply has failed Check 24 V output using a multimeter Check surface mount LEDs labeled 24V PWR on the motherboard interface board If lit power is OK If possible check instrument function through RS 232 or Ethernet Call Thermo Fisher Scientific Service Department
337. tion Table B 11 Power Up Mode Values Value Power up Mode 0 Local Unlocked Mode default 1 Remote Locked Mode program no This command reports the analyzer s model information and program version number Send program no Receive program no iSeries 55i 01 00 01 074 layout ack This command reports the stale layout layout change indicator that is attached to each response if the erec layout has changed since the last time erec layout was requested according to Table B 12 The following example reports that the instrument is configured to do nothing Send layout ack Receive layout ack O set layout ack value This command disables the stale layout layout change indicator that is attached to each response if the erec layout has changed since the last time erec layout was requested where value represents the function according to Table B 12 Send set layout ack 1 Receive set layout ack 1 ok Table B 12 Layout Ack Values Value Function 0 Do nothing default 1 Append tz This command reports the tz timezone string for the NTP server See Network Time Protocol Server in the Communications Settings section of the Operation chapter for more information Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual B 47 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration 1 0 Configuration B 48 Model 55i Instruction Manual Send tz Receive tz EST 5EDT set tz string This command sets the ti
338. tion of analog outputs to zero with the active state being high Send din 5 Receive din 5 9 AOUTS TO ZERO high Model 55i Instruction Manual B 49 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 50 Model 55i Instruction Manual set din channel index state This command assigns digital input channel 1 16 to activate the action indicated by index 1 12 when the input transitions to the designated state high or low Use the list var din command to obtain the list of supported index values and corresponding actions The example below sets the digital input channel 1 to 3 on a low to high transition Send set din 1 3 high Receive set din 1 3 high ok dout channel This command reports the index number output variable and the active state assigned to digital output channel The following example reports output 4 to be assigned an index number 11 corresponding to action of general alarm Send dout 4 Receive dout 4 11 GEN ALARM open set dout channel index state This command assigns digital output channel 1 10 to be assigned to the action associated with index 1 34 and assigns it an active state of state open or closed Use the list var dout command to obtain the list of supported index values and corresponding state The following example sets the digital output channel 4 to state 11 Send set dout 4 11 open Receive set dout 4 11 open ok dtoa channel This command reports the outputs of the 6 or
339. tion of the 8 streaming data output items current streaming interval data format timestamp flags and raw data streaming settings The Choose Stream Data submenu displays a list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config Bs EEE ILL The Streaming Data Interval screen is used to adjust how frequently a new record will be generated The following interval times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Streaming Data Config Interval Bs EEE ILL Note Add Labels Prepend Timestamp Add Flags and Sream Raw Data are toggle items that change between yes or no when selected A The Choose Stream Data screen displays a list of the types of data that can be sent via streaming data Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Streaming Data Config Item 1 8 Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 33 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Concentrations Other Measurements 3 34 Model 55i Instruction Manual The Concentrations screen allows the user
340. tion Manual B 7 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 8 Model 55i Instruction Manual Command Description Page layout ack Reports disables stale layout layout changed indicator B 47 le left Simulates pressing left pushbutton B 31 list din Lists current selection for digital inputs B 51 list dout Lists current selection for digital outputs B 51 list Irec Lists current selection Irec logging data B 22 list sp Lists current selection in the scratchpad list B 22 list srec Lists current selection srec logging data B 22 list stream Lists current selection streaming data output B 22 list var aout Reports list of analog output index numbers and variables B 51 list var din Reports list of digital input index numbers and variables B 51 list var dout Reports list of digital output index numbers and variables B 51 Ir Reports the last Irec stored B 23 Irec Reports maximum number of Irecs B 23 Irec format Reports sets output format for Irecs ASCII or binary B 24 Irec layout Reports current layout of Irec data B 25 Irec mem size Reports maximum number of Irecs that can be stored B 25 malloc Irec Reports sets memory allocation for Irecs B 25 malloc srec Reports sets memory allocation for srecs B 25 me menu Simulates pressing menu pushbutton B 31 mode Reports sets operating mode as local or remote B 45 nm alarm level Reports sets current non methane concentration m
341. to assign one of the concentrations to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings Streaming Data Config select Item Concentrations The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Streaming Data Config select Item Other Measurements Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Inputs TCP IP Settings Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to assign an analog input signal none or analog inputs 1 8 to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Analog Inputs EH DHOBMI The TCP IP Settings menu is used for defining parameters that are required for Ethernet communications Note The instrument p
342. tool is likely to cause damage A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A Model 55i Instruction Manual iii About This Manual FCC Compliance FCC Compliance WEEE Symbol iv Model 55i Instruction Manual Alert Description The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other ketone based or aromatic solvent to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the u
343. tput Config select Channel Choose Signal to Output OEH BM fo oat E S EA Table 3 5 Signal Type Group Choices Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs None None None METHANE Detector Temperature Analog Input 1 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed NMHC Filter Temperature Analog Input 2 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed THC Column Temperature Analog Input 3 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Flame Temperature Analog Input 4 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Internal Temperature Analog Input 5 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Air Pressure Analog Input 6 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Input Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific Concentrations Other Measurements Operation Instrument Controls Menu Analog Inputs Carrier Pressure Analog Input 7 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Fuel Pressure Analog Input 8 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Raw Signal Fame Status CH4 Peak Height CH4 Peak Retention Time CH4 Baseline CH4 LOD NMHC Peak Height NMHC Peak Area NMHC Base Start NMHC Base End NMHC LOD NMHC Start Index NMHC End Index NMHC Maximum Slope NMHC Minimum Slope NMHC Data Points External Alarms The Analog Input Configuration menu displays a list of the 8 analog inpu
344. trial or welding regulators that usually have a rubber or polymeric diaphragm Polymeric diaphragms tend to give off organic compounds that will interfere with the instrument operation A Plumbing Lines and All support gases are connected to the rear panel of the instrument using Fittings 1 4 inch OD tubing and compression fittings see Figure 2 1 To avoid potential leaks that could result from mixing of different fitting types use the hardware supplied with the instrument If additional fittings are required contact the service department for recommendations on selecting the correct materials Choice of gas lines should be given careful consideration While lines made of plastic materials such as Teflon are easy to handle they can give off organic vapors and are sometimes permeable to permanent gases For best performance the use of pre cleaned GC grade copper or steel is recommended In most cases pre cleaned copper tubing purchased from a GC supply house is recommended If other materials are used the lines should be kept as short as possible 2 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Gas Scrubbers Combustion Air Thermo Fisher Scientific EXTERNAL ACCESSORY 955 RS 232 488 20 ETHERNET POWER FAIL RELAY DIGITAL INPUTS ANALOG VOLTAGE OUTPUTS 2 DIGITAL EUR Installation Selecting Hardware and Support Gases CARRIER AIR FUEL ACTUATOR FID SIG CAL OUT 1o EXPANSION CA
345. twork Time Protocol NTP server This should be set to the timezone that the instrument is located in If the exact timezone is not shown in the list it may be entered via the C LINK tz command see Appendix B The selections are UTC GMT EST GMT 5 CST GMT 6 MST GMT 7 PST GMT 8 YST GMT 9 HST GMT 10 NST GMT 11 DLW GMT 12 CET GMT 1 EET GMT 2 BST GMT 3 DLT GMT 4 ECH GMT 5 FOX GMT 6 GLF GMT 7 CCT GMT 8 JST GMT 9 GST GMT 10 LMA GMT 11 DLE GMT 12 EDT GMT 5 4 CDT GMT 6 5 MDT GMT 7 6 and PDT GMT 8 7 Note The current timezone may say NULL before the timezone is set for the first time or if the timezone was cleared with a C Link command A 3 52 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Timezone Diagnostics Menu The Diagnostics menu provides access to diagnostic information and functions This menu is useful when troubleshooting the instrument The analog input readings and analog input voltages are only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Program Versions The Program Versions screen read only shows the version numbers of the programs installed Prior to contacting the factory with any questions regarding the instrument please note the product model name and the program version numbers e Inthe Main Menu
346. ue or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Non Methane Conc Min Trigger The External Alarms menu is used to display the external alarm status for alarm 1 2 and 3 only if the external alarm is assigned as a digital input External alarms can be assigned to digital inputs using the Instruments Controls I O Configuration Digital Input Settings menu External alarms can also be logged streamed or output as a digital output by choosing EXT ALARMS from the Other Measurements list e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms External Alarms EH DHOBM The Service menu appears only when the instrument is in the service mode When service mode is active the service wrench icon is displayed on the right side of the status bar To put the instrument into the service mode choose Instrument Controls Service Mode in the Main Menu Advanced diagnostic functions are included in the service mode Meaningful data should not be collected when the instrument is in the service mode Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 73 Operation Service Menu Set Oven Temperatures Detector Oven Temperature 3 74 Model 55i Instruction Manual e Inthe Main Menu choose Service ip priori FiLSGgUPbPI The Set Oven Temperatures menu allows the user to adjust the set points for the detector and column heaters e Inthe Main Menu choose Service
347. ue should be equivalent to the current ambient temperature 5 C 8 Column PMP COL Thermocouple Disconnect the column thermocouple from the measurement interface board J14 Connect the column thermocouple to the electronic temperature gauge The Thermo Fisher Scientific Adjusting Critical Gas Flows Preliminary Set Up Adjusting For Hydrogen Fuel Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Adjusting Critical Gas Flows measurement value should be equivalent to the current ambient temperature 5 C This section provides the necessary procedural steps to adjust all critical gas flows essential for proper instrument operation with either hydrogen fuel H5 or mixed fuel H2 He supplies Equipment Required 0 500 cc min Flow meter accurate to 2 0 Note Pressures are set at the factory and should not be arbitrarily changed A Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A Perform the following preliminary set up procedure before adjusting for hydrogen fuel H or adjusting for mixed fuel H2 He fuel 1 Before proceeding ensure that the instrument is in FLAME OUT and the oven temperatures are at the prescribed set points and fully equilibrated 2 Remove the instrument cover and disconnect the IGN BIAS supply cable at J27 located on the measurement interface board 3 Connect a source of clean dry air to the instrument s air bulkhead on the rear panel and set the suppl
348. ument Control 8 4 Model 55i Instruction Manual adjustable from the front panel allowing the user to set the pressure control values and receive readings corresponding to the actual regulated output pressures The overall pressure control scheme used by the analyzer allows the controllers to regulate both the ignition and running pressure settings These pressure settings provide separate discrete control of all gas flow rates used in both of the FID s operating modes ignite and run The Separation Column acts as a trap to separate out methane from non methane hydrocarbons present in the sample stream It is comprised of a series of proprietary packing materials stacked in series and designed to allow methane to free flow through the column directly to the FID while entraining the heavier hydrocarbons as they traverse the column length during the inject mode When the instrument is placed in the Backflush mode the carrier gas reverses direction through the column and carries off the trapped hydrocarbons arriving at the FID as a single bell shaped peak The fuel solenoid is a safety valve that is used to shut off the fuel supply whenever the FID flame is not lit The valve is a two way normally closed 24 volt DC solenoid located on the inside rear panel The calibration solenoid valve can be used to control the flow of calibration gas during calibration or calibration checks See Chapter 4 Calibration for a complete description of the
349. units of concentration Therefore the unit selected must match the units used to express the concentration of the span gas It is especially important to understand that when measuring gases and vapors the common units of ppb ppm and ppmc are based on volume of contaminant per volume of sample gas A gas containing 100 ppm of methane would contain 100 liters of methane per 1 000 000 liters of gas In contrast concentrations expressed in mg m and ug m are based on the mass of contaminant per unit volume of sample gas Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 9 Operation Range Menu Therefore conversion between units of ppm and mg m requires knowledge of the specific hydrocarbon present in the sample A e Inthe Main Menu choose Range Conc Units f9 RCRUSE IE pi pipri CREE OT REST USEBTLIL i i PU Eke UGE EE Ped PH hci ibi Methane Range The Methane Range screen defines the concentration range of the analog outputs For example selecting a methane range of 0 200 ppm sets the analog output to concentrations between 0 and 200 ppm Available ranges include 0 20 0 200 and 0 2000 with a medium sample loop The display shows the current methane range The next line of the display is used to change the range e Inthe Main Menu choose Range Methane Range DPI o PIL PIPPO Non Methane Range The Non Methane Range screen defines the concentration range of the analog outputs For example sel
350. uns between auto calibration actions and is displayed only if calibration mode is set to BY RUN or OFF This can be set to any value between 2 and 999 3 14 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Parameters Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters Auto Calibration Setup Settings Number of Runs Initial Time The Initial Time screen is used to adjust the number of runs between auto calibration actions and is displayed only if calibration mode is set to BY TIME or OFF The user can set the initial time and date and the analyzer will run at every period interval thereafter The screen initially displays the next time that an auto calibration event will occur e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters gt Auto Calibration Setup Settings Initial Time Period The Period screen is used to adjust the number of hours between auto calibration actions This may be set from 0 to 99 hours inclusive If the period is set to 0 the calibration will only be run a single time e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Parameters Auto Calibration Setup Settings Period Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 15 Operation Calibration Parameters Menu Calibration Reset The Calibration Reset screen is used to switch between auto calibration OR auto check modes and may be set to either YES or NO If it is set to YES an auto c
351. used to select the number of records to view ending with the most recent It also shows the total number of records that have been logged for the selected record type Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 23 Operation Instrument Controls Menu TERT Py Tce DH piopi iii Labi ik i The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the records and the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to view the data items for each record BOR Theor Py Tame ob priori Poe Lai LCi ib i Date and Time The Date and Time screen is used to set a start date and time for which to view logged data For example if 20 Jan 2007 10 00 is entered then the first logged data record that is displayed is the first record after this time If set to one minute logging this would be at 20 Jan 2007 10 01 DH Guided no a E SO a EA The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the records and the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to view the data items for each record 3 24 Model 55 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu DUREE TE PE Tg i i Dir EH DHOBM Vd PHLPUPPG Erase Log The Erase Log screen is used to erase all saved data for the selected record type only not both srecs and lrecs This will only erase the logged data it will not re
352. ve Send screen Receive screen This is an iSeries instrument Screen information not available backflush time This command reports the delay value from the injection to the switching of the mulitport valve to the backflush position The following example reports that the backflush time is 20 seconds Send backflush time Receive backflush time 20 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration set backflush time value This command sets the delay valve from the injection to the switching of the multiport valve to the backflush position to value where value is a floating point number representing 0 999 in seconds In addition the backflush time must be between the cl window end time 2 0 seconds and the nm window start time The following example sets the backflush time delay to 15 0 seconds Send set backflush time 15 Receive set backflush time 15 ok cl window start nm window start These commands report the delay time from injection to the opening of the methane and non methane window The following example reports that the methane window start time is 10 seconds Send c1 window start Receive c1 window start 10 0 set cl window start va ue set nm window start value These commands set the delay time from the injection to the opening of the methane and non methane window to value where value is a floating point number representing 0 999 in seconds In
353. vel This command sets the LCD screen s evel of contrast according to Table B 8 The following example sets the contrast level to 50 Send set contrast 10 Receive set contrast 10 ok Table B 8 Contrast Levels Level Contrast Level 0 0 1 5 2 10 3 15 Model 55i Instruction Manual B 37 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration B 38 Model 55i Instruction Manual Level Contrast Level 4 20 5 25 6 30 7 35 8 4096 g 45 10 5096 11 5596 12 6096 13 6596 14 7096 15 7596 16 8096 17 85 18 90 19 95 20 100 date This command reports the current date in mm dd yy format The following example reports the date as December 1 2006 Send date Receive date 12 01 06 set date mm dd yy mm month dd day yy year This command sets the date of the analyzer s internal clock The following example sets the date to December 1 2006 Send set date 12 01 06 Receive set date 12 01 06 ok set default params This command sets all the parameters to their default values This does not affect the factory calibrated parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration Note The instrument will re boot and connection will be lost after this command is issued A Send set default params Receive set default params ok fuel type This command reports the current fuel type T
354. wing example sets the C1 concentration minimum alarm trigger to ceiling Send set alarm trig conc c1 1 Receive set alarm trig conc c1 1 ok Table B 4 Alarm Trigger Values Value Alarm Trigger 0 Floor 1 Ceiling bias voltage This command reports the current bias supply voltage The following example reports that the bias voltage is 276 190 volts Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics Send bias voltage Receive bias voltage 276 190 V diag volt mb This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the motherboard The sequence of voltages is positive 24 positive 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt mb Receive diag volt mb 23 90 14 89 4 94 3 27 3 16 diag volt mib This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the measurement interface board The sequence of voltages is positive 24 positive 15 negative 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 and detector bias voltage Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt mib Receive diag volt mib 23 96 14 98 15 05 4 96 3 27 293 97 diag volt iob This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the I O expansion board The sequence of voltages is positive 24 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt iob Receive diag volt iob 23 96 4 96 3 27 3
355. y The Run History screen is a list of diagnostic data from the 5 most recent calibrations This includes date and time of calibration the type of calibration activity the signal intensity produced by the zero and or span gas and the other diagnostic information The possible calibration types include zero adjust span adjust manual calibration and automatic calibration For detailed calibration procedures and reports refer to Chapter 4 Calibration Note If a calibration fails or produces a fault condition it is noted in the Calibration History and the unit will continue to operate using the last valid calibration A e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Run History 3 58 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu IEEE TE PE Tg i i EH iv Analog Input Readings The Analog Input Readings screen read only displays the 8 user scaled analog readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Readings Analog Input Voltages The Analog Input Voltages screen read only displays the 8 raw analog voltage readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Voltages RHE TE RORHSE TI pi reo bet Bs PUHE CIL i iNi i Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 55i Instruction Manual 3 59 Operation Diagnostics Menu Digital Inputs Relay State
356. y of residual fuel in the detector keep your face away from the FID The ignitor pulse is clearly visible from a distance when the thermocouple has been removed A 13 If the ignitor is pulsing correctly shut the instrument power OFF replace the flame sensor thermocouple re install the fuel line to the rear panel and re install the oven cover Note If the replacement ignitor does not appear to be functioning please call the service center for further instruction A For the FID to operate correctly a bias of approximately 280 to 300 volts is applied to the detector jet If the bias fails the FID produces weak signals excessive drift high noise poor sensitivity or poor reproducibility The voltage is supplied by circuitry located on the measurement interface board Use the following procedure to check the detector bias voltage Equipment Required Multimeter Thermo Fisher Scientific Removing the Thermo Fisher Scientific Detector Servicing Removing the Detector Wrench open end 7 16 inch Note Before testing the bias voltage with a voltmeter it should be checked with the built in diagnostics described in Chapter 3 Operation A 1 Locate TP3 next to the IGN BIAS connector J27 on the measurement interface board Connect a multimeter between TP3 and ground Note The voltage should be between 260 and 320 volts If the reading is outside the range then the power supply might have failed and will need to be
357. y pressure to 60 psi 4 Connect a flow meter to the FID exhaust located on the rear panel 5 Make sure the instrument is in Service Mode Refer to Accessing the Service Mode in this chapter if necessary Use the following procedure to adjust the gas flows for hydrogen fuel This includes e Set the Fuel Pressure e Set the Sample Pressure Model 55i Instruction Manual 7 49 Servicing Adjusting Critical Gas Flows Set the Fuel Pressure Set the Carrier Pressure Set the Combustion Air 7 50 Model 55i Instruction Manual Pressure Set the Combustion Air Pressure Connect hydrogen and air to the instrument s fuel bulkhead fitting and air bulkhead fitting respectively on the rear panel and set both supply pressures to 60 psi Turn off any calibration gas supplies entering the instrument and relieve the pressure Make sure the manual air pressure regulator that is mounted to the oven is set to approximately 22 psi From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Select Fuel gt Hydrogen From the Main Menu choose Service Set Pressure and Flow For more information see Set Pressure and Flow in Chapter 3 Operation From the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose H2 Fuel Run Set the pressure to create a fuel flow of 48 ml min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Return to the Set Pressure and Flow
358. ys the current filter temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits 3 64 Model 55i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu range from 95 to 205 C These values should be set relatively tightly around the set point as defined in the Service gt Set Oven Temperatures gt Detector Oven screen If the filter temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Filter Temp Min and Max Filter The Minimum Filter Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the Temperature Limits minimum filter temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum filter temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Filter Temp Min or Max Column The Column Temperature screen displays the current column oven Temperature temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 45 to 155 C These values should be set relatively tightly around the set point as defined in the Service gt Set Oven Temperatures gt Column Oven screen If the column temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Al
359. zero and span plumbing and operation The firmware tasks are organized into four areas e Instrument Control e Monitoring Signals e Measurement Calculations e Output Communication Low level embedded processors are used to control the various functions on the boards such as analog and digital I O and heater control These processors are controlled over a serial interface with a single high level processor that also controls the front panel user interface The low level processors all run a common piece of firmware that is bundled with the high level firmware and loaded on power up if a different version is detected Thermo Fisher Scientific Monitoring Signals Output Communication Thermo Fisher Scientific Electronics System Description Electronics Each board has a specific address that is used by the firmware to identify what functions are supported on that board This address is also used for communication between the low level processors and the high level processor Every tenth of a second the frequency counters analog I O and digital I O are read and written to by the low level processors The counters are accumulated over the past second and the analog inputs are averaged over that second The high level processor polls the low level processors once per second to exchange the measurement and control data Signals are gathered from the low level processors once per second and then processed by the high level proce
360. zing the inlet In some cases it may be preferable to shut off or remove the internal pump and add a bypass Figure 2 5 illustrates the atmospheric dump bypass plumbing required when an external pump is used Fluctuations of sample inlet pressures may cause problems with repeatability and accuracy of hydrocarbon measurements If the inlet pressure is expected to fluctuate an external pump may be added or in some cases a backpressure regulator can be included in the sampling system In addition if the sample is being drawn from a high temperature source a heated sample line is required and the bulkhead connection must be wrapped with insulation to avoid formation of a cold spot Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific N Span Gas Connections Installation Connecting Support Gases CAUTION During operation the sample intake sample bypass and FID exhaust bulkheads are extremely hot Use caution when working with a hot instrument A Vent to Exhaust Line at Instrument Bulkhead Atmospheric Pressure C IWAN S Input Gas Line delivering sample at positive pressure Figure 2 3 Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing Span gas must be introduced to the instrument through the sample inlet The internal span control valve allows the instrument micro processor to turn the span gas on and off but it does not connect the span gas to the sampling system If the internal span valve will be us

Model 55i - User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents